A relation of a voyage made in the years 1695, 1696, 1697, on the coasts of Africa, Streights of Magellan, Brasil, Cayenna, and the Antilles, by a squadron of French men of war, under the command of M. de Gennes by the Sieur Froger ... ; illustrated with divers strange figures, drawn to the life.
         Relation d'un voyage fait en 1695, 1696, & 1697, aux côtes d'Afrique, d'etroit de Magellan, Brezil, Cayenne, & Isles Antilles, par une escadre des vaisseaux du roi, commandée par m. de Gennes. English
         Froger, François, b. 1676.
      
       
         
           1698
        
      
       Approx. 225 KB of XML-encoded text transcribed from 111 1-bit group-IV TIFF page images.
       
         Text Creation Partnership,
         Ann Arbor, MI ; Oxford (UK) :
         2008-09 (EEBO-TCP Phase 1).
         A40503
         Wing F2233
         ESTC R38897
         18186762
         ocm 18186762
         106963
         
           
            This keyboarded and encoded edition of the work described above is co-owned by the institutions providing financial support to the Early English Books Online Text Creation Partnership. This Phase I text is available for reuse, according to the terms of
             Creative Commons 0 1.0 Universal
            . The text can be copied, modified, distributed and performed, even for commercial purposes, all without asking permission.
          
        
      
       
         Early English books online.
      
       
         (EEBO-TCP ; phase 1, no. A40503)
         Transcribed from: (Early English Books Online ; image set 106963)
         Images scanned from microfilm: (Early English books, 1641-1700 ; 1123:33)
      
       
         
           
             A relation of a voyage made in the years 1695, 1696, 1697, on the coasts of Africa, Streights of Magellan, Brasil, Cayenna, and the Antilles, by a squadron of French men of war, under the command of M. de Gennes by the Sieur Froger ... ; illustrated with divers strange figures, drawn to the life.
             Relation d'un voyage fait en 1695, 1696, & 1697, aux côtes d'Afrique, d'etroit de Magellan, Brezil, Cayenne, & Isles Antilles, par une escadre des vaisseaux du roi, commandée par m. de Gennes. English
             Froger, François, b. 1676.
          
           [9], 173 [i.e. 170], [3] p., [19] leaves of plates : ill., maps.
           
             Printed for M. Gillyflower ...; W. Freeman, M. Wotton ...; J. Walthoe ...; and R. Parker ...,
             London :
             1698.
          
           
             Translated from the French-cf. NUC pre-1956 imprints.
             Frontispiece engraved with title: A iournal of a late voyage of Mr. de Gennes to the Straits of Magellan.
             Running title: A relation of the voyage of M. de Gennes.
             Numbers 92-95 not used in pagination.
             Includes marginal notes.
             Reproduction of original in the British Library.
          
        
      
    
     
       
         Created by converting TCP files to TEI P5 using tcp2tei.xsl, TEI @ Oxford.
         Re-processed by University of Nebraska-Lincoln and Northwestern, with changes to facilitate morpho-syntactic tagging. Gap elements of known extent have been transformed into placeholder characters or elements to simplify the filling in of gaps by user contributors.
      
       
         EEBO-TCP is a partnership between the Universities of Michigan and Oxford and the publisher ProQuest to create accurately transcribed and encoded texts based on the image sets published by ProQuest via their Early English Books Online (EEBO) database (http://eebo.chadwyck.com). The general aim of EEBO-TCP is to encode one copy (usually the first edition) of every monographic English-language title published between 1473 and 1700 available in EEBO.
         EEBO-TCP aimed to produce large quantities of textual data within the usual project restraints of time and funding, and therefore chose to create diplomatic transcriptions (as opposed to critical editions) with light-touch, mainly structural encoding based on the Text Encoding Initiative (http://www.tei-c.org).
         The EEBO-TCP project was divided into two phases. The 25,363 texts created during Phase 1 of the project have been released into the public domain as of 1 January 2015. Anyone can now take and use these texts for their own purposes, but we respectfully request that due credit and attribution is given to their original source.
         Users should be aware of the process of creating the TCP texts, and therefore of any assumptions that can be made about the data.
         Text selection was based on the New Cambridge Bibliography of English Literature (NCBEL). If an author (or for an anonymous work, the title) appears in NCBEL, then their works are eligible for inclusion. Selection was intended to range over a wide variety of subject areas, to reflect the true nature of the print record of the period. In general, first editions of a works in English were prioritized, although there are a number of works in other languages, notably Latin and Welsh, included and sometimes a second or later edition of a work was chosen if there was a compelling reason to do so.
         Image sets were sent to external keying companies for transcription and basic encoding. Quality assurance was then carried out by editorial teams in Oxford and Michigan. 5% (or 5 pages, whichever is the greater) of each text was proofread for accuracy and those which did not meet QA standards were returned to the keyers to be redone. After proofreading, the encoding was enhanced and/or corrected and characters marked as illegible were corrected where possible up to a limit of 100 instances per text. Any remaining illegibles were encoded as <gap>s. Understanding these processes should make clear that, while the overall quality of TCP data is very good, some errors will remain and some readable characters will be marked as illegible. Users should bear in mind that in all likelihood such instances will never have been looked at by a TCP editor.
         The texts were encoded and linked to page images in accordance with level 4 of the TEI in Libraries guidelines.
         Copies of the texts have been issued variously as SGML (TCP schema; ASCII text with mnemonic sdata character entities); displayable XML (TCP schema; characters represented either as UTF-8 Unicode or text strings within braces); or lossless XML (TEI P5, characters represented either as UTF-8 Unicode or TEI g elements).
         
          Keying and markup guidelines are available at the
           Text Creation Partnership web site
          .
        
      
       
         
         
      
    
     
       
         eng
      
       
         
           Voyages and travels.
           South America -- Description and travel.
        
      
    
     
        2006-12 TCP
        Assigned for keying and markup
      
        2006-12 Aptara
        Keyed and coded from ProQuest page images
      
        2007-03 Celeste Ng
        Sampled and proofread
      
        2007-03 Celeste Ng
        Text and markup reviewed and edited
      
        2008-02 pfs
        Batch review (QC) and XML conversion
      
    
  
   
     
       
         
         
           A
           RELATION
           OF
           A
           VOYAGE
           Made
           in
           the
           Years
           1695
           ,
           1696
           ,
           1697.
           on
           the
           Coasts
           of
           Africa
           ,
           Streights
           of
           
             Magellan
             ,
             Brasil
             ,
             Cayenna
          
           ,
           and
           the
           Antilles
           ,
           by
           a
           Squadron
           of
           French
           Men
           of
           War
           ,
           under
           the
           Command
           of
           M.
           
             de
             Gennes
          
           .
        
         
           By
           the
           Sieur
           Froger
           ,
           Voluntier-Engineer
           on
           board
           the
           
             English
             Falcon.
          
           
        
         
           Illustrated
           with
           divers
           strange
           Figures
           ,
           drawn
           to
           the
           Life
           .
        
         
           LONDON
           ,
           Printed
           for
           
             M.
             Gillyflower
          
           in
           
             Westminster-Hall
             ;
             W.
             Freeman
             ,
             M.
             Wotton
          
           in
           
             Fleet-street
             ;
             J.
             Walthoe
          
           in
           the
           Temple
           ;
           and
           
             R.
             Parker
          
           in
           Cornhill
           .
           1698.
           
        
      
       
         
         
           
             
               A
               IOURNAL
               of
               a
               late
               Voyage
               of
               
                 M
                 
                 r.
                 de
                 Gennes
              
               To
               the
               Straits
               of
               MAGELLAN
               By
               le
               S
               
               r.
               Froger
            
          
        
      
       
         
         
         
         
           TO
           THE
           Right
           Honourable
           THE
           Lord
           Phelippeaux
           ,
           Count
           of
           Maurepas
           ,
           Secretary
           of
           State
           ,
           Superintendant-General
           of
           Maritime
           Affairs
           ,
           &c.
           
        
         
           
             My
             Lord
             ,
          
        
         
           THE
           glorious
           Post
           You
           are
           in
           possession
           of
           ,
           and
           whereunto
           the
           judicious
           Choice
           of
           the
           Greatest
           and
           Wisest
           of
           Kings
           ,
           as
           well
           as
           a
           most
           ripen'd
           Capacity
           ,
           hath
           advanced
           ▪
           You
           to
           ,
           doth
           
           so
           naturally
           appropriate
           this
           Relation
           unto
           Your Self
           ,
           that
           I
           cou'd
           not
           forbear
           ,
           how
           shapeless
           soever
           the
           same
           may
           be
           ,
           to
           present
           it
           to
           Your
           Honour
           :
           I
           had
           no
           other
           Design
           in
           the
           first
           Undertaking
           ,
           than
           to
           compile
           it
           for
           my
           own
           particular
           Instruction
           :
           But
           the
           Silence
           of
           all
           those
           who
           made
           the
           Voyage
           with
           me
           ,
           constrained
           me
           to
           expose
           it
           to
           publick
           View
           .
           Your
           Lordship
           can
           find
           nothing
           here
           ,
           which
           the
           Extent
           of
           Your
           Knowledge
           hath
           not
           already
           anticipated
           ;
           for
           what
           can
           such
           a
           Minister
           be
           ignorant
           of
           ,
           who
           for
           the
           Revolution
           of
           so
           many
           Years
           ,
           and
           in
           such
           hazardous
           Times
           ,
           hath
           sustain'd
           the
           Weight
           of
           Publick
           Affairs
           in
           the
           most
           potent
           Monarchy
           of
           the
           World
           ,
           and
           whose
           Extraction
           is
           from
           a
           Family
           wherein
           Science
           and
           Illustrious
           Qualities
           are
           as
           Hereditary
           as
           Nobleness
           of
           Birth
           ,
           
           and
           Integrity
           of
           Life
           ?
           Wherefore
           ,
           
             My
             Lord
          
           ,
           I
           have
           been
           so
           far
           from
           thinking
           to
           offer
           any
           thing
           New
           to
           Your
           Honour
           upon
           this
           Occasion
           ,
           that
           I
           have
           had
           no
           no
           other
           Intention
           ,
           than
           barely
           to
           make
           known
           the
           ardent
           Desire
           I
           have
           to
           be
           in
           a
           Condition
           to
           merit
           Your
           Protection
           by
           a
           continual
           Application
           of
           my self
           to
           my
           Duty
           ,
           and
           an
           Inviolable
           Adherence
           to
           Your
           Lordship's
           Will
           ,
           who
           am
           with
           profoundest
           Respect
           ,
        
         
           
             My
             Lord
             ,
          
           
             Your
             most
             Humble
             ,
             and
             most
             Obedient
             Servant
             ,
             T.
             Froger
             .
          
        
      
       
         
         
         
           THE
           PREFACE
           .
        
         
           AS
           I
           have
           always
           had
           a
           passionate
           Desire
           to
           see
           Foreign
           Countries
           ,
           I
           was
           no
           sooner
           Master
           of
           my
           own
           Inclinations
           ,
           but
           I
           made
           it
           my
           Business
           ,
           in
           the
           prosecution
           of
           my
           Design
           ,
           to
           attain
           to
           whatever
           might
           contribute
           to
           the
           Imployment
           of
           an
           honest
           Man
           ,
           and
           to
           distinguish
           my self
           from
           those
           Travellers
           ,
           who
           run
           over
           the
           World
           for
           the
           sole
           delight
           they
           have
           of
           seeing
           different
           Objects
           ,
           without
           ever
           putting
           themselves
           in
           a
           Condition
           to
           be
           useful
           to
           their
           Country
           :
           Wherefore
           being
           thus
           inclin'd
           ,
           and
           assisted
           by
           the
           Advice
           of
           my
           Friends
           ,
           I
           took
           to
           the
           Study
           of
           the
           Mathematicks
           ,
           and
           at
           length
           ,
           by
           reading
           the
           Relations
           of
           others
           ,
           made
           my self
           familiarly
           acquainted
           with
           the
           History
           of
           the
           different
           Nations
           of
           the
           World.
           
        
         
         
           The
           Noise
           which
           Monsieur
           
             de
             Gennes
          
           his
           Expedition
           made
           in
           1695
           ,
           determin'd
           my
           Resolutions
           of
           taking
           that
           Opportunity
           to
           go
           abroad
           ,
           as
           believing
           I
           could
           not
           do
           better
           than
           to
           lay
           hold
           of
           the
           Conveniency
           of
           so
           brave
           a
           Voyage
           ;
           and
           therefore
           without
           any
           more
           ado
           ,
           I
           abandon'd
           the
           little
           Experience
           that
           an
           Age
           of
           Nineteen
           Years
           cou'd
           supply
           me
           with
           ,
           to
           the
           Course
           of
           my
           Fortune
           ,
           came
           quickly
           to
           make
           use
           of
           the
           Lessons
           I
           had
           learnt
           (
           as
           well
           as
           the
           chief
           Officers
           of
           the
           Mariners
           )
           under
           one
           of
           the
           greatest
           Masters
           of
           the
           Age
           ;
           and
           began
           now
           to
           come
           to
           the
           practick
           Part
           of
           what
           I
           knew
           before
           but
           in
           the
           Theory
           .
           The
           general
           Idea
           I
           had
           formed
           with
           my self
           of
           the
           Voyage
           ,
           and
           the
           frequent
           Conversations
           I
           had
           with
           our
           Pilots
           ,
           gave
           me
           the
           Advantage
           of
           taking
           notice
           of
           all
           the
           Circumstances
           I
           thought
           necessary
           to
           Sailing
           ;
           And
           I
           am
           not
           to
           omit
           ,
           that
           the
           long
           abode
           I
           have
           made
           in
           divers
           Parts
           ,
           giving
           me
           a
           real
           Taste
           of
           the
           Pleasure
           there
           is
           in
           seeing
           Foreign
           Countries
           ;
           I
           have
           with
           all
           imaginable
           Exactness
           enquir'd
           into
           the
           Commerce
           of
           the
           Place
           ,
           the
           particular
           Interests
           of
           each
           Colony
           ,
           the
           Strength
           ,
           Situation
           ,
           and
           Advantages
           of
           the
           Ports
           ;
           the
           Manners
           ,
           
           Customs
           ,
           and
           Religion
           of
           the
           People
           ;
           and
           lastly
           ,
           the
           Nature
           of
           those
           Fruits
           ,
           Plants
           ,
           Birds
           ,
           Fishes
           ,
           and
           the
           Animals
           that
           seem'd
           to
           have
           any
           thing
           extraordinary
           in
           or
           peculiar
           to
           them
           ,
           and
           these
           I
           have
           set
           out
           in
           the
           best
           manner
           I
           cou'd
           ,
           by
           a
           great
           many
           Copper-Cuts
           ,
           all
           of
           them
           respectively
           fixed
           in
           their
           proper
           Places
           .
        
         
           But
           I
           have
           more
           particularly
           apply'd
           my self
           to
           make
           Charts
           of
           the
           Entrances
           of
           Harbours
           and
           Rivers
           ,
           either
           of
           my self
           ,
           as
           I
           have
           had
           Leasure
           for
           it
           ,
           as
           may
           be
           seen
           in
           those
           I
           have
           given
           of
           
             Gambia
             ,
             Rio-Janeiro
          
           ,
           and
           
           All-Saints-Bay
           ,
           as
           by
           reforming
           the
           Charts
           or
           Memoirs
           that
           have
           been
           taken
           of
           the
           Streight
           of
           Magellan
           ,
           of
           the
           disemboguings
           of
           the
           Isles
           of
           Antilles
           ,
           and
           of
           the
           Government
           of
           Cayenne
           ,
           that
           hath
           not
           yet
           appear'd
           in
           the
           World
           ,
           under
           the
           Name
           of
           
             Aequinoctial
             France
          
           ,
           in
           that
           Extent
           ,
           and
           with
           those
           Limits
           I
           have
           set
           it
           forth
           by
           .
        
         
           I
           hope
           this
           Relation
           will
           meet
           with
           so
           much
           the
           more
           favourable
           Reception
           ,
           seeing
           I
           have
           retrencht
           it
           of
           those
           tedious
           Particulars
           wherewith
           others
           of
           this
           kind
           are
           usually
           stuffed
           ,
           and
           have
           made
           use
           of
           all
           the
           Exactness
           and
           Simplicity
           that
           a
           Work
           requires
           that
           has
           no
           other
           
           than
           Truth
           for
           its
           End
           ,
           and
           wherein
           the
           Reader
           will
           have
           the
           pleasure
           either
           of
           seeing
           new
           Descriptions
           ,
           or
           his
           Judgment
           regulated
           in
           respect
           of
           those
           he
           has
           already
           seen
           elsewhere
           ;
           and
           lastly
           ,
           an
           orderly
           View
           given
           of
           all
           the
           unfortunate
           Disappointments
           of
           so
           noble
           an
           Undertaking
           ,
           that
           had
           been
           made
           ,
           during
           the
           War
           we
           were
           engag'd
           in
           ,
           and
           of
           which
           you
           have
           the
           Subject
           at
           large
           in
           p.
           80
           ,
           85
           ,
           &c.
           and
           so
           onwards
           .
        
      
    
     
       
         
         
           A
           RELATION
           OF
           A
           VOYAGE
           Made
           in
           the
           Years
           1695
           ,
           1696
           ,
           1697.
           to
           the
           Coasts
           of
           Africa
           ,
           the
           Streights
           of
           
             Magellan
             ,
             Brasil
          
           ,
           Cayana
           ,
           and
           the
           Antilles
           or
           Caribby
           Islands
           .
        
         
           VVE
           set
           out
           from
           Rochel
           on
           the
           3d.
           
           of
           
             June
             ,
             A.
             D.
          
           1695.
           to
           navigate
           the
           Southern
           Sea
           ,
           with
           six
           Vessels
           ,
           viz.
           The
           
             English
             Falcon
          
           ,
           furnished
           with
           46
           Pieces
           of
           Cannon
           ,
           and
           260
           Men
           ,
           under
           the
           command
           of
           
             Monsieur
             de
             Gennes
          
           Captain
           :
           The
           
             Sun
             of
             Africa
          
           ,
           carrying
           32
           Pieces
           ,
           and
           220
           Men
           ,
           comcommanded
           
           by
           M.
           
             du
             Pare
          
           ,
           Captain
           of
           the
           Light
           Frigat
           :
           The
           Seditious
           ,
           a
           light
           Frigat
           of
           26
           Guns
           ,
           and
           140
           Men
           ,
           
             M.
             de
             la
             Roque
          
           Commander
           :
           The
           Corvette-Felicity
           of
           8
           Pieces
           of
           Ordnance
           ,
           and
           40
           Men
           :
           The
           Glutton-Pink
           of
           10
           Guns
           ,
           and
           40
           Men
           :
           And
           the
           Fruitful-Pink
           ,
           of
           4
           Guns
           ,
           and
           20
           Men
           :
           These
           two
           Pinks
           carry'd
           two
           Mortars
           and
           600
           Bombs
           ,
           with
           all
           sorts
           of
           Provisions
           and
           Ammunition
           necessary
           for
           a
           long
           Voyage
           .
        
         
           We
           set
           sail
           about
           three
           a-clock
           in
           the
           Morning
           ,
           with
           a
           fair
           North-East
           Wind
           ,
           pass'd
           the
           Pertuis
           or
           Straight
           of
           Antioch
           ,
           and
           before
           Noon
           ,
           entirely
           lost
           the
           sight
           of
           Land.
           
        
         
           On
           the
           7th
           .
           Instant
           at
           Eleven
           of
           the
           Clock
           ,
           we
           discover'd
           at
           the
           distance
           of
           three
           or
           four
           Leagues
           under
           the
           Wind
           ,
           two
           Vessels
           ,
           which
           the
           Felicity
           went
           to
           view
           :
           They
           came
           from
           St.
           Domingo
           ,
           and
           were
           steering
           their
           Course
           for
           Rochel
           .
        
         
           On
           the
           9th
           .
           we
           had
           sight
           of
           another
           Vessel
           ,
           which
           the
           Seditious
           and
           the
           Felicity
           gave
           chase
           to
           ,
           during
           four
           Hours
           :
           The
           latter
           ,
           which
           came
           very
           near
           her
           ,
           inform'd
           us
           ,
           that
           she
           seem'd
           to
           be
           a
           Sally-Man
           ,
           and
           might
           carry
           about
           30
           Pieces
           of
           Cannon
           .
        
         
         
           On
           the
           10th
           .
           at
           Noon
           ,
           we
           made
           15
           Leagues
           a-cross
           Cape
           Finisterre
           .
        
         
           On
           the
           11th
           .
           at
           Break
           of
           day
           ,
           we
           were
           separated
           from
           the
           Seditious
           ,
           and
           the
           Fruitful
           ,
           as
           also
           from
           another
           Vessel
           ,
           which
           follow'd
           us
           from
           Rochel
           .
        
         
           On
           the
           15th
           .
           at
           four
           a-Clock
           in
           the
           Afternoon
           ,
           we
           espy'd
           a
           very
           large
           Ship
           ,
           which
           came
           up
           to
           view
           us
           within
           three
           Cannon-shot
           ,
           and
           afterward
           tack'd
           about
           again
           ;
           whereupon
           we
           gave
           her
           Chace
           ,
           till
           the
           darkness
           of
           the
           Night
           caus'd
           us
           to
           lose
           the
           sight
           of
           her
           .
        
         
           On
           the
           21th
           .
           at
           Sun-Rising
           ,
           we
           discover'd
           the
           Island
           of
           Madera
           ,
           from
           whence
           we
           judg'd
           our selves
           to
           be
           distant
           about
           20
           Leagues
           .
        
         
           On
           the
           22th
           .
           
           at
           11
           a-clock
           at
           Night
           ,
           we
           lost
           the
           Shallop
           with
           Decks
           ,
           which
           
             M.
             de
             Gennes
          
           had
           caus'd
           to
           be
           built
           ,
           on
           purpose
           to
           throw
           out
           the
           Bombs
           :
           For
           as
           she
           was
           tacking
           about
           ,
           whilst
           the
           Sea
           ran
           very
           high
           ,
           her
           Cable
           broke
           ,
           and
           she
           was
           driven
           out
           of
           her
           Course
           .
        
         
           On
           the
           26th
           .
           at
           three
           a-clock
           in
           the
           Morning
           ,
           we
           pass'd
           the
           Tropick
           of
           Cancer
           ;
           at
           Break
           of
           day
           ,
           we
           discover'd
           the
           Land
           of
           Praya
           ;
           and
           in
           the
           Afternoon
           perform'd
           the
           Ceremonies
           of
           the
           
             Tropical
             Baptism
          
           or
           Ducking
           ,
           which
           are
           commonly
           
           us'd
           by
           the
           Mariners
           in
           those
           Places
           .
        
         
           On
           the
           1st
           .
           day
           of
           July
           ,
           
           at
           three
           a-clock
           in
           the
           Morning
           ,
           the
           Corvette
           let
           off
           a
           Gun
           ,
           to
           give
           us
           notice
           that
           she
           was
           near
           Land
           ;
           whereupon
           we
           sail'd
           beyond
           that
           Vessel
           without
           discerning
           her
           ,
           by
           reason
           that
           she
           was
           very
           low
           built
           ,
           and
           the
           Night
           was
           dark
           .
        
         
           On
           the
           3d.
           we
           discover'd
           
             Cape
             Verd
          
           ,
           
           or
           
             Green
             Head
          
           ,
           and
           cast
           Anchor
           at
           11
           a-clock
           at
           Night
           ,
           within
           two
           Leagues
           of
           the
           Island
           of
           Gorea
           :
           The
           next
           Day
           we
           likewise
           rode
           at
           Anchor
           within
           a
           Cannon-shot
           of
           the
           Place
           .
        
         
           The
           Governour
           of
           that
           Island
           immediately
           sent
           to
           compliment
           M.
           
             de
             Gennes
          
           ,
           
           with
           a
           Present
           of
           an
           Ox
           ,
           and
           two
           Dozen
           of
           Pullets
           .
           The
           Person
           who
           brought
           this
           Present
           told
           us
           ,
           That
           the
           Vessels
           of
           the
           East-India
           Company
           pass'd
           by
           a
           little
           while
           ago
           ,
           and
           that
           an
           English
           Deserter
           had
           inform'd
           them
           ,
           That
           almost
           the
           whole
           Garrison
           of
           Gambia
           was
           fall'n
           sick
           ,
           and
           wanted
           Provisions
           ;
           which
           piece
           of
           News
           was
           so
           well
           confirm'd
           to
           
             M.
             de
             Gennes
          
           ,
           even
           by
           the
           Relation
           of
           the
           Governour
           himself
           ;
           that
           if
           the
           Seditious
           and
           the
           Fruitful
           had
           come
           up
           with
           us
           ,
           we
           should
           have
           set
           sail
           the
           
           very
           next
           day
           ,
           in
           order
           to
           besiege
           the
           Fort
           ,
           before
           the
           English
           could
           have
           had
           any
           notice
           of
           our
           Arrival
           .
        
         
           In
           the
           mean
           while
           ,
           waiting
           till
           those
           Ships
           appear'd
           ,
           we
           diverted
           our selves
           ,
           some
           in
           Hunting
           ,
           and
           others
           in
           Fishing
           ;
           nay
           we
           met
           with
           sufficient
           variety
           of
           Divertisements
           ,
           not
           very
           expensive
           ,
           without
           leaving
           the
           Villages
           .
           The
           Negroes
           came
           continually
           on
           board
           with
           their
           *
           Vessels
           full
           of
           Fish
           ,
           which
           they
           gave
           us
           in
           exchange
           for
           Knives
           ,
           Sheets
           of
           Paper
           ,
           little
           pieces
           of
           Iron
           ,
           and
           other
           Toys
           of
           the
           like
           nature
           :
           We
           also
           pierc'd
           some
           Barrels
           of
           Wine
           ,
           and
           setting
           aside
           the
           Heat
           of
           the
           Weather
           ,
           which
           was
           excessive
           ,
           the
           Sports
           and
           Pastimes
           abated
           a
           great
           deal
           of
           the
           Impatience
           that
           we
           had
           to
           go
           to
           Gambia
           .
        
         
           On
           the
           fifth
           Instant
           ,
           
             M.
             de
             Gennes
          
           ,
           M.
           
             du
             Parc
          
           ,
           and
           the
           Governour
           of
           Gorea
           ,
           went
           to
           give
           a
           Visit
           to
           the
           Alcaty
           or
           Governour
           of
           a
           Village
           call'd
           
             The
             Gap
          
           ,
           situate
           on
           the
           Sea-shore
           ,
           near
           a
           small
           Marsh
           ,
           being
           the
           only
           place
           where
           fresh
           Water
           can
           be
           taken
           in
           ;
           upon
           which
           account
           the
           Alcaty
           suffers
           none
           to
           do
           it
           ,
           till
           an
           Agreement
           be
           made
           beforehand
           ,
           to
           give
           him
           a
           Bottle
           of
           Brandy
           for
           every
           Shallop
           .
           He
           receiv'd
           these
           
           Gentlemen
           very
           courteously
           ,
           and
           granted
           their
           Requests
           upon
           good
           Terms
           .
        
         
           The
           next
           Day
           M.
           
             de
             Gennes
          
           invited
           to
           Dinner
           the
           Governour
           of
           Gorea
           ,
           the
           aforesaid
           Alcaty
           of
           Gap
           ,
           and
           another
           Alcaty
           of
           a
           neighbouring
           Village
           ,
           who
           was
           the
           Brother
           of
           a
           Favourite
           of
           the
           King
           of
           Houmel
           ,
           and
           otherwise
           in
           great
           esteem
           for
           his
           Magnanimity
           ,
           and
           for
           being
           one
           of
           the
           most
           robust
           and
           well-set
           Men
           of
           the
           Country
           .
           The
           Alcaty
           of
           Rufisca
           was
           also
           present
           ,
           by
           chance
           ,
           with
           a
           Negro
           Lady
           ,
           the
           Widow
           of
           a
           certain
           Portuguese
           ,
           who
           had
           one
           of
           the
           chief
           Places
           in
           the
           Kingdom
           :
           This
           Lady
           had
           excellent
           Features
           ,
           was
           endow'd
           with
           a
           generous
           Disposition
           ,
           and
           of
           a
           very
           obliging
           Deportment
           ;
           being
           of
           a
           middle-siz'd
           Stature
           ,
           and
           cloath'd
           after
           the
           Portuguese
           Fashion
           .
           M.
           
             du
             Gennes
          
           treated
           them
           all
           magnificently
           ,
           and
           made
           them
           some
           small
           Presents
           :
           He
           was
           also
           desirous
           to
           divert
           them
           with
           a
           Volly
           of
           Cannon
           and
           Musket-shot
           :
           But
           Dinner
           was
           scarce
           ended
           ,
           when
           they
           earnestly
           importun'd
           to
           be
           dismiss'd
           .
           The
           cause
           of
           their
           sudden
           Departure
           being
           unknown
           to
           us
           ,
           we
           were
           not
           a
           little
           surpriz'd
           ,
           in
           regard
           that
           they
           had
           no
           reason
           to
           be
           tir'd
           with
           the
           
           Company
           ;
           till
           the
           Governour
           of
           Gorea
           told
           us
           ,
           
           That
           apparently
           they
           had
           occasion
           to
           ease
           themselves
           ,
           and
           that
           a
           Superstitious
           Custom
           prevail'd
           among
           'em
           ,
           never
           to
           do
           it
           at
           Sea.
           
        
         
           On
           the
           9th
           .
           Instant
           ,
           our
           Shallop
           being
           fitted
           out
           to
           take
           in
           fresh
           Water
           ,
           a
           Storm
           of
           Wind
           arose
           ,
           which
           threw
           her
           on
           the
           Coast
           :
           She
           suffer'd
           little
           Dammage
           ,
           by
           reason
           that
           the
           Shock
           happen'd
           on
           the
           Sand
           :
           Nevertheless
           this
           Accident
           was
           like
           to
           have
           occasion'd
           a
           great
           Contest
           with
           the
           Negroes
           ,
           who
           gave
           it
           out
           ,
           That
           one
           Moiety
           of
           the
           Vessels
           that
           run
           a-ground
           on
           their
           Coasts
           ,
           ought
           to
           be
           appropriated
           to
           their
           Use
           :
           And
           even
           the
           Governour
           of
           Gorea
           himself
           acknowledg'd
           ,
           that
           they
           had
           a
           Right
           to
           such
           a
           Claim
           :
           But
           forasmuch
           as
           this
           Law
           was
           made
           only
           in
           reference
           to
           Merchant-Ships
           ,
           we
           speedily
           set
           some
           of
           our
           Men
           on
           Shore
           ,
           to
           stand
           upon
           their
           Guard
           ;
           and
           for
           farther
           Security
           ,
           retain'd
           seven
           or
           eight
           Negroes
           ,
           who
           were
           come
           on
           board
           to
           trade
           with
           Fish
           :
           In
           the
           mean
           while
           ,
           our
           Carpenters
           wrought
           during
           the
           whole
           Night
           ;
           and
           the
           next
           Day
           in
           the
           Afternoon
           our
           Shallop
           return'd
           laden
           with
           Water
           ,
           and
           as
           sound
           as
           before
           .
        
         
         
           On
           the
           13th
           .
           at
           two
           a-clock
           ,
           two
           Vessels
           appear'd
           ,
           whilst
           our
           Corvette
           was
           sailing
           to
           the
           Village
           of
           Rusisca
           ;
           whereupon
           we
           discharg'd
           a
           Cannon
           to
           cause
           her
           to
           return
           ,
           and
           to
           recal
           all
           the
           Mariners
           on
           board
           :
           We
           likewise
           made
           Signals
           to
           the
           other
           Ships
           ,
           which
           were
           answer'd
           by
           them
           .
           They
           were
           the
           Seditious
           and
           the
           Fruitful
           Pinks
           ,
           which
           came
           to
           join
           with
           us
           again
           ,
           after
           having
           waited
           for
           our
           Arrival
           eleven
           Days
           at
           Madera
           :
           They
           cast
           Anchor
           at
           two
           a-clock
           ,
           and
           the
           next
           Day
           our
           Corvette
           set
           out
           a
           second
           time
           for
           Rufisca
           ,
           to
           get
           some
           Provisions
           ,
           that
           were
           necessary
           for
           our
           departure
           in
           good
           earnest
           .
        
         
           Before
           we
           leave
           Gorea
           ,
           
           it
           may
           not
           be
           improper
           to
           give
           some
           account
           ,
           how
           the
           French
           settled
           in
           that
           Island
           ,
           and
           to
           relate
           what
           I
           have
           seen
           and
           heard
           concerning
           the
           Nature
           of
           the
           Coast
           ,
           and
           the
           Traffick
           and
           Manners
           of
           the
           Inhabitants
           .
        
         
           The
           Island
           of
           Gorea
           is
           distant
           only
           one
           League
           from
           the
           Continent
           ,
           four
           from
           Cape
           Verd
           ,
           and
           may
           be
           about
           half
           a
           League
           in
           Compass
           .
           The
           Hollanders
           first
           fix'd
           a
           Colony
           therein
           ,
           and
           built
           the
           Forts
           of
           St.
           Francis
           and
           St.
           Michael
           ,
           which
           are
           still
           to
           be
           seen
           :
           Afterward
           the
           Count
           
             d'
             Etrées
          
           made
           himself
           Master
           of
           the
           Place
           
             A.
             D.
          
           1678
           :
           The
           
           English
           took
           it
           from
           the
           French
           in
           1692.
           and
           demolish'd
           the
           Forts
           which
           were
           erected
           by
           the
           Hollanders
           :
           At
           last
           the
           Senegal
           Company
           ,
           having
           re-taken
           it
           in
           1693
           ,
           rebuilt
           St.
           
           Michael's
           Fort
           :
           And
           there
           are
           at
           present
           in
           this
           Island
           about
           100
           Frenchmen
           ,
           with
           some
           Families
           of
           Lapto's
           or
           free
           Negro's
           ,
           who
           are
           hir'd
           by
           the
           Company
           to
           trade
           from
           one
           Coast
           to
           another
           .
        
         
           The
           Sea-Coast
           is
           flat
           ,
           sandy
           ,
           and
           in
           many
           places
           very
           barren
           :
           The
           Soil
           brings
           forth
           Millet
           ,
           Rice
           ,
           Tobacco
           ,
           and
           some
           Fruits
           ,
           which
           are
           all
           generally
           very
           insipid
           :
           The
           Country
           is
           every
           where
           beset
           with
           a
           sort
           of
           wild
           Apple
           or
           Crab-Trees
           ,
           that
           grow
           as
           thick
           as
           Broom
           in
           a
           Heath
           or
           Warren
           :
           There
           are
           also
           certain
           small
           Shrubs
           ,
           which
           are
           very
           common
           ;
           their
           Fruit
           ,
           call'd
           Mandanaza
           by
           the
           Negro's
           ,
           being
           no
           bigger
           than
           a
           small
           Nut
           ,
           exactly
           resembles
           an
           Apricock
           in
           Shape
           and
           Colour
           :
           It
           is
           of
           a
           very
           grateful
           Taste
           ,
           but
           very
           unwholsom
           :
           Its
           Leaf
           is
           like
           that
           of
           Ivy
           ,
           but
           of
           a
           somewhat
           lighter
           Green.
           I
           have
           seen
           there
           a
           sort
           of
           Trees
           not
           unlike
           our
           Plum-Trees
           ,
           the
           Fruit
           of
           which
           has
           the
           Colour
           ,
           Bigness
           ,
           and
           almost
           Taste
           of
           our
           Cherries
           ;
           'T
           is
           call'd
           Cahoüar
           ;
           
           and
           I
           have
           caus'd
           the
           Figure
           of
           it
           to
           be
           drawn
           ,
           because
           it
           appear'd
           to
           me
           to
           be
           very
           remarkable
           .
           The
           Negro's
           made
           a
           Present
           to
           us
           ,
           as
           a
           choice
           Banquet
           ,
           of
           certain
           large
           Fruits
           that
           resemble
           small
           Gourds
           ,
           but
           under
           the
           Skin
           ,
           is
           only
           a
           kind
           of
           Substance
           like
           dress'd
           Flax
           :
           They
           cause
           them
           to
           be
           roasted
           under
           Embers
           ,
           and
           afterward
           chew
           them
           to
           suck
           out
           the
           Juice
           ,
           which
           is
           as
           yellow
           as
           Saffron
           :
           This
           Fruit
           has
           a
           Stone
           as
           large
           as
           an
           Egg
           ,
           and
           as
           hard
           as
           Iron
           .
           In
           the
           Country
           there
           is
           a
           great
           number
           of
           Palm-Trees
           ,
           out
           of
           which
           the
           Negro's
           extract
           a
           sort
           of
           white
           Liquor
           ,
           that
           we
           call
           Palm-Wine
           ,
           and
           which
           is
           thus
           prepar'd
           :
           They
           make
           an
           Incision
           in
           the
           Trunk
           ,
           and
           apply
           to
           it
           a
           Gourd-Bottle
           ,
           into
           which
           the
           Liquor
           runs
           by
           the
           means
           of
           a
           Pipe
           :
           'T
           is
           very
           pleasant
           to
           drink
           when
           one
           is
           hot
           ;
           but
           at
           the
           end
           of
           two
           or
           three
           Days
           ,
           it
           is
           spoil'd
           ,
           and
           easily
           inebriates
           .
        
         
           
             P
             :
             10.
             
          
           
             An
             unknown
             Bird
             kill'd
             on
             y
             e
             Coaste
             of
             Affrica
             .
          
           
             A
             Storke
             of
             y
             e
             Coaste
             of
             Affrica
             .
          
           
             M.
             Vander
             Gucht
             Scul
             :
          
        
         
           The
           People
           of
           these
           Coasts
           from
           the
           River
           Senegal
           ,
           
           are
           entirely
           black
           ,
           robust
           ,
           and
           well-set
           .
           They
           all
           go
           stark
           naked
           ,
           both
           Men
           and
           Women
           ,
           except
           their
           Privy
           Parts
           ,
           that
           are
           cover'd
           with
           a
           sort
           of
           Cotton-Stuff
           ,
           which
           they
           call
           Pagnes
           :
           They
           are
           very
           slothful
           ,
           and
           always
           hold
           a
           Pipe
           in
           their
           Mouth
           :
           They
           feed
           upon
           nothing
           but
           Millet
           and
           Fish
           ,
           and
           very
           seldom
           eat
           any
           Flesh
           :
           They
           were
           surpriz'd
           to
           see
           us
           eat
           Herbs
           ,
           and
           said
           that
           we
           were
           like
           Horses
           in
           that
           particular
           .
           Their
           Trade
           consists
           in
           Slaves
           ,
           Gold
           ,
           Morphil
           or
           Ivory
           ,
           and
           Wax
           ;
           which
           Commodities
           they
           usually
           exchange
           for
           Iron
           ,
           Hatchets
           ,
           Fusees
           ,
           Coral
           ,
           
           Glasses
           ,
           Knives
           ,
           Paper
           ,
           red
           Stuffs
           ,
           and
           more
           especially
           Brandy
           ;
           in
           which
           they
           take
           so
           great
           delight
           ,
           that
           the
           Son
           ,
           when
           't
           is
           in
           his
           power
           ,
           often
           sells
           his
           Father
           to
           procure
           it
           .
        
         
           map of the River of Gambia
           
             Pag.
             15.
             
          
           
             A
             CHART
             of
             the
             River
             of
             Gambia
             with
             the
             Coasts
             adjacent
          
           
             A
             Scale
             of
             2
             Leagues
          
        
         
           The
           most
           part
           of
           the
           Negroes
           are
           destitute
           of
           Religion
           ,
           
           and
           live
           in
           the
           Woods
           ,
           of
           the
           Booty
           that
           they
           get
           from
           Travellers
           .
           Those
           who
           have
           any
           kind
           of
           Belief
           ,
           follow
           the
           Mahometan
           Sect
           ,
           
           very
           much
           corrupted
           :
           They
           wear
           about
           their
           Neck
           ,
           Arms
           ,
           and
           Legs
           ,
           and
           even
           bind
           about
           their
           Horses
           ,
           little
           Leathern
           Bags
           ,
           which
           they
           call
           Grisgris
           ,
           in
           which
           are
           enclosed
           certain
           Passages
           of
           the
           Alcoran
           ,
           which
           were
           given
           by
           the
           Marabous
           ,
           to
           secure
           them
           from
           venemous
           Beasts
           ,
           and
           from
           all
           sorts
           of
           Wounds
           ;
           an
           abominable
           Superstition
           ,
           which
           they
           equally
           observe
           in
           reference
           to
           their
           manag'd
           War-Horses
           .
           They
           circumcise
           their
           Children
           ,
           but
           not
           till
           they
           have
           attained
           to
           the
           Age
           of
           Twelve
           or
           Thirteen
           Years
           .
           Their
           Sabbath
           is
           kept
           on
           Monday
           ,
           during
           which
           they
           forbear
           working
           ,
           and
           make
           but
           one
           Meal
           .
           They
           have
           no
           considerable
           Festival
           but
           that
           of
           Tabaské
           ,
           which
           happens
           in
           the
           Month
           of
           June
           ;
           and
           for
           the
           celebration
           of
           which
           ,
           they
           prepare
           themselves
           a
           Month
           before
           ,
           by
           continual
           Fasting
           and
           abstaining
           from
           correspondence
           with
           their
           Wives
           :
           Then
           they
           meet
           together
           in
           a
           large
           Plain
           ,
           to
           say
           their
           Prayers
           ,
           and
           to
           be
           reconcil'd
           with
           their
           Enemies
           ,
           every
           one
           bringing
           a
           Goat
           ,
           a
           Calf
           ,
           or
           some
           other
           Animal
           of
           the
           like
           nature
           ,
           which
           the
           Marabous
           ,
           cloath'd
           with
           a
           kind
           of
           Surplice
           made
           of
           white
           Pagnes
           ,
           or
           Cotton-Stuff
           ,
           sacrifice
           to
           Mahomet
           .
           After
           
           ●he
           celebration
           of
           the
           Festival
           ,
           which
           continues
           till
           Evening
           ,
           every
           one
           carries
           away
           his
           Victim
           to
           make
           a
           solemn
           Banquet
           of
           it
           ,
           with
           his
           Family
           ;
           which
           Custom
           seems
           to
           have
           much
           relation
           to
           the
           Jewish
           Passover
           .
        
         
           When
           one
           of
           the
           principal
           Elders
           dies
           ,
           
           the
           Marabous
           embalm
           his
           Body
           ,
           and
           expose
           it
           to
           publick
           View
           in
           a
           Hut
           ,
           where
           the
           Women
           of
           the
           Neighbourhood
           are
           assembled
           to
           lament
           his
           Death
           during
           several
           Days
           .
           At
           last
           when
           these
           Lamentations
           ,
           which
           continue
           more
           or
           less
           ,
           according
           to
           the
           Quality
           of
           the
           deceased
           Person
           ,
           are
           ended
           ,
           the
           Marabous
           wrap
           up
           the
           Corps
           in
           a
           Pagnes
           or
           Cotton-Shrowd
           ,
           and
           bury
           it
           ;
           whilst
           his
           intimate
           Friends
           take
           a
           pride
           in
           stabbing
           themselves
           ,
           to
           shew
           the
           sincerity
           of
           their
           Affection
           ;
           which
           barbarous
           Custom
           they
           blindly
           observe
           ,
           even
           contrary
           to
           the
           Prohibitions
           of
           their
           own
           Religion
           and
           Laws
           .
           This
           is
           all
           that
           I
           have
           seen
           ,
           or
           could
           get
           Information
           of
           ,
           concerning
           those
           Coasts
           ,
           with
           any
           manner
           of
           probability
           .
        
         
           On
           the
           19th
           .
           we
           set
           sail
           for
           the
           River
           of
           Gambia
           ,
           having
           for
           our
           Guides
           two
           Negroes
           ,
           and
           the
           English
           Deserter
           ,
           of
           whom
           we
           have
           already
           made
           mention
           .
           
           We
           sail'd
           along
           the
           Coasts
           four
           or
           five
           Leagues
           in
           length
           ,
           and
           twenty
           the
           next
           day
           .
           At
           6
           a-clock
           in
           the
           Evening
           we
           cast
           Anchor
           within
           three
           Leagues
           and
           a
           half
           of
           the
           Mouth
           of
           the
           River
           ,
           and
           immediately
           sent
           out
           our
           Shallops
           to
           sound
           the
           depth
           of
           it
           ,
           but
           they
           met
           with
           a
           great
           deal
           of
           foul
           Weather
           during
           the
           whole
           Night
           ,
           and
           were
           not
           able
           to
           return
           till
           the
           next
           Day
           at
           Noon
           .
        
         
           On
           the
           22d
           .
           Instant
           ,
           at
           eight
           a-clock
           in
           the
           Morning
           ,
           we
           all
           enter'd
           the
           River
           ,
           with
           English
           Colours
           ,
           and
           at
           Eleven
           we
           saluted
           with
           three
           Cannon-shot
           ,
           a
           thick
           and
           very
           high
           Tree
           ,
           which
           serves
           instead
           of
           a
           Pavilion
           to
           the
           King
           of
           Bar
           ,
           and
           which
           the
           English
           are
           likewise
           wont
           to
           salute
           ,
           as
           often
           as
           they
           come
           into
           ,
           or
           go
           out
           of
           the
           River
           .
           At
           Noon
           we
           ran
           a-ground
           before
           the
           Isle
           of
           Dogs
           ,
           on
           a
           Shelf
           of
           Mud
           ,
           where
           we
           stuck
           above
           two
           Hours
           ,
           and
           could
           not
           get
           off
           without
           some
           difficulty
           .
           At
           last
           at
           Five
           a-clock
           in
           the
           Evening
           ,
           we
           cast
           Anchor
           within
           a
           small
           League
           of
           the
           Fort
           ,
           which
           we
           immediately
           invested
           ,
           with
           the
           Corvette
           and
           the
           Shallops
           ,
           to
           hinder
           the
           Importation
           of
           Provisions
           ,
           or
           of
           any
           manner
           of
           Succours
           .
           We
           
           also
           began
           to
           unmast
           the
           Fruitful
           Pink
           ,
           to
           turn
           it
           into
           a
           Bomb-Galley
           .
        
         
           The
           same
           Evening
           M.
           
             de
             Gennes
          
           sent
           our
           two
           Negro
           Agents
           to
           a
           Village
           called
           Gilofriée
           ,
           situated
           on
           the
           River-side
           ,
           to
           carry
           a
           Letter
           to
           a
           certain
           ancient
           Portuguese
           ,
           nam'd
           
             Don
             Cardos
          
           ,
           whom
           the
           Governour
           of
           Gorea
           had
           assur'd
           us
           to
           be
           well-affected
           to
           the
           French.
           And
           indeed
           ,
           this
           Portuguese
           having
           receiv'd
           the
           Letter
           ,
           came
           to
           salute
           M.
           
             de
             Gennes
          
           ,
           to
           whom
           he
           afterwards
           gave
           an
           exact
           Account
           of
           the
           Condition
           of
           the
           Fort
           ,
           and
           insinuated
           at
           the
           same
           time
           ,
           that
           forasmuch
           as
           the
           English
           were
           not
           well
           belov'd
           by
           the
           King
           of
           Bar
           ,
           it
           would
           be
           no
           difficult
           matter
           ,
           by
           the
           means
           of
           some
           Present
           ,
           to
           bring
           him
           over
           to
           their
           Party
           .
           The
           Chevalier
           
             de
             Fontenay
          
           ,
           our
           second
           Captain
           ,
           went
           at
           two
           a-clock
           in
           the
           Morning
           ,
           to
           compliment
           
             Don
             Cardos
          
           ,
           and
           to
           entreat
           him
           to
           permit
           us
           to
           land
           a
           Body
           of
           Men
           ;
           to
           hinder
           the
           English
           from
           taking
           in
           fresh
           Water
           and
           Provisions
           :
           But
           the
           King
           had
           told
           him
           that
           he
           wou'd
           not
           be
           concern'd
           in
           our
           Quarrels
           ,
           lest
           if
           we
           could
           not
           take
           the
           Fort
           ,
           it
           might
           give
           an
           occasion
           of
           Hatred
           to
           the
           English
           ,
           who
           might
           afterwards
           resent
           the
           Affront
           ;
           and
           
           that
           therefore
           he
           would
           not
           suffer
           any
           one
           to
           land
           ,
           but
           that
           he
           would
           readily
           supply
           us
           with
           all
           Things
           that
           were
           in
           his
           Power
           .
        
         
           On
           the
           23d
           .
           
           Instant
           M.
           
             de
             la
             Roque
          
           went
           to
           summon
           the
           Fort
           to
           surrender
           ,
           and
           upon
           his
           Approach
           ,
           a
           Canoo
           appear'd
           to
           enquire
           of
           him
           what
           were
           his
           Demands
           :
           He
           answer'd
           ,
           That
           he
           was
           desirous
           to
           speak
           with
           the
           Governour
           :
           Whereupon
           he
           was
           conducted
           blind-fold
           to
           the
           Governour
           's
           House
           ,
           and
           was
           receiv'd
           in
           his
           Absence
           by
           the
           King's
           Lieutenant
           ,
           whom
           he
           made
           acquainted
           with
           the
           occasion
           of
           our
           Arrival
           ,
           and
           that
           he
           was
           come
           to
           summon
           the
           Place
           before
           we
           proceeded
           to
           any
           Acts
           of
           Hostility
           .
           M.
           
             de
             la
             Roque
          
           was
           nobly
           treated
           ,
           and
           the
           Healths
           of
           the
           Kings
           of
           England
           and
           France
           were
           drank
           several
           times
           ,
           with
           Volleys
           of
           Cannon-shot
           .
           After
           the
           Collation
           ,
           M.
           
             de
             la
             Roque
          
           return'd
           on
           board
           ,
           with
           three
           English
           Officers
           ,
           whom
           M.
           
             de
             Gennes
          
           entertain'd
           with
           the
           like
           Magnificence
           .
           They
           desir'd
           some
           Days
           of
           Truce
           to
           consult
           about
           the
           Affair
           ,
           but
           no
           longer
           time
           was
           granted
           to
           make
           their
           positive
           Answer
           ,
           than
           till
           six
           a-clock
           the
           next
           Morning
           ;
           so
           that
           they
           were
           reconducted
           
           to
           their
           Fort
           very
           much
           dissatisfy'd
           with
           these
           Proceedings
           ,
           and
           wrote
           the
           following
           Letter
           to
           M.
           
             de
             Gennes
          
           .
        
         
           
             
               A
               Letter
               written
               by
               the
               English
               Officers
               to
               M.
               de
               Gennes
               .
            
             
               
                 From
                 St.
                 James's
                 Fort
                 ,
                 
                   July
                   23.
                   1695
                
                 .
              
               
                 SIR
                 ,
              
            
             
               YOU
               have
               allow'd
               us
               so
               little
               time
               to
               consider
               about
               your
               Summons
               ,
               made
               (
               as
               you
               say
               )
               by
               the
               Order
               of
               the
               French
               King
               ,
               that
               we
               are
               resolv'd
               to
               wait
               for
               your
               Attacks
               ,
               and
               to
               defend
               our selves
               to
               the
               last
               Extremity
               ,
               rather
               than
               to
               Surrender
               ;
               not
               doubting
               but
               to
               meet
               with
               a
               generous
               Enemy
               .
               We
               are
               ,
            
             
               Sir
               ,
               &c.
               
            
          
        
         
           The
           next
           Night
           23
           or
           24
           of
           our
           Shallops
           took
           a
           Brigantine
           and
           several
           Canoos
           ,
           laden
           with
           Provisions
           for
           the
           Fort
           ;
           whilst
           the
           
             Sun
             of
             Africa
          
           gave
           Chace
           to
           another
           Canoo
           ,
           in
           which
           the
           Governour
           was
           passing
           over
           thither
           ,
           who
           perceiving
           their
           close
           Pursuit
           ,
           threw
           
           himself
           into
           the
           Sea
           ,
           and
           made
           his
           Escape
           to
           the
           Woods
           ,
           from
           whence
           he
           found
           means
           to
           retire
           the
           same
           Night
           ,
           without
           being
           discover'd
           .
        
         
           At
           break
           of
           Day
           ,
           we
           set
           out
           two
           of
           our
           Shallops
           ,
           and
           sail'd
           three
           Leagues
           up
           a
           small
           River
           ,
           which
           takes
           its
           Name
           from
           the
           Village
           of
           Block
           ,
           where
           a
           certain
           Prince
           resides
           ,
           who
           assumes
           the
           Title
           of
           Emperor
           ,
           
           and
           who
           is
           almost
           continually
           engag'd
           in
           War
           against
           the
           King
           of
           Bar.
           We
           burnt
           two
           small
           Vessels
           ,
           which
           the
           English
           were
           refitting
           there
           ,
           and
           laded
           our
           Shallops
           with
           two
           Pieces
           of
           Cannon
           ,
           and
           divers
           cast
           Paterero's
           that
           were
           taken
           out
           of
           them
           .
           In
           passing
           down
           the
           River
           ,
           we
           landed
           at
           the
           Village
           of
           Barifet
           ,
           
           where
           a
           Petty
           King
           keeps
           his
           Court
           ,
           who
           is
           tributary
           to
           the
           other
           of
           Block
           .
           This
           Prince
           sent
           us
           word
           ,
           That
           it
           was
           customary
           for
           Strangers
           to
           make
           him
           some
           Present
           ,
           and
           that
           he
           desir'd
           us
           to
           furnish
           him
           with
           a
           Scarlet-Cloak
           :
           We
           contented
           him
           with
           some
           Bottles
           of
           Brandy
           ,
           which
           were
           more
           acceptable
           to
           him
           than
           the
           finest
           Cloak
           in
           the
           World.
           
        
         
           On
           the
           24th
           .
           
           Instant
           ,
           at
           Eight
           a-clock
           in
           the
           Morning
           ,
           the
           Fruitful
           Pink
           discharg'd
           two
           Bombs
           ,
           which
           did
           not
           come
           
           near
           the
           Fort
           ;
           therefore
           M.
           
             de
             Gennes
          
           forbad
           the
           letting
           off
           any
           more
           ,
           and
           determin'd
           to
           wait
           for
           the
           Tide
           of
           Flood
           ,
           in
           order
           to
           level
           the
           Shot
           within
           reach
           of
           the
           Place
           .
           In
           the
           mean
           while
           ,
           the
           Governour
           having
           sent
           a
           Canoo
           with
           a
           White
           Flag
           ,
           to
           desire
           to
           Capitulate
           ,
           two
           Officers
           were
           detain'd
           as
           Hostages
           ,
           and
           M.
           
             de
             la
             Roque
          
           and
           the
           Chevalier
           
             de
             Fontenay
          
           were
           sent
           to
           the
           Fort
           ,
           to
           draw
           up
           the
           Articles
           ,
           which
           were
           sign'd
           the
           same
           Day
           ,
           by
           all
           the
           English
           Officers
           ,
           and
           the
           next
           Day
           ,
           by
           all
           the
           Captains
           of
           the
           Squadron
           .
        
         
           
             
               
                 
                   Articles
                   of
                   Capitulation
                   granted
                   to
                   the
                   Officers
                   of
                   the
                   Garrison
                   of
                   St.
                   James's
                   Fort
                   in
                   the
                   River
                   of
                   Gambia
                   on
                   the
                   Coasts
                   of
                   Africa
                   .
                
                 
                   
                     I.
                     
                  
                   
                     THat
                     the
                     Salaries
                     due
                     to
                     them
                     from
                     the
                     Company
                     shall
                     be
                     paid
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   
                     II.
                     
                  
                   
                     That
                     every
                     Man
                     shall
                     be
                     permitted
                     to
                     carry
                     along
                     with
                     him
                     his
                     Arms
                     ,
                     Baggage
                     ,
                     Chests
                     ,
                     Attire
                     ,
                     Ammunition
                     and
                     
                     Money
                     ,
                     with
                     Drums
                     beating
                     ,
                     and
                     Match
                     lighted
                     ;
                     and
                     that
                     every
                     Officer
                     shall
                     be
                     attended
                     with
                     a
                     young
                     Negro
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   
                     III.
                     
                  
                   
                     That
                     every
                     marry'd
                     Man
                     ,
                     or
                     Inhabitant
                     of
                     the
                     Country
                     ,
                     shall
                     have
                     liberty
                     to
                     continue
                     therein
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   
                     IV.
                     
                  
                   
                     That
                     the
                     Commissioners
                     for
                     Trade
                     shall
                     enjoy
                     the
                     same
                     Privilege
                     ,
                     in
                     repairing
                     thither
                     ,
                     and
                     making
                     the
                     French
                     a
                     Return
                     of
                     what
                     they
                     have
                     traded
                     for
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   
                     V.
                     
                  
                   
                     That
                     the
                     Sieur
                     
                       Charles
                       Daval
                    
                     ,
                     a
                     French
                     Man
                     settled
                     in
                     England
                     for
                     the
                     Space
                     of
                     16
                     Years
                     ,
                     shall
                     enjoy
                     the
                     same
                     Privilege
                     as
                     the
                     Governour
                     himself
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   
                     VI.
                     
                  
                   
                     That
                     two
                     Days
                     shall
                     be
                     allow'd
                     them
                     ,
                     to
                     make
                     up
                     their
                     Accounts
                     ;
                     that
                     is
                     to
                     say
                     ,
                     that
                     the
                     Fort
                     shall
                     be
                     deliver'd
                     up
                     on
                     Tuesday
                     Morning
                     at
                     Six
                     of
                     the
                     Clock
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   
                   
                     VII
                     .
                  
                   
                     That
                     Twelve
                     free
                     Negroes
                     who
                     are
                     employ'd
                     in
                     the
                     Company
                     's
                     Service
                     ,
                     shall
                     be
                     permitted
                     to
                     go
                     wheresoever
                     they
                     shall
                     think
                     fit
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   
                     VIII
                     .
                  
                   
                     That
                     a
                     Vessel
                     with
                     three
                     Masts
                     shall
                     be
                     given
                     them
                     ,
                     with
                     Artillery
                     ,
                     Ammunition
                     ,
                     and
                     Provisions
                     to
                     return
                     to
                     England
                     ,
                     without
                     detaining
                     any
                     thing
                     whatever
                     ;
                     and
                     that
                     their
                     Departure
                     shall
                     be
                     within
                     thirty
                     Days
                     at
                     the
                     farthest
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   
                     IX
                     .
                  
                   
                     That
                     they
                     shall
                     have
                     a
                     good
                     Pass-port
                     to
                     go
                     in
                     safety
                     ;
                     and
                     that
                     the
                     English
                     Governour
                     shall
                     in
                     like
                     manner
                     grant
                     an
                     effectual
                     Pass-port
                     to
                     the
                     French
                     Captain
                     ,
                     who
                     is
                     to
                     be
                     their
                     Convoy
                     back
                     again
                     ,
                     that
                     his
                     Cargo
                     may
                     not
                     be
                     impair'd
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   
                     X.
                     
                  
                   
                     The
                     above-mention'd
                     Articles
                     being
                     granted
                     ,
                     it
                     was
                     declar'd
                     ,
                     That
                     these
                     
                     Goods
                     belong'd
                     to
                     the
                     Royal
                     Company
                     of
                     
                       England
                       ,
                       viz.
                    
                     500
                     Quintals
                     of
                     Morphil
                     ,
                     300
                     Quintals
                     of
                     Wax
                     ,
                     130
                     Male
                     Negroes
                     ,
                     40
                     Female
                     in
                     the
                     Island
                     ,
                     50
                     at
                     Gilofriée
                     ,
                     and
                     above
                     80000
                     Crowns
                     of
                     Merchandizes
                     at
                     the
                     usual
                     Rates
                     of
                     the
                     Country
                     ,
                     as
                     also
                     72
                     large
                     Cannons
                     mounted
                     ,
                     30
                     dismounted
                     ,
                     and
                     a
                     considerable
                     Quantity
                     of
                     Warlike
                     Ammunition
                     ;
                     and
                     that
                     they
                     shou'd
                     have
                     a
                     Truce
                     till
                     the
                     Commander
                     in
                     Chief
                     return'd
                     an
                     Answer
                     .
                  
                   
                     Sign'd
                     
                       
                         
                           JOHN
                           HAMBURY
                           .
                        
                         
                           DE
                           LA
                           ROQUE
                           .
                        
                         
                           
                             The
                             Chevalier
                          
                           DE
                           FONTENAY
                           .
                        
                      
                    
                  
                
              
            
          
        
         
           On
           the
           27th
           .
           
           at
           break
           of
           Day
           ,
           M.
           
             de
             la
             Perriere
          
           ,
           Major
           of
           the
           Squadron
           ▪
           gave
           notice
           to
           the
           Governour
           to
           prepare
           for
           his
           Departure
           ,
           the
           Term
           which
           was
           granted
           him
           being
           expir'd
           :
           At
           Six
           a-clock
           the
           Shallops
           and
           Canoos
           ready
           fitted
           up
           ,
           attended
           on
           the
           Commander
           ,
           and
           then
           cast
           Anchor
           in
           a
           Line
           ,
           within
           Pistol-shot
           of
           the
           Fort.
           M.
           
             de
             Fontenay
          
           ,
           who
           was
           chosen
           for
           Governour
           ,
           
           first
           came
           on
           Shore
           ,
           where
           the
           English
           Governour
           gave
           him
           the
           Keys
           ,
           and
           embark'd
           the
           same
           time
           to
           go
           on
           board
           the
           Felicity
           .
           Afterwards
           all
           the
           Forces
           landed
           ;
           Sentinels
           were
           set
           in
           all
           the
           necessary
           Posts
           ;
           the
           French
           Standard
           was
           set
           up
           ;
           
             Te
             Deum
          
           was
           sung
           by
           the
           Almoners
           of
           the
           Squadron
           ,
           and
           37
           Cannons
           were
           discharg'd
           .
        
         
           This
           Fort
           was
           square
           ,
           
           with
           four
           Bastions
           ,
           lined
           with
           good
           Brick-Work
           ,
           having
           in
           the
           Out-Works
           three
           pieces
           of
           Fortification
           call'd
           Horse-Shooes
           ,
           and
           several
           Batteries
           along
           the
           Pallisado's
           :
           It
           was
           furnished
           with
           a
           prodigious
           quantity
           Arms
           ,
           and
           the
           Magazines
           of
           Powder
           were
           well
           stor'd
           ;
           insomuch
           that
           't
           is
           certain
           that
           if
           the
           Governour
           ,
           being
           a
           young
           Man
           ,
           (
           who
           was
           more
           intent
           upon
           his
           Pleasures
           than
           on
           the
           putting
           of
           his
           Fort
           in
           a
           good
           Condition
           )
           had
           taken
           care
           to
           keep
           therein
           a
           sufficient
           quantity
           of
           Provisions
           and
           of
           fresh
           Water
           ,
           it
           might
           have
           held
           out
           for
           a
           long
           time
           .
           The
           Situation
           of
           this
           Fort
           was
           very
           advantageous
           ,
           and
           there
           wanted
           only
           a
           Magazine
           of
           Powder
           ,
           and
           a
           Cistern
           Bomb-proof
           ,
           to
           render
           it
           impregnable
           .
        
         
         
           On
           the
           28th
           .
           Instant
           M.
           
             de
             la
             Roque
          
           went
           to
           desire
           the
           King
           of
           Bar
           to
           give
           us
           leave
           to
           take
           possession
           of
           the
           Slaves
           and
           Oxen
           ,
           which
           the
           English
           had
           in
           his
           Dominions
           :
           Whereupon
           the
           King
           reply'd
           ,
           That
           the
           Fort
           being
           surrender'd
           ,
           every
           thing
           that
           was
           left
           on
           the
           Land
           ▪
           of
           very
           good
           right
           belonged
           to
           him
           :
           M.
           
             de
             la
             Roque
          
           told
           him
           ,
           that
           we
           would
           not
           be
           so
           satisfy'd
           ,
           and
           that
           if
           he
           refus'd
           to
           grant
           our
           Demands
           willingly
           ,
           we
           wou'd
           certainly
           do
           our selves
           Justice
           by
           force
           of
           Arms.
           And
           indeed
           a
           Council
           was
           held
           about
           that
           Answer
           ;
           and
           forasmuch
           as
           it
           was
           well
           known
           ,
           that
           in
           the
           beginning
           of
           the
           War
           ,
           he
           had
           seiz'd
           on
           Merchandizes
           to
           the
           value
           of
           above
           40000
           Crowns
           ,
           belonging
           to
           the
           French
           who
           traded
           on
           that
           River
           ;
           it
           was
           determin'd
           to
           make
           a
           Descent
           upon
           the
           Country
           ,
           to
           take
           the
           King
           Prisoner
           ,
           and
           as
           many
           Negroes
           as
           cou'd
           be
           catched
           ;
           and
           to
           burn
           all
           their
           Hutts
           .
           This
           Decree
           was
           ready
           to
           be
           put
           in
           execution
           ,
           when
           an
           Alcaty
           came
           to
           pass
           a
           Compliment
           upon
           M.
           
             de
             Gennes
          
           ,
           and
           to
           assure
           him
           ,
           that
           the
           King
           was
           unwilling
           to
           engage
           in
           a
           War
           against
           him
           ;
           on
           the
           contrary
           ,
           that
           he
           was
           very
           desirous
           to
           keep
           an
           amicable
           Correspondence
           
           with
           him
           ;
           and
           that
           he
           might
           freely
           take
           whatever
           he
           should
           think
           fit
           .
        
         
           The
           next
           Day
           ,
           M.
           
             de
             Gennes
          
           went
           to
           give
           a
           Visit
           to
           the
           King
           ;
           the
           principal
           Officers
           walk'd
           before
           him
           to
           his
           Canoo
           ,
           and
           conducted
           him
           to
           the
           Place
           where
           the
           Interview
           was
           to
           be
           made
           .
           The
           King
           appear'd
           a
           little
           while
           after
           ,
           without
           any
           regular
           Train
           ,
           in
           the
           midst
           of
           a
           great
           number
           of
           Negroes
           ,
           and
           attended
           with
           some
           Drummers
           :
           He
           was
           of
           a
           very
           advantageous
           Stature
           ,
           and
           was
           cloath'd
           with
           a
           red
           Doublet
           beset
           with
           the
           Tails
           of
           Wild
           Beasts
           ,
           and
           little
           Bells
           .
           He
           had
           on
           his
           Head
           an
           Osier-Cap
           ,
           adorn'd
           with
           divers
           Rows
           of
           Coral
           ,
           and
           two
           Ox-Horns
           .
           Here
           we
           may
           observe
           by
           the
           way
           ,
           that
           Circumcised
           Persons
           in
           those
           Parts
           ,
           have
           the
           liberty
           to
           wear
           such
           a
           Cap
           ,
           during
           eight
           Days
           immediately
           after
           their
           Circumcision
           ,
           by
           vertue
           of
           which
           ,
           they
           are
           authoriz'd
           to
           commit
           all
           manner
           of
           Crimes
           imaginable
           ,
           with
           impunity
           ,
           and
           none
           durst
           complain
           of
           their
           outragious
           Villainies
           .
           The
           King
           in
           this
           pompous
           Equipage
           ,
           holding
           a
           Pipe
           in
           his
           Mouth
           ,
           walk'd
           with
           a
           Majestick
           Gate
           under
           a
           stately
           Tree
           ,
           where
           he
           usually
           gives
           Audience
           to
           the
           Ambassadors
           of
           the
           neighbouring
           Princes
           .
           
           M.
           
             de
             Gennes
          
           went
           thither
           to
           salute
           him
           ,
           and
           made
           him
           a
           Present
           of
           20
           Bars
           of
           Iron
           ,
           a
           Barrel
           of
           Brandy
           ,
           a
           Pair
           of
           Pistols
           ,
           and
           a
           Burning-Glass
           ,
           with
           the
           Effects
           of
           which
           he
           was
           extremely
           surpriz'd
           .
           The
           Interpreter
           being
           a
           Frenchman
           who
           dwelt
           on
           the
           River
           above
           ten
           Years
           ,
           spoke
           the
           Language
           of
           the
           Country
           very
           fluently
           ;
           by
           which
           means
           their
           Conversation
           was
           continu'd
           for
           a
           considerable
           time
           ;
           and
           among
           other
           things
           ,
           this
           poor
           King
           often
           enquir'd
           whether
           he
           was
           much
           talk'd
           of
           in
           France
           ?
           After
           a
           great
           deal
           of
           Discourse
           of
           the
           like
           nature
           ,
           they
           parted
           ;
           but
           the
           King
           caused
           M.
           
             de
             Gennes
          
           to
           be
           reconducted
           by
           forty
           Men
           of
           his
           own
           Guards
           ,
           and
           several
           Drummers
           ,
           and
           presented
           him
           with
           some
           of
           the
           finest
           Oxen
           that
           could
           be
           found
           in
           the
           Village
           .
        
         
           On
           the
           30th
           .
           Instant
           ,
           a
           Council
           was
           held
           to
           determine
           ,
           whether
           the
           Fort
           should
           be
           kept
           or
           slighted
           :
           The
           latter
           Advice
           was
           follow'd
           for
           divers
           Reasons
           ,
           and
           therefore
           we
           drew
           near
           ,
           to
           take
           all
           the
           Merchandizes
           that
           were
           to
           be
           exported
           in
           our
           Vessels
           :
           They
           consisted
           in
           several
           Pieces
           of
           Ordnance
           ,
           a
           great
           quantity
           of
           Arms
           ,
           Morphil
           ,
           Wax
           ,
           Vessels
           of
           Tin
           and
           Copper
           ,
           &c.
           
           Woollen
           and
           
           Linen-Cloth
           ,
           printed
           Calico's
           ,
           Coral
           ,
           Glasses
           ,
           and
           other
           Commodities
           ,
           in
           which
           a
           great
           Trade
           is
           carryed
           on
           in
           that
           Country
           .
        
         
           On
           the
           5th
           .
           Day
           of
           
             August
             A.
             D.
          
           1695.
           
           the
           
             Sun
             of
             Africa
          
           pass'd
           down
           the
           River
           ,
           to
           transport
           certain
           Merchandizes
           and
           Ammunition
           to
           Gorea
           ;
           but
           that
           Voyage
           was
           undertaken
           to
           no
           purpose
           ,
           because
           the
           Governour
           would
           not
           furnish
           himself
           with
           them
           ,
           without
           the
           Consent
           of
           the
           Company
           .
        
         
           On
           the
           14th
           .
           Instant
           ,
           
           a
           Free-booter
           of
           St.
           Domingo
           ,
           which
           parted
           from
           thence
           a
           Year
           ago
           ,
           came
           to
           cast
           Anchor
           before
           us
           ,
           and
           having
           saluted
           us
           with
           three
           Cannon-shot
           ,
           we
           answer'd
           her
           with
           one
           .
           This
           Vessel
           met
           with
           the
           
             Sun
             of
             Africa
          
           at
           Gorea
           ,
           by
           whom
           she
           was
           informed
           of
           the
           taking
           of
           St.
           
           James's
           Fort
           ;
           and
           that
           since
           it
           was
           determined
           to
           demolish
           it
           ,
           some
           Advantage
           might
           be
           got
           by
           divers
           Provisions
           that
           were
           left
           ,
           as
           being
           of
           no
           use
           to
           us
           .
           The
           same
           Day
           ,
           we
           suffered
           a
           considerable
           Loss
           upon
           this
           Occasion
           :
           Forasmuch
           as
           the
           Fruitful
           Pink
           was
           appointed
           to
           convey
           the
           English
           Officers
           into
           France
           ,
           and
           was
           obliged
           to
           pass
           by
           Cayenna
           to
           leave
           some
           of
           our
           Negroes
           there
           ;
           150
           of
           
           them
           were
           shut
           up
           in
           the
           Hold
           ,
           lest
           they
           shou'd
           attempt
           to
           make
           their
           Escape
           :
           But
           these
           miserable
           Wretches
           ,
           scarce
           having
           room
           to
           breathe
           in
           ,
           threw
           themselves
           one
           upon
           another
           ,
           as
           it
           were
           in
           despair
           ,
           so
           that
           34
           of
           them
           were
           found
           stifled
           .
        
         
           On
           the
           16th
           .
           the
           Fruitful
           Pink
           being
           ready
           to
           sail
           for
           Cayenna
           ,
           saluted
           us
           with
           her
           whole
           Artillery
           ,
           and
           we
           answer'd
           her
           with
           a
           Cannon-shot
           .
        
         
           The
           17th
           ,
           18th
           ,
           19th
           .
           and
           20th
           .
           Days
           of
           this
           Month
           were
           spent
           in
           breaking
           the
           Cannons
           at
           St.
           
           John's
           Fort
           ,
           and
           undermining
           the
           Walls
           ,
           from
           whence
           we
           remov'd
           on
           the
           21st
           .
           to
           avoid
           the
           ill
           Accidents
           that
           might
           happen
           upon
           the
           blowing
           up
           of
           the
           Place
           :
           
           On
           the
           22d
           .
           the
           Mines
           sprang
           ,
           and
           took
           very
           good
           effect
           ;
           except
           two
           ,
           which
           miscarry'd
           ,
           and
           were
           sprung
           the
           same
           Evening
           .
           The
           King
           of
           Bar
           immediately
           sent
           to
           search
           among
           the
           Ruines
           for
           such
           things
           as
           might
           turn
           to
           his
           Advantage
           ;
           and
           the
           Portuguese
           ,
           who
           had
           several
           Colonies
           on
           the
           River
           ,
           told
           us
           ,
           that
           they
           durst
           not
           go
           thither
           till
           after
           that
           the
           King
           and
           his
           Officers
           had
           caus'd
           every
           thing
           to
           be
           carry'd
           away
           ,
           which
           might
           be
           serviceable
           to
           them
           .
           The
           English
           spent
           several
           Years
           
           in
           building
           this
           Fort
           ,
           which
           was
           situated
           in
           the
           middle
           of
           a
           fine
           River
           ,
           where
           the
           Traffick
           is
           very
           considerable
           ;
           and
           the
           Revenues
           which
           they
           receiv'd
           from
           thence
           are
           computed
           to
           amount
           to
           a
           Million
           ;
           so
           that
           the
           Loss
           of
           the
           Place
           cannot
           be
           easily
           repair'd
           .
        
         
           This
           River
           is
           navigable
           even
           so
           as
           to
           bear
           large
           Barks
           ,
           
           200
           Leagues
           up
           the
           Country
           ,
           where
           it
           is
           join'd
           with
           that
           of
           Senegal
           ,
           in
           that
           place
           where
           the
           Niger
           forms
           its
           famous
           Arms
           :
           Its
           Sides
           are
           flat
           ,
           and
           cut
           with
           many
           Channels
           ,
           to
           which
           the
           Sea
           runs
           up
           ;
           and
           the
           Soil
           along
           its
           Banks
           is
           fertil
           in
           Millet
           ,
           Rice
           ,
           Tobacco
           ,
           and
           divers
           sorts
           of
           Fruits
           ;
           affording
           also
           good
           Pasture
           for
           the
           feeding
           of
           numerous
           Herds
           of
           Oxen.
           The
           principal
           Fruits
           that
           we
           observ'd
           in
           those
           Parts
           ,
           are
           the
           Banana
           ,
           the
           Tabakomba
           ,
           and
           the
           Plougue
           .
        
         
           The
           Banana
           is
           a
           long
           Fruit
           cover'd
           with
           a
           yellow
           and
           tender
           Skin
           ;
           the
           Pulp
           of
           it
           being
           soft
           like
           Cotton
           ,
           and
           of
           a
           very
           good
           taste
           :
           It
           grows
           on
           a
           tender
           Stalk
           ,
           about
           two
           or
           three
           Fathoms
           high
           ;
           its
           Leaves
           are
           a
           Fathom
           long
           ,
           and
           of
           a
           proportionate
           breadth
           .
           This
           Stalk
           bears
           only
           one
           single
           Bunch
           or
           Cluster
           ,
           round
           which
           there
           may
           be
           forty
           or
           fifty
           Banana's
           ;
           
           and
           when
           the
           Bunch
           is
           gathered
           ,
           the
           Stalk
           is
           to
           be
           cut
           ,
           by
           reason
           that
           otherwise
           it
           cou'd
           not
           bring
           forth
           any
           more
           Fruit.
           
        
         
           The
           Tabakomba
           is
           almost
           of
           the
           same
           Shape
           as
           a
           Bon-Chretien
           Pear
           ;
           its
           Peel
           or
           Rind
           is
           like
           that
           of
           a
           Pomegranate
           ,
           and
           opens
           when
           the
           Fruit
           is
           ripe
           :
           It
           contains
           five
           or
           six
           small
           Fruits
           of
           a
           Rose-Colour
           ,
           the
           Pulp
           of
           which
           is
           insipid
           ,
           and
           the
           Stone
           very
           large
           .
        
         
           The
           Plougues
           or
           Medicinal-Nuts
           contain
           three
           small
           Kernels
           ,
           that
           are
           call'd
           Indian
           Pine-Apple
           Kernels
           ,
           and
           which
           are
           us'd
           by
           the
           Apothecaries
           in
           the
           composition
           of
           their
           Medicines
           .
        
         
           
             P
             :
             32.
             
          
           
             Ptougues
             or
             Indian
             Pine.
             apple
             kernels
          
           
             Cahouar
          
           
             Taba
             Komba
          
           
             
               M.
               Vander
               Gucht
               Scul
            
             .
          
        
         
           
             P
             :
             33.
             
          
           
             How
             Monkeys
             carry
             Infants
             up
             Trees
          
           
             The
             Habit
             of
             the
             Circumcised
             ▪
          
           
             A
             Negro
             playing
             on
             ye
             Balafo
          
        
         
           The
           Apes
           are
           larger
           and
           more
           mischievous
           than
           in
           any
           part
           of
           Africa
           ;
           The
           Negroes
           dread
           them
           ,
           and
           cannot
           travel
           alone
           in
           the
           Country
           without
           running
           the
           hazard
           of
           being
           attack'd
           by
           these
           Animals
           ,
           who
           often
           present
           them
           with
           a
           Stick
           ,
           and
           force
           them
           to
           fight
           .
           I
           have
           heard
           the
           Portugueses
           say
           ,
           that
           they
           have
           often
           seen
           them
           hoist
           up
           young
           Girles
           about
           seven
           or
           eight
           Years
           old
           ,
           into
           Trees
           ,
           and
           that
           they
           could
           not
           be
           wrested
           from
           them
           without
           a
           great
           deal
           
           of
           difficulty
           .
           The
           most
           part
           of
           the
           Negroes
           imagine
           them
           to
           be
           a
           Foreign
           Nation
           come
           to
           inhabit
           their
           Country
           ,
           and
           that
           they
           do
           not
           speak
           for
           fear
           of
           being
           compell'd
           to
           work
           .
        
         
           The
           Air
           about
           this
           River
           is
           very
           unwholsom
           ,
           by
           reason
           of
           the
           Rains
           that
           continually
           fall
           during
           six
           Months
           in
           the
           Year
           ;
           that
           is
           to
           say
           ,
           from
           June
           till
           November
           ;
           insomuch
           that
           Strangers
           can
           scarce
           avoid
           its
           malign
           Influence
           ;
           for
           this
           Air
           causes
           lingring
           Feavers
           ,
           by
           which
           Men
           are
           extremely
           wasted
           before
           they
           die
           .
           We
           experimentally
           felt
           these
           direful
           Effects
           ,
           departing
           from
           thence
           with
           about
           250
           sick
           Persons
           ,
           of
           whom
           above
           two
           third
           parts
           dy'd
           a
           little
           while
           after
           .
           These
           Rains
           sometimes
           come
           with
           terrible
           Blasts
           of
           Wind
           ;
           which
           are
           so
           much
           the
           more
           formidable
           ,
           in
           regard
           that
           a
           Vessel
           may
           be
           suddenly
           surpriz'd
           and
           over-set
           with
           them
           .
        
         
           
             P
             :
             35.
             
          
           
             The
             Balafo
             an
             Instrument
             of
             the
             Negroes
             .
          
           
             The
             Sticks
          
           
             A
             Brasil
             Cherry
          
        
         
           The
           great
           Trade
           which
           is
           manag'd
           in
           that
           River
           ,
           has
           render'd
           the
           People
           much
           more
           polite
           and
           civiliz'd
           than
           those
           of
           Gorea
           :
           They
           are
           better
           Mahometans
           ,
           and
           have
           a
           greater
           Veneration
           for
           their
           Commanders
           ,
           whom
           they
           never
           accost
           ,
           but
           with
           one
           Knee
           on
           the
           Ground
           ,
           and
           throwing
           Sand
           over
           their
           Heads
           ,
           as
           a
           mark
           of
           their
           Submission
           .
           Their
           Hutts
           
           are
           neat
           ,
           and
           well
           built
           ,
           being
           made
           of
           a
           fat
           binding
           Earth
           ,
           which
           soon
           hardens
           :
           They
           are
           cover'd
           with
           Palm-Tree
           Leaves
           ,
           so
           well
           fitted
           ,
           that
           they
           cannot
           be
           penetrated
           either
           by
           the
           Rain
           ,
           or
           the
           Heat
           of
           the
           Sun.
           They
           are
           of
           a
           round
           Figure
           ,
           and
           cannot
           be
           better
           compar'd
           than
           to
           our
           Ice-Houses
           .
           The
           most
           part
           of
           the
           Negroes
           divert
           themselves
           therein
           ,
           with
           discoursing
           about
           the
           Alcoran
           ,
           or
           with
           playing
           on
           a
           certain
           Musical
           Instrument
           ,
           which
           they
           call
           Balafo
           ,
           
           whilst
           their
           Wives
           are
           employ'd
           in
           tilling
           the
           Ground
           .
           The
           Balafo
           is
           nothing
           else
           
           but
           several
           Pipes
           of
           very
           hard
           Wood
           set
           in
           order
           ,
           which
           diminish
           by
           little
           and
           little
           in
           length
           ,
           and
           are
           ty'd
           together
           with
           Thongs
           of
           very
           thin
           Leather
           .
           These
           Thongs
           are
           twisted
           about
           small
           round
           Wands
           ,
           which
           are
           put
           between
           every
           one
           of
           those
           Pipes
           ,
           to
           leave
           a
           small
           Space
           :
           This
           Instrument
           very
           much
           resembles
           one
           of
           ours
           in
           that
           particular
           ;
           but
           that
           of
           the
           Negroes
           is
           compos'd
           of
           many
           more
           parts
           ,
           in
           regard
           that
           they
           fasten
           underneath
           ten
           or
           twelve
           Gourds
           ,
           the
           different
           Sizes
           of
           which
           perform
           the
           same
           effect
           as
           our
           Organ-Pipes
           :
           They
           usually
           play
           upon
           it
           with
           Sticks
           ,
           the
           Ends
           of
           which
           are
           cover'd
           with
           Leather
           ,
           to
           render
           the
           Sound
           less
           harsh
           .
        
         
           The
           Portugueses
           told
           us
           ,
           that
           the
           Negroes
           who
           live
           further
           up
           the
           Country
           ,
           with
           whom
           they
           have
           but
           small
           Dealings
           ,
           are
           altogether
           Savage
           ;
           boast
           of
           being
           great
           Sorcerers
           ,
           and
           have
           little
           Religion
           :
           That
           when
           a
           King
           ,
           or
           one
           of
           the
           principal
           Commanders
           ,
           dies
           ,
           they
           lay
           them
           in
           a
           new
           Hut
           ,
           kill
           his
           best
           belov'd
           Wife
           ,
           with
           a
           certain
           number
           of
           Slaves
           to
           serve
           him
           in
           the
           other
           World
           ;
           and
           lastly
           ,
           having
           said
           particular
           Prayers
           ,
           and
           put
           Provisions
           and
           Tobacco
           sufficient
           to
           last
           a
           long
           time
           into
           the
           Hutt
           ,
           they
           cover
           it
           with
           Earth
           .
        
         
         
           On
           the
           24th
           .
           Instant
           at
           Noon
           
           we
           passed
           down
           the
           River
           ,
           and
           the
           next
           Day
           about
           8
           a-clock
           in
           the
           Morning
           ,
           we
           prepar'd
           to
           set
           sail
           .
           The
           Free-booter
           passing
           by
           us
           ,
           saluted
           us
           with
           five
           Guns
           ,
           and
           we
           answer'd
           her
           with
           one
           .
           We
           were
           stearing
           our
           Course
           for
           Brasil
           ,
           and
           that
           Pickeroon
           for
           the
           Red-Sea
           .
           We
           gave
           the
           Ship
           's
           Crew
           two
           Pieces
           of
           Ordnance
           ,
           with
           Powder
           ,
           Ball
           ,
           and
           some
           Oxen
           ,
           on
           condition
           that
           in
           the
           Passage
           they
           shou'd
           set
           the
           Negro
           Prince
           of
           Assiny
           a-shore
           in
           his
           own
           Territories
           .
           M.
           
             de
             Gennes
          
           had
           the
           charge
           of
           him
           ,
           but
           cou'd
           not
           perform
           it
           ,
           without
           interrupting
           the
           Voyage
           he
           had
           undertaken
           .
        
         
           On
           the
           26th
           .
           and
           27th
           .
           we
           had
           a
           great
           Calm
           ,
           and
           on
           the
           28th
           .
           a
           Barrel
           of
           Brandy
           took
           Fire
           in
           the
           Hold
           ,
           but
           it
           was
           soon
           put
           out
           ,
           by
           the
           care
           that
           was
           taken
           in
           applying
           a
           great
           quantity
           of
           wet
           Clothes
           .
           The
           Number
           of
           our
           sick
           Men
           increasing
           every
           Day
           ,
           and
           the
           most
           part
           of
           them
           dying
           for
           want
           of
           necessary
           Refreshment
           ,
           a
           Council
           was
           held
           on
           the
           30th
           .
           to
           know
           whether
           it
           were
           most
           expedient
           to
           continue
           our
           Course
           to
           Brasil
           ,
           or
           to
           stand
           in
           for
           some
           Port
           :
           The
           latter
           Advice
           was
           follow'd
           ,
           and
           it
           was
           determin'd
           that
           we
           shou'd
           go
           in
           quest
           
           of
           the
           Islands
           of
           Cape
           Verd
           ,
           where
           the
           Air
           is
           much
           more
           healthful
           than
           on
           the
           Coast
           of
           Guinee
           .
        
         
           On
           the
           3d.
           Day
           of
           September
           ,
           
           we
           had
           boisterous
           Winds
           ,
           which
           being
           contrary
           wou'd
           have
           driven
           us
           off
           from
           the
           Islands
           ,
           and
           perhaps
           wou'd
           have
           hinder'd
           us
           from
           making
           them
           :
           Wherefore
           we
           steer'd
           our
           Course
           for
           Gorea
           ,
           to
           take
           in
           fresh
           Provisions
           ,
           waiting
           for
           a
           more
           favourable
           Wind
           to
           return
           to
           the
           Island
           of
           Cape
           Verd.
           
        
         
           On
           the
           5th
           .
           at
           break
           of
           Day
           ,
           
           we
           discover'd
           Land
           ,
           and
           at
           six
           a-clock
           in
           the
           Evening
           we
           cast
           Anchor
           before
           Gorea
           ,
           where
           we
           took
           in
           15
           Oxen
           ,
           and
           loaded
           some
           of
           our
           Shallops
           with
           Water
           :
           Then
           we
           set
           sail
           again
           on
           the
           9th
           .
           Instant
           ,
           with
           a
           favourable
           Gale
           of
           Wind.
           
        
         
           On
           the
           12th
           .
           13th
           .
           and
           14th
           .
           we
           had
           a
           great
           Calm
           ;
           and
           on
           the
           15th
           .
           at
           8
           a-clock
           in
           the
           Morning
           we
           discover'd
           the
           Island
           of
           May
           ,
           from
           whence
           we
           steer'd
           our
           Course
           for
           that
           of
           St.
           Vincent
           .
        
         
           On
           the
           17th
           .
           we
           came
           within
           sight
           of
           an
           Island
           ,
           the
           Coasts
           of
           which
           appear'd
           to
           be
           very
           high
           and
           foggy
           .
           And
           indeed
           ,
           by
           its
           height
           we
           judg'd
           it
           to
           be
           that
           of
           St.
           Nicholas
           .
        
         
         
           On
           the
           18th
           .
           and
           19th
           .
           the
           Winds
           were
           contrary
           ;
           but
           on
           the
           19th
           .
           and
           20th
           .
           at
           Night
           they
           favour'd
           us
           ;
           and
           at
           two
           a-clock
           in
           the
           Morning
           we
           discover'd
           Land
           by
           the
           Light
           of
           the
           Moon
           :
           We
           continu'd
           the
           rest
           of
           the
           Night
           about
           the
           Cape
           ;
           and
           at
           break
           of
           Day
           we
           perceiv'd
           it
           to
           be
           the
           Island
           of
           St.
           Lucia
           .
           At
           two
           a-clock
           in
           the
           Afternoon
           we
           enter'd
           the
           Channel
           ,
           which
           separates
           the
           Island
           of
           St.
           Vincent
           from
           that
           of
           St.
           Antony
           ;
           and
           when
           we
           were
           arriv'd
           within
           Musket-shot
           of
           a
           great
           Rock
           which
           lay
           in
           form
           of
           a
           Sugar-Loaf
           in
           the
           middle
           of
           that
           Channel
           ,
           at
           the
           Entrance
           of
           St.
           
           Vincent's
           Bay
           ,
           where
           our
           Ship
           was
           to
           cast
           Anchor
           ;
           we
           were
           becalm'd
           ,
           and
           oblig'd
           to
           tow
           it
           up
           with
           our
           Shallops
           against
           the
           Current
           that
           carry'd
           us
           above
           the
           Place
           .
           We
           spent
           the
           Night
           in
           a
           perpetual
           Hurry
           ;
           for
           the
           Wind
           continu'd
           so
           little
           in
           the
           same
           Point
           ,
           and
           veer'd
           so
           often
           ,
           that
           we
           durst
           not
           fall
           into
           the
           Bay
           till
           break
           of
           Day
           .
        
         
           On
           the
           22d
           .
           
           we
           set
           up
           Tents
           on
           the
           Land
           ,
           for
           our
           sick
           Mariners
           ,
           who
           were
           very
           numerous
           ;
           for
           many
           of
           them
           were
           seiz'd
           with
           the
           Scurvy
           ,
           besides
           the
           Feavers
           of
           Gambia
           ;
           and
           of
           260
           Men
           belonging
           to
           our
           Ship
           's
           Crew
           ,
           we
           had
           only
           
           80
           left
           who
           were
           in
           a
           Condition
           to
           Work.
           
        
         
           The
           Island
           of
           St.
           Vincent
           is
           inhabited
           ,
           
           but
           it
           is
           barren
           ,
           and
           beset
           with
           very
           high
           Mountains
           :
           It
           affords
           little
           fresh
           Water
           ;
           Wood
           is
           also
           scarce
           there
           ,
           and
           it
           is
           customary
           to
           cast
           Anchor
           before
           it
           ,
           only
           by
           reason
           of
           the
           Safety
           of
           its
           Harbour
           .
           We
           met
           with
           20
           Portugueses
           of
           St.
           
           Nicholas's
           Island
           ,
           who
           were
           employ'd
           there
           during
           two
           Years
           ,
           in
           dressing
           Goat-Skins
           ,
           with
           which
           this
           Island
           abounds
           :
           These
           Animals
           were
           taken
           with
           Dogs
           so
           well
           inur'd
           to
           the
           Game
           ,
           that
           each
           of
           them
           was
           wont
           to
           bring
           twelve
           or
           fifteen
           every
           Night
           .
           There
           is
           also
           abundance
           of
           Tortoises
           in
           that
           Island
           ,
           of
           which
           there
           are
           different
           kinds
           ,
           and
           some
           that
           weigh
           three
           or
           four
           hundred
           Pounds
           .
           These
           Animals
           make
           to
           Land
           to
           lay
           their
           Eggs
           ,
           hide
           them
           in
           the
           Sand
           ,
           and
           return
           without
           sitting
           on
           them
           :
           They
           are
           not
           hatch'd
           till
           the
           end
           of
           17
           Days
           ,
           and
           continue
           during
           nine
           of
           them
           without
           being
           able
           to
           pass
           to
           the
           bottom
           of
           the
           Water
           ,
           insomuch
           that
           three
           quarters
           of
           them
           are
           usually
           destroy'd
           by
           the
           Birds
           .
        
         
           On
           the
           23d
           .
           Instant
           ,
           
           we
           Mann'd
           out
           our
           Boat
           for
           St.
           
           Antony's
           Island
           ,
           to
           trade
           for
           some
           Provisions
           ;
           and
           our
           Mariners
           ,
           
           conducted
           by
           two
           Portugueses
           of
           St.
           Vincent
           ,
           went
           to
           certain
           Cottages
           ,
           where
           they
           were
           kindly
           entertain'd
           by
           the
           Inhabitants
           ,
           who
           gave
           us
           some
           Pullets
           ,
           and
           a
           great
           quantity
           of
           the
           Fruits
           of
           the
           Country
           ,
           viz.
           Figs
           ,
           Raisins
           ,
           Banana's
           ,
           Oranges
           ,
           Lemmons
           ,
           and
           Water-Melons
           ;
           telling
           them
           at
           the
           same
           time
           ,
           that
           if
           we
           sent
           Word
           thither
           in
           three
           Days
           ,
           they
           wou'd
           give
           notice
           to
           the
           Village
           ,
           where
           we
           might
           be
           supply'd
           with
           Oxen
           ,
           Hoggs
           ,
           Pullets
           ,
           Ducks
           ,
           Fruit
           ,
           and
           every
           thing
           we
           cou'd
           desire
           .
           This
           Village
           is
           situated
           in
           the
           middle
           of
           many
           high
           Mountains
           ,
           which
           render
           its
           Access
           difficult
           :
           There
           are
           above
           500
           Inhabitants
           capable
           of
           bearing
           Arms
           ,
           and
           a
           great
           number
           of
           Negro-Slaves
           .
           The
           Fathers
           Cordeliers
           have
           a
           Church
           there
           .
           The
           Portugueses
           of
           this
           Island
           ,
           as
           all
           the
           other
           of
           the
           Islands
           of
           Cape
           Verd
           ,
           are
           of
           a
           swarthy
           Complexion
           ,
           but
           they
           are
           ingenious
           People
           ,
           and
           very
           sociable
           :
           They
           feed
           on
           a
           kind
           of
           Bread
           made
           of
           Millet
           and
           Banana's
           .
           They
           have
           numerous
           Herds
           of
           Oxen
           ,
           Asses
           ,
           Goats
           ,
           and
           Hogs
           ,
           with
           variety
           of
           Fowl
           ;
           Their
           Wine
           is
           also
           good
           ,
           and
           their
           Fruits
           excellent
           ;
           insomuch
           that
           this
           Island
           ,
           where
           the
           Air
           is
           healthful
           ,
           and
           always
           temperate
           ,
           may
           
           well
           pass
           for
           a
           very
           delightful
           Place
           .
        
         
           On
           the
           26th
           .
           at
           two
           a-clock
           in
           the
           Morning
           ,
           a
           Merchant-Man
           of
           Nantes
           ,
           that
           came
           to
           salt
           Tortoises
           for
           Martinica
           ,
           cast
           Anchor
           by
           us
           .
           If
           their
           Ship
           's
           Crew
           had
           known
           that
           they
           shou'd
           have
           met
           with
           so
           good
           Company
           ,
           they
           wou'd
           not
           have
           enter'd
           so
           boldly
           ;
           but
           they
           were
           not
           aware
           of
           us
           till
           it
           was
           too
           late
           to
           retreat
           ;
           and
           if
           they
           had
           prov'd
           Englishmen
           ,
           they
           might
           have
           paid
           dear
           enough
           for
           their
           Curiosity
           .
           These
           Men
           inform'd
           us
           of
           the
           loss
           of
           Namur
           ,
           and
           told
           us
           ,
           that
           they
           pass'd
           by
           the
           Island
           of
           St.
           Nicolas
           ,
           where
           the
           Inhabitants
           ingag'd
           them
           to
           bring
           back
           their
           Countrymen
           ,
           of
           whom
           they
           had
           heard
           no
           News
           since
           they
           went
           to
           St.
           Vincent
           .
           They
           kept
           their
           Word
           ;
           so
           that
           the
           Portugueses
           convey'd
           the
           Vessel
           under
           the
           Wind
           into
           a
           Creek
           ,
           where
           there
           is
           greater
           abundance
           of
           Tortoises
           than
           in
           any
           other
           place
           :
           They
           often
           assisted
           'em
           in
           Fishing
           ,
           and
           were
           afterwards
           carry'd
           back
           to
           St.
           Nicolas
           .
        
         
           
             Bourse
             asort
             of
             Fish
             taken
             in
             y
             e
             Road
             of
             y
             e
             Island
             of
             S.
             t
             Vincent
             at
             Cape
             Verd
          
           
             P
             :
             43.
             
          
           
             M
             Vander
             Gucht
             Sculp
             :
          
        
         
           Amongst
           the
           Fish
           that
           were
           caught
           by
           us
           ,
           we
           met
           with
           one
           of
           an
           extraordinary
           beauty
           in
           respect
           of
           the
           Rayes
           about
           the
           Eyes
           ,
           a
           great
           number
           of
           Spots
           and
           Hexagonal
           Marks
           of
           a
           very
           lively
           blue
           Colour
           :
           This
           Fish
           is
           commonly
           called
           a
           Bourse
           .
           
        
         
           On
           the
           4th
           .
           Day
           ,
           
           at
           Eight
           of
           the
           Clock
           ,
           we
           set
           sail
           with
           a
           North-East
           Wind
           ,
           steering
           our
           Course
           again
           to
           Rio-Janeiro
           ,
           or
           the
           River
           of
           January
           on
           the
           Coasts
           of
           Brasil
           .
        
         
         
           On
           the
           5th
           .
           at
           Night
           ,
           we
           pass'd
           between
           the
           Islands
           of
           St.
           Jago
           and
           Fuogo
           .
           The
           former
           is
           the
           first
           of
           all
           the
           Islands
           of
           Cape
           Verd
           ,
           and
           the
           See
           of
           a
           Bishop
           :
           The
           other
           is
           only
           a
           large
           Mountain
           ,
           that
           continually
           burns
           ,
           where
           we
           saw
           Fire
           on
           the
           top
           of
           it
           during
           the
           whole
           Night
           ;
           and
           in
           the
           Day
           it
           only
           appear'd
           to
           be
           Smoke
           .
           The
           Portugueses
           have
           often
           endeavour'd
           to
           fix
           settl'd
           Habitations
           therein
           ,
           but
           could
           never
           accomplish
           their
           Design
           ,
           as
           being
           perhaps
           too
           much
           disturb'd
           by
           the
           Cinders
           ,
           Sulphureous
           Matter
           ,
           and
           even
           Stones
           that
           are
           thrown
           out
           of
           this
           burning
           Mountain
           .
        
         
           On
           the
           6th
           .
           and
           7th
           .
           we
           had
           strong
           blasts
           of
           Wind
           ,
           with
           Thunder
           and
           Rain
           ;
           and
           on
           the
           10th
           .
           we
           saw
           two
           Blowers
           ,
           
           being
           a
           sort
           of
           small
           Whales
           ,
           which
           spout
           up
           Water
           very
           high
           ,
           and
           with
           a
           great
           Noise
           .
           We
           likewise
           discover'd
           vast
           Shoales
           of
           Porpoises
           ,
           that
           follow'd
           us
           above
           two
           Hours
           :
           They
           are
           of
           the
           size
           of
           a
           Hogg
           ,
           swim
           in
           Rank
           and
           File
           as
           it
           were
           so
           many
           Companies
           of
           Infantry
           ,
           and
           sometimes
           reach
           above
           two
           Miles
           in
           length
           .
        
         
           On
           the
           11th
           .
           12th
           .
           13th
           .
           and
           14th
           .
           the
           Rains
           were
           continual
           ,
           and
           the
           Winds
           very
           unconstant
           ,
           so
           that
           our
           Pilots
           were
           
           very
           much
           surpriz'd
           ;
           for
           in
           drawing
           near
           the
           Coasts
           of
           Africa
           ,
           they
           expected
           to
           meet
           with
           the
           Trade-Winds
           ,
           which
           are
           very
           common
           in
           those
           Parts
           that
           lie
           between
           the
           Tropicks
           .
           In
           the
           mean
           while
           ,
           our
           Water
           diminish'd
           ,
           half
           of
           our
           Men
           were
           fallen
           sick
           ,
           and
           our
           Negroes
           perish'd
           daily
           .
        
         
           On
           the
           30th
           .
           at
           Night
           we
           pass'd
           the
           Equinoctial-Line
           within
           a
           Degree
           ,
           
           or
           thereabouts
           ,
           of
           the
           first
           Meridian
           ;
           and
           the
           same
           Night
           we
           observ'd
           a
           Comet
           ,
           which
           continu'd
           till
           the
           19th
           .
           of
           November
           .
           Indeed
           we
           were
           not
           sensible
           of
           the
           excessive
           Heats
           ,
           and
           tedious
           Calms
           ,
           with
           which
           all
           the
           Relations
           of
           Voyages
           threaten
           those
           who
           cross
           the
           
             Torrid
             Zone
          
           ;
           for
           we
           always
           had
           some
           fresh
           Gales
           of
           Wind
           ,
           and
           the
           Nights
           were
           very
           cool
           .
        
         
           On
           the
           4th
           .
           Day
           of
           November
           ,
           
           we
           saw
           abundance
           of
           flying
           Fish
           ,
           and
           Fregats
           .
           These
           flying
           Fish
           are
           almost
           as
           big
           as
           a
           Herring
           ,
           but
           their
           Head
           is
           more
           square
           ;
           and
           their
           Wings
           are
           nothing
           else
           ,
           but
           two
           very
           long
           Fins
           ,
           that
           support
           them
           above
           the
           Water
           as
           long
           as
           they
           retain
           never
           so
           little
           Moisture
           .
           The
           Gold-Fish
           and
           the
           Bonite
           continually
           make
           War
           with
           them
           in
           the
           Water
           ,
           
           and
           the
           Birds
           assault
           them
           in
           the
           Air.
           
        
         
           The
           Frigate
           is
           a
           large
           Bird
           ,
           
           of
           a
           Grey
           Colour
           ,
           having
           short
           Legs
           ,
           Feet
           like
           a
           Goose
           ,
           a
           forked
           Tail
           ,
           and
           the
           Wings
           sometimes
           seven
           or
           eight
           Foot
           in
           compass
           :
           These
           Birds
           fly
           with
           a
           great
           deal
           of
           swiftness
           ,
           and
           are
           to
           be
           seen
           for
           300
           Leagues
           .
        
         
           On
           the
           13th
           .
           we
           gave
           Orders
           to
           the
           Felicity
           to
           spread
           her
           Sails
           ,
           because
           she
           stood
           in
           need
           of
           being
           careen'd
           ;
           and
           at
           the
           same
           time
           ,
           to
           search
           for
           Store-Houses
           ,
           where
           at
           our
           Arrival
           we
           might
           unlade
           our
           Gambia
           Merchandizes
           .
        
         
           On
           the
           17th
           .
           we
           saw
           a
           great
           Flock
           of
           Birds
           ;
           and
           on
           the
           next
           Day
           we
           discover'd
           the
           Island
           of
           the
           Ascension
           ,
           
           which
           is
           distant
           above
           150
           Leagues
           from
           the
           Coasts
           of
           Brasil
           ;
           it
           is
           of
           a
           small
           compass
           ,
           and
           very
           steep
           .
        
         
           On
           the
           22d
           .
           
           a
           very
           remarkable
           thing
           hapned
           in
           reference
           to
           a
           Sow
           with
           young
           that
           we
           took
           at
           St.
           
           Antony's
           Island
           .
           This
           Sow
           pigg'd
           ,
           and
           the
           first
           of
           her
           young
           was
           a
           Monster
           ,
           which
           had
           the
           Body
           of
           a
           Pig
           ,
           the
           Ears
           and
           Snout
           of
           an
           Elephant
           ;
           and
           above
           that
           Snout
           which
           was
           in
           the
           middle
           of
           the
           Forehead
           ,
           an
           Eye
           with
           two
           Apples
           .
           This
           Monster
           
           might
           have
           been
           kept
           for
           a
           Rarity
           if
           it
           had
           liv'd
           ;
           but
           the
           Sea
           kill'd
           it
           immediately
           after
           it
           was
           brought
           forth
           .
        
         
           On
           the
           24th
           .
           at
           four
           a-clock
           in
           the
           Afternoon
           ,
           we
           discover'd
           Land
           ;
           but
           the
           Winds
           and
           Currents
           being
           contrary
           to
           us
           ,
           we
           were
           not
           able
           to
           cast
           Anchor
           till
           the
           26th
           .
           Instant
           ,
           which
           we
           then
           did
           before
           the
           Island
           of
           St.
           Ann
           ,
           
           on
           the
           side
           of
           the
           Continent
           ,
           from
           which
           they
           are
           distant
           two
           small
           Leagues
           :
           They
           formerly
           serv'd
           as
           a
           place
           of
           Retreat
           for
           the
           Hollanders
           ,
           when
           they
           attempted
           the
           Conquest
           of
           Brasil
           .
           They
           are
           three
           in
           number
           ,
           and
           the
           greatest
           of
           them
           lies
           in
           the
           middle
           ,
           being
           about
           a
           League
           and
           half
           in
           compass
           ,
           and
           having
           a
           convenient
           sandy
           Creek
           ,
           where
           good
           fresh
           Water
           may
           be
           taken
           in
           .
           There
           are
           also
           some
           wild
           Fruits
           ,
           as
           Purslain
           and
           small
           channell'd
           Cherries
           ,
           which
           are
           almost
           of
           the
           same
           Taste
           as
           ours
           .
        
         
           In
           the
           Woods
           ,
           
           with
           which
           these
           Islands
           are
           beset
           ,
           one
           may
           hear
           a
           melodious
           Harmony
           ,
           made
           by
           a
           great
           number
           of
           small
           Birds
           ,
           with
           fine
           Feathers
           :
           Among
           others
           ,
           there
           are
           
             Perroquets
             ,
             Cardinals
          
           ,
           and
           Colibries
           .
           The
           Cardinal
           is
           a
           kind
           of
           small
           Sparrow
           ,
           the
           Wings
           and
           Tail
           of
           which
           are
           black
           ,
           and
           the
           rest
           of
           
           the
           Body
           of
           a
           very
           lively
           Scarlet
           .
        
         
           The
           Colibrie
           is
           a
           small
           Bird
           no
           bigger
           than
           a
           May-Bugg
           ,
           with
           green
           Feathers
           :
           It
           has
           a
           Bill
           somewhat
           long
           ,
           and
           feeds
           on
           the
           Juice
           of
           Flowers
           like
           our
           Bees
           :
           Its
           Nest
           is
           as
           large
           as
           an
           Egg
           ,
           and
           is
           so
           much
           the
           more
           curious
           ,
           in
           regard
           that
           it
           is
           made
           of
           fine
           Cotton
           ,
           and
           hung
           up
           with
           very
           small
           Threads
           .
           On
           the
           Sea-Coasts
           there
           are
           Dotterils
           in
           so
           great
           abundance
           ,
           that
           our
           Mariners
           sometimes
           kill'd
           five
           or
           six
           of
           them
           with
           a
           Stick
           at
           one
           blow
           .
           These
           Birds
           are
           as
           big
           as
           Ducks
           ,
           and
           commonly
           fly
           about
           the
           Islands
           and
           the
           Rocks
           that
           are
           not
           extended
           far
           in
           the
           Sea.
           The
           two
           other
           Islands
           are
           much
           less
           ,
           and
           form
           with
           the
           greater
           ,
           to
           the
           North
           and
           South
           ,
           certain
           Channels
           ,
           which
           one
           may
           pass
           through
           ,
           as
           occasion
           serves
           .
           The
           Northern
           on
           the
           side
           of
           the
           Continent
           ,
           has
           a
           Creek
           very
           convenient
           for
           the
           careening
           of
           Vessels
           ;
           but
           the
           Southern
           is
           only
           a
           huge
           round
           Rock
           .
        
         
           map of the mouth of the River Ianeiro
           
             Pag
             :
             49
          
           
             
               The
               Mouth
            
             of
             the
             River
             Ianeiro
             on
             the
             Coast
             of
             Brasil
             .
          
           
             A
             Scale
             of
             one
             League
          
        
         
           On
           the
           27th
           .
           we
           took
           in
           fresh
           Water
           ,
           and
           the
           next
           Day
           set
           sail
           for
           the
           River
           of
           Janeiro
           .
        
         
           On
           the
           29th
           .
           we
           doubl'd
           Cape
           Frie
           ,
           
           and
           on
           the
           30th
           .
           at
           eight
           a-clock
           in
           the
           Morning
           ,
           supposing
           that
           we
           had
           almost
           made
           the
           River
           ,
           
           we
           let
           off
           a
           Gun
           ,
           to
           give
           notice
           that
           we
           stood
           in
           need
           of
           a
           Pilot
           ;
           but
           having
           tack'd
           about
           on
           all
           sides
           till
           three
           a-clock
           in
           the
           Afternoon
           ,
           without
           hearing
           any
           News
           ,
           and
           without
           being
           able
           to
           discover
           the
           Mouth
           ;
           We
           cast
           Anchor
           within
           three
           Leagues
           of
           the
           Land
           ,
           and
           sent
           our
           Boat
           along
           the
           Coast
           ,
           to
           search
           it
           out
           .
           The
           Portugueses
           of
           St.
           Ann
           had
           told
           us
           ,
           that
           there
           was
           at
           the
           Entrance
           ,
           a
           huge
           Rock
           in
           form
           of
           a
           Sugar-Loaf
           ;
           but
           instead
           of
           one
           ,
           we
           discern'd
           two
           ,
           at
           a
           great
           distance
           one
           from
           another
           ;
           so
           that
           we
           were
           much
           perplex'd
           ,
           not
           knowing
           how
           to
           steer
           our
           Course
           .
        
         
         
           Our
           Boat
           lay
           at
           Anchor
           during
           the
           Night
           ,
           at
           the
           Mouth
           of
           the
           River
           ,
           under
           the
           Cannon
           of
           the
           Forts
           ,
           which
           caus'd
           it
           to
           be
           stop'd
           .
           At
           break
           of
           Day
           the
           Officer
           ,
           who
           was
           in
           the
           Boat
           ,
           went
           to
           meet
           the
           Governour
           of
           the
           Place
           ,
           and
           return'd
           at
           six
           a-clock
           in
           the
           Evenning
           ,
           to
           inform
           us
           that
           the
           Inhabitants
           scrupl'd
           to
           permit
           us
           to
           enter
           ,
           by
           reason
           (
           as
           they
           gave
           it
           out
           )
           of
           the
           great
           number
           of
           our
           Sick
           Men
           :
           But
           it
           is
           more
           probable
           ,
           
           that
           not
           being
           accustom'd
           to
           see
           any
           other
           Ships
           than
           those
           of
           their
           own
           Nation
           ,
           and
           fearing
           lest
           we
           might
           be
           engag'd
           in
           a
           War
           against
           them
           ,
           they
           were
           so
           extremely
           terrify'd
           at
           our
           Arrival
           ,
           that
           as
           soon
           as
           our
           Corvette
           (
           which
           enter'd
           eight
           Days
           before
           us
           )
           appear'd
           ,
           all
           the
           Women
           retir'd
           to
           the
           Country
           ,
           with
           the
           best
           Effects
           of
           the
           Town
           .
        
         
           At
           six
           a-clock
           in
           the
           Morning
           ,
           we
           prepar'd
           to
           draw
           near
           ,
           and
           at
           nine
           an
           Officer
           came
           ,
           who
           caus'd
           us
           to
           cast
           Anchor
           within
           half
           a
           Cannon-shot
           of
           the
           Forts
           ,
           which
           are
           built
           on
           both
           sides
           of
           that
           River
           .
           Afterwards
           he
           went
           to
           make
           a
           Report
           to
           the
           Governour
           ,
           and
           promis'd
           us
           that
           he
           wou'd
           use
           his
           utmost
           Endeavours
           to
           get
           an
           Order
           for
           the
           sending
           of
           a
           Pilot.
           
        
         
         
           In
           the
           mean
           while
           ,
           there
           arose
           a
           strong
           Blast
           of
           Wind
           ,
           which
           oblig'd
           us
           to
           hoist
           up
           Sail
           ,
           by
           reason
           that
           our
           Ship
           got
           loose
           from
           Anchor
           ,
           and
           ran
           upon
           a
           Shelf
           of
           Rocks
           which
           is
           in
           the
           middle
           of
           the
           River
           :
           But
           the
           Commanders
           of
           the
           Forts
           ,
           who
           had
           Orders
           to
           stop
           our
           Course
           ,
           and
           who
           ,
           without
           having
           any
           regard
           to
           the
           apparent
           Danger
           we
           were
           in
           of
           perishing
           at
           that
           instant
           ,
           imagin'd
           that
           we
           design'd
           to
           enter
           without
           their
           leave
           ,
           discharg'd
           twelve
           or
           fifteen
           Cannon-Balls
           a-cross
           our
           Masts
           ,
           to
           oblige
           us
           to
           cast
           Anchor
           :
           Thus
           they
           made
           a
           Bravado
           ,
           insulting
           over
           us
           ,
           because
           they
           knew
           that
           we
           stood
           in
           need
           of
           their
           Assistance
           ,
           and
           durst
           not
           resent
           their
           Affronts
           .
           Therefore
           we
           made
           haste
           to
           cast
           Anchor
           ;
           and
           about
           a
           quarter
           of
           an
           Hour
           after
           ,
           an
           Officer
           came
           on
           board
           ,
           who
           left
           us
           a
           Pilot
           ,
           and
           a
           Physician
           to
           visit
           our
           sick
           Men
           :
           He
           told
           us
           that
           we
           might
           weigh
           Anchor
           ,
           and
           that
           he
           was
           going
           to
           the
           Fort
           to
           know
           the
           Governour
           's
           Pleasure
           :
           But
           as
           we
           were
           under
           sail
           ,
           before
           he
           arriv'd
           there
           ,
           we
           receiv'd
           ten
           Cannon-shot
           more
           ,
           which
           shatter'd
           our
           Flag
           ,
           dismounted
           one
           of
           the
           Port-Holes
           in
           the
           Gunner's
           Room
           ,
           and
           pass'd
           between
           the
           Shrouds
           ,
           
           without
           hurting
           any
           one
           of
           our
           Crew
           .
           Then
           we
           went
           to
           cast
           Anchor
           with
           the
           Seditious
           Pink
           ,
           within
           a
           small
           League
           of
           the
           Town
           ;
           neither
           wou'd
           the
           Governour
           suffer
           the
           
             Sun
             of
             Africa
          
           ,
           nor
           the
           Glutton
           Frigate
           ,
           to
           enter
           ,
           by
           reason
           that
           he
           had
           Orders
           (
           as
           he
           pretended
           )
           from
           the
           King
           of
           Portugal
           ,
           not
           to
           admit
           above
           three
           Foreign
           Men
           of
           War
           into
           the
           Harbour
           .
        
         
           The
           next
           Night
           ,
           at
           two
           or
           three
           a-clock
           ,
           the
           
             Sun
             of
             Africa
          
           ,
           which
           continu'd
           still
           at
           the
           Mouth
           of
           the
           River
           ,
           got
           loose
           from
           Anchor
           ;
           and
           forasmuch
           as
           the
           Current
           drove
           her
           on
           the
           abovemention'd
           Shelf
           of
           Rocks
           ,
           so
           that
           she
           could
           not
           be
           stay'd
           by
           any
           of
           the
           Anchors
           ,
           she
           discharg'd
           several
           Cannon-shot
           ,
           and
           made
           Fires
           upon
           all
           the
           Masts
           ,
           as
           a
           Signal
           to
           get
           Succour
           :
           Whereupon
           we
           sent
           our
           Shallop
           ,
           which
           got
           her
           off
           from
           that
           place
           ,
           where
           she
           would
           have
           been
           inevitably
           lost
           without
           their
           Assistance
           .
           This
           Ship
           set
           sail
           the
           same
           Day
           for
           
             La
             Isla
             Grande
          
           ,
           which
           is
           twenty
           Leagues
           distant
           from
           thence
           ;
           and
           the
           Pink
           cast
           Anchor
           in
           a
           small
           Bay
           at
           the
           Mouth
           of
           the
           River
           ,
           where
           she
           waited
           till
           the
           Corvette
           came
           up
           to
           enter
           .
           M.
           
             de
             Gennes
          
           made
           a
           Complaint
           to
           the
           Governour
           ,
           
           of
           the
           Insult
           that
           was
           offer'd
           us
           at
           our
           Entrance
           ,
           and
           that
           the
           King's
           Ships
           were
           basely
           left
           in
           danger
           :
           He
           excus'd
           himself
           upon
           account
           that
           the
           People
           were
           ready
           to
           make
           an
           Insurrection
           ;
           that
           it
           was
           none
           of
           his
           Fault
           that
           we
           did
           not
           enter
           at
           first
           ;
           and
           that
           for
           the
           future
           he
           wou'd
           serve
           us
           as
           far
           as
           it
           lay
           in
           his
           power
           .
        
         
           On
           the
           4th
           .
           Instant
           ,
           
           we
           set
           our
           sick
           Men
           a-shore
           in
           a
           small
           Village
           that
           fronts
           the
           Town
           on
           the
           other
           side
           the
           River
           .
        
         
           On
           the
           5th
           .
           The
           Governour
           sent
           us
           a
           Pilot
           ,
           who
           caus'd
           us
           to
           cast
           Anchor
           within
           a
           quarter
           of
           a
           League
           of
           the
           Town
           ;
           
           which
           we
           did
           not
           salute
           ,
           because
           they
           refus'd
           to
           return
           us
           an
           equal
           number
           of
           Shot
           .
        
         
           On
           the
           15th
           .
           a
           Vessel
           enter'd
           which
           came
           from
           the
           Bay
           of
           All-Saints
           .
        
         
           On
           the
           17th
           .
           and
           18th
           .
           two
           other
           Vessels
           arriv'd
           that
           came
           from
           the
           Coast
           of
           Angola
           ,
           loaden
           with
           Negroes
           .
        
         
           On
           the
           20th
           .
           we
           paid
           our
           Ship.
           
        
         
           On
           the
           22d
           .
           the
           Felicity
           set
           out
           for
           
             La
             Isla
             Grande
          
           ,
           and
           the
           Glutton
           Pink
           enter'd
           in
           its
           place
           ,
           to
           take
           in
           some
           Quintals
           of
           Bisket
           ,
           made
           of
           Meal
           that
           we
           brought
           out
           of
           Europe
           .
           She
           likewise
           
           took
           in
           some
           Salt-meats
           ,
           Meal
           of
           Manioc
           or
           Yuca
           ,
           with
           Cassave
           ,
           Rice
           ,
           
             Mayz
             ,
             Guildive
          
           ,
           and
           other
           Provisions
           ,
           which
           we
           purchas'd
           with
           Gambia
           Merchandizes
           ,
           upon
           which
           we
           lost
           a
           great
           deal
           in
           the
           exchange
           ,
           
           by
           reason
           that
           the
           Governour
           having
           prohibited
           the
           Inhabitants
           to
           trade
           with
           us
           ,
           and
           taking
           upon
           him
           to
           be
           the
           sole
           Seller
           and
           Buyer
           ,
           we
           were
           oblig'd
           to
           afford
           our
           Commodities
           at
           a
           cheaper
           rate
           than
           they
           bear
           in
           Europe
           ;
           which
           sufficiently
           shews
           the
           sinister
           Practices
           of
           that
           Nation
           ,
           of
           whom
           three
           quarters
           are
           originally
           Jews
           .
           We
           likewise
           sold
           our
           Negroes
           ,
           but
           retain'd
           the
           most
           robust
           of
           them
           ,
           to
           recruit
           part
           of
           our
           Fleet
           ,
           which
           the
           Sickness
           of
           Gambia
           had
           much
           impair'd
           ;
           our
           single
           Ship
           having
           already
           lost
           above
           50
           Men.
           
        
         
           We
           continu'd
           till
           the
           27th
           .
           Instant
           in
           this
           River
           ,
           which
           may
           without
           doubt
           pass
           for
           one
           of
           the
           safest
           and
           most
           convenient
           in
           America
           .
           Before
           it
           falls
           into
           the
           Sea
           ,
           it
           forms
           a
           large
           Bay
           ,
           where
           Vessels
           ride
           as
           it
           were
           in
           a
           private
           Port.
           The
           bottom
           of
           it
           is
           firm
           ,
           and
           the
           Winds
           are
           broken
           by
           the
           means
           of
           the
           high
           Lands
           ,
           with
           which
           it
           is
           encompass'd
           :
           The
           Shelf
           of
           Rocks
           that
           lies
           
           at
           its
           Mouth
           ,
           and
           by
           which
           one
           cannot
           pass
           without
           coming
           within
           half
           a
           Cannon-shot
           of
           the
           Forts
           that
           command
           it
           ,
           contributes
           much
           to
           the
           security
           of
           the
           Harbour
           .
        
         
           At
           the
           distance
           of
           two
           Leagues
           from
           the
           Mouth
           of
           the
           River
           ,
           stands
           the
           City
           of
           St.
           Sebastian
           ,
           
           which
           is
           an
           Episcopal
           See
           ,
           the
           usual
           Place
           of
           Residence
           of
           the
           Governour
           of
           the
           Province
           .
           'T
           is
           situated
           on
           the
           Western
           side
           of
           the
           River
           ,
           and
           in
           a
           fine
           Plain
           ,
           surrounded
           with
           high
           Mountains
           :
           'T
           is
           large
           and
           well
           built
           ,
           and
           the
           Streets
           are
           Streight
           ,
           so
           that
           the
           magnificent
           Structures
           of
           the
           Jesuits
           and
           Benedictins
           that
           terminate
           them
           on
           both
           sides
           ,
           each
           on
           a
           small
           Ascent
           ,
           render
           the
           Prospect
           very
           delightful
           :
           It
           has
           no
           Fortification
           on
           that
           side
           towards
           the
           Country
           ;
           and
           't
           is
           defended
           only
           by
           a
           small
           Fort
           on
           the
           Sea-shore
           below
           the
           
           Jesuite's
           College
           .
        
         
           The
           Inhabitants
           are
           polite
           ,
           
           and
           endow'd
           with
           a
           Gravity
           customary
           to
           their
           Nation
           :
           They
           are
           Rich
           ,
           take
           much
           delight
           in
           Trading
           ,
           and
           keep
           a
           great
           number
           of
           Negro-Slaves
           ,
           besides
           divers
           entire
           Families
           of
           Indians
           ,
           whom
           they
           maintain
           in
           their
           Sugar-Plantations
           ,
           and
           whose
           Liberty
           they
           are
           not
           willing
           to
           
           retrench
           ,
           as
           being
           the
           Natives
           of
           the
           Country
           .
           Their
           Slaves
           for
           the
           most
           part
           manage
           all
           their
           Houshold-Affairs
           ,
           which
           renders
           them
           so
           dissolute
           and
           esfeminate
           ,
           that
           they
           will
           not
           vouchsafe
           to
           stoop
           to
           take
           up
           a
           Pin
           themselves
           ,
           for
           which
           they
           have
           occasion
           .
           Luxury
           is
           so
           predominant
           among
           them
           ,
           that
           not
           only
           the
           Burghers
           ,
           but
           even
           the
           Monks
           may
           have
           to
           do
           with
           common
           Harlots
           ,
           without
           fearing
           the
           Censures
           or
           Reproaches
           of
           the
           People
           ,
           who
           have
           a
           very
           great
           Respect
           for
           them
           .
           Uncleanness
           is
           not
           the
           only
           Vice
           peculiar
           to
           these
           lewd
           Monks
           :
           They
           live
           in
           gross
           Ignorance
           ,
           so
           that
           very
           few
           of
           them
           understand
           the
           Latin
           Tongue
           ;
           and
           it
           is
           to
           be
           fear'd
           ,
           that
           as
           they
           strive
           even
           to
           out-vie
           the
           Sodomites
           in
           their
           Debaucheries
           ,
           they
           may
           one
           Day
           partake
           of
           the
           like
           Punishment
           .
           There
           are
           vast
           Multitudes
           of
           
             Cordeliers
             ,
             Carmelites
          
           ,
           and
           Benedictin
           Monks
           every
           where
           in
           the
           Territories
           of
           Brasil
           ;
           but
           they
           take
           little
           Care
           of
           the
           Conversion
           of
           an
           infinite
           number
           of
           poor
           Indians
           ,
           who
           stand
           in
           need
           of
           being
           instructed
           in
           the
           Mysteries
           of
           the
           Gospel
           ;
           and
           there
           are
           only
           eight
           or
           ten
           Reverend
           Capuchin
           Fathers
           of
           the
           French
           Nation
           ,
           and
           some
           Jesuits
           ,
           throughout
           
           that
           vast
           Continent
           ,
           who
           take
           Pains
           in
           performing
           the
           Functions
           of
           their
           Mission
           with
           an
           extraordinary
           Zeal
           .
        
         
           I
           cannot
           forbear
           relating
           a
           small
           Adventure
           which
           happen'd
           to
           a
           young
           Man
           of
           our
           Squadron
           ,
           
           who
           fell
           out
           with
           one
           of
           the
           Inhabitants
           ,
           and
           was
           oblig'd
           to
           draw
           his
           Sword
           in
           his
           own
           Defence
           ;
           but
           perceiving
           himself
           alone
           ,
           and
           press'd
           with
           a
           great
           number
           of
           Portugueses
           ,
           he
           thought
           fit
           to
           retire
           ,
           and
           seeing
           the
           Door
           of
           the
           
           Carmelite's
           Monastery
           open'd
           ,
           he
           made
           bold
           to
           enter
           ,
           not
           doubting
           but
           to
           meet
           with
           a
           sure
           Sanctuary
           in
           that
           Place
           ;
           but
           he
           soon
           found
           the
           contrary
           ,
           for
           one
           of
           these
           charitable
           Monks
           immediately
           struck
           him
           on
           the
           Head
           with
           a
           Hanger
           ,
           the
           Marks
           of
           which
           Wound
           will
           always
           appear
           during
           his
           whole
           Life-time
           :
           Then
           many
           others
           rush'd
           in
           ,
           and
           beat
           him
           with
           Cudgels
           ,
           and
           at
           last
           put
           him
           again
           into
           the
           Hands
           of
           the
           Inhabitants
           ,
           who
           had
           Compassion
           on
           him
           ,
           and
           detested
           the
           barbarous
           Proceedings
           of
           the
           Monks
           .
           The
           Reflections
           I
           have
           made
           on
           these
           counterfeit
           Monks
           ,
           ought
           not
           to
           give
           Offence
           to
           those
           who
           make
           a
           Conscience
           of
           discharging
           their
           Duty
           ;
           since
           the
           Invectives
           made
           against
           such
           Libertines
           ▪
           serve
           only
           to
           augment
           the
           Respect
           
           that
           ought
           to
           be
           had
           for
           those
           who
           seek
           for
           an
           occasion
           to
           shew
           the
           effects
           of
           a
           true
           Zeal
           ,
           and
           use
           all
           possible
           means
           for
           the
           propagating
           the
           Christian
           Religion
           ,
           even
           to
           the
           apparent
           hazard
           of
           their
           Lives
           .
        
         
           The
           Country
           lying
           about
           this
           River
           affords
           good
           Pasture
           ,
           
           bringing
           forth
           abundance
           of
           Tobacco
           and
           Canes
           ,
           of
           which
           the
           finest
           Sugar
           is
           made
           ;
           and
           also
           a
           kind
           of
           very
           strong
           Brandy
           ,
           which
           we
           call
           Guildive
           .
           The
           latter
           comes
           of
           Slips
           ,
           are
           full
           of
           Knots
           ,
           that
           put
           forth
           Leaves
           like
           those
           of
           Reeds
           ,
           and
           grow
           on
           Ridges
           as
           Corn
           :
           These
           Canes
           when
           gather'd
           ,
           are
           carry'd
           to
           the
           Mill
           to
           be
           ground
           ,
           and
           the
           Juice
           that
           they
           yield
           runs
           through
           several
           Pipes
           into
           the
           Cauldrons
           ,
           where
           the
           Sugar
           is
           made
           and
           refin'd
           ,
           almost
           after
           the
           same
           manner
           as
           Salt-Petre
           .
           The
           Soil
           is
           likewise
           very
           fruitful
           in
           Rice
           ,
           Mayz
           ,
           and
           Manioc
           ,
           
           which
           are
           Roots
           that
           put
           forth
           a
           small
           Shrub
           four
           or
           five
           Foot
           high
           ,
           and
           are
           propagated
           of
           Slips
           :
           The
           Fields
           in
           which
           they
           are
           planted
           ,
           and
           where
           they
           are
           left
           standing
           two
           or
           three
           Years
           ,
           are
           like
           those
           of
           our
           Hemp-Closes
           :
           These
           Roots
           ,
           which
           serve
           instead
           of
           Bread
           in
           a
           great
           part
           of
           America
           ;
           
           are
           as
           thick
           and
           long
           as
           Carrots
           :
           They
           are
           usually
           grated
           with
           Rasps
           made
           for
           that
           purpose
           ,
           and
           Meal
           is
           made
           of
           'em
           after
           having
           squeez'd
           out
           all
           their
           Juice
           ,
           which
           is
           the
           rankest
           Poyson
           in
           the
           World
           ,
           and
           which
           they
           take
           care
           to
           drain
           off
           into
           Places
           under-ground
           ,
           lest
           the
           Cattle
           shou'd
           drink
           it
           .
           The
           most
           part
           of
           the
           Portugueses
           feed
           on
           this
           Meal
           ,
           such
           as
           it
           is
           ;
           and
           others
           make
           of
           it
           a
           kind
           of
           small
           Cakes
           ,
           which
           they
           bake
           on
           Iron-Plates
           appropriated
           to
           that
           use
           .
           There
           is
           abundance
           of
           Fruit
           and
           Pulse
           in
           those
           parts
           :
           Cabbiges
           ,
           Onions
           ,
           Lettuces
           ,
           Purcelain
           ,
           Melons
           ,
           Water-Melons
           ,
           Goads
           ,
           Grapes
           ,
           and
           many
           other
           Fruits
           that
           we
           have
           in
           Europe
           ,
           thrive
           there
           ,
           and
           come
           to
           perfection
           :
           But
           the
           peculiar
           Fruits
           of
           the
           Country
           are
           Oranges
           ,
           
             Banana's
             ,
             Ananas's
          
           ,
           Potato's
           ,
           
             Ighname's
             ,
             Coco's
             ,
             Goyaves
          
           ,
           and
           many
           others
           ,
           of
           which
           they
           make
           very
           good
           Confections
           .
        
         
           The
           Ananas
           grows
           like
           an
           Artichoak
           ,
           and
           resembles
           a
           large
           Pine-Apple
           :
           Its
           Leaves
           are
           long
           ,
           thick
           ,
           and
           arm'd
           with
           small
           Prickles
           .
           It
           bears
           a
           Crown
           of
           the
           same
           Leaves
           ,
           and
           may
           be
           esteemed
           as
           the
           best
           Fruit
           in
           the
           whole
           Continent
           of
           America
           .
        
         
         
           The
           Potato
           and
           Ighname
           ,
           are
           Roots
           very
           like
           the
           Toupinambous
           ;
           The
           former
           is
           of
           the
           taste
           of
           a
           Chesnut
           ,
           and
           is
           usually
           eaten
           broil'd
           or
           roasted
           in
           Embers
           .
           The
           Ighname
           is
           somewhat
           insipid
           ,
           but
           much
           more
           wholsome
           and
           larger
           than
           the
           Potato
           ,
           but
           both
           these
           sorts
           of
           Roots
           are
           of
           singular
           use
           to
           make
           very
           savory
           Pottage
           .
        
         
           The
           Coco
           grows
           upon
           a
           Tree
           which
           is
           much
           like
           a
           Palm-Tree
           :
           This
           Fruit
           is
           very
           large
           ,
           and
           has
           nothing
           but
           what
           may
           be
           apply'd
           to
           some
           Use
           :
           It
           is
           cover'd
           with
           a
           kind
           of
           Tow
           ,
           which
           may
           serve
           to
           caulk
           Vessels
           ,
           better
           than
           Hemp
           :
           This
           Tow
           being
           taken
           off
           ,
           we
           meet
           with
           a
           large
           hard
           Nut
           ,
           of
           an
           Oval
           Figure
           ;
           of
           which
           Cups
           and
           other
           Toys
           of
           the
           like
           nature
           are
           usually
           made
           ,
           that
           bear
           the
           Name
           of
           Coco's
           .
           This
           Nut
           contains
           a
           white
           Kernel
           ,
           of
           the
           Taste
           of
           a
           Hazel
           Nut
           ,
           lying
           round
           about
           of
           the
           thickness
           of
           one's
           Finger
           :
           Lastly
           ,
           the
           Middle
           is
           fill'd
           with
           a
           cool
           Liquor
           resembling
           thin
           Milk
           ,
           about
           the
           Quantity
           of
           a
           large
           Glass-full
           ;
           insomuch
           that
           this
           Fruit
           alone
           may
           serve
           for
           a
           Man's
           Sustenance
           :
           And
           indeed
           the
           most
           part
           of
           the
           Indians
           do
           not
           trouble
           themselves
           about
           providing
           any
           Victuals
           ,
           when
           they
           know
           that
           they
           
           shall
           meet
           with
           Coco-Trees
           in
           the
           places
           through
           which
           they
           are
           to
           pass
           .
        
         
           The
           Goyave
           is
           somewhat
           bigger
           than
           a
           Nut
           :
           Its
           Pulp
           is
           red
           ,
           very
           stony
           ,
           and
           of
           the
           Taste
           of
           a
           Peach
           .
           The
           Tree
           that
           bears
           this
           Fruit
           resembles
           our
           Plum-Trees
           .
        
         
           There
           are
           also
           numerous
           Herds
           of
           Oxen
           ,
           Hogs
           ,
           and
           Sheep
           ,
           with
           variety
           of
           Game
           ,
           and
           several
           sorts
           of
           Fowl
           ,
           but
           every
           thing
           is
           sold
           ●t
           an
           excessive
           dear
           Rate
           .
           The
           Fleet
           that
           arrives
           there
           every
           Year
           from
           Portugal
           ,
           brings
           Wine
           ,
           Meal
           ,
           Oil
           ,
           Cheese
           ;
           Linnen
           and
           Woollen
           Cloth
           ,
           and
           all
           other
           necessary
           Merchandizes
           ;
           and
           returns
           laden
           with
           Sugar
           ,
           Leather
           ,
           and
           Train-Oil
           ;
           from
           whence
           arises
           a
           considerable
           Revenue
           to
           the
           King
           of
           Portugal
           .
           Formerly
           they
           had
           great
           Quantities
           of
           Tobacco
           ,
           but
           at
           present
           the
           Sale
           of
           it
           is
           forbidden
           ,
           as
           one
           of
           the
           greatest
           Obstacles
           to
           the
           Trade
           of
           the
           Bay
           of
           
             All
             Saints
          
           :
           'T
           is
           also
           prohibited
           to
           deal
           in
           Corn
           and
           Wine
           ,
           to
           prevent
           the
           interrupting
           of
           the
           European
           Commerce
           ,
           of
           which
           the
           Inhabitants
           may
           make
           considerable
           Advantage
           ,
           as
           well
           as
           those
           of
           St.
           Paul
           ,
           in
           the
           Territories
           of
           St.
           Vincent
           ,
           whose
           Political
           Government
           is
           so
           Remarkable
           ,
           
           that
           it
           may
           not
           be
           amiss
           to
           give
           some
           Account
           of
           it
           by
           the
           way
           .
        
         
           This
           Town
           ,
           
           which
           is
           situated
           Ten
           Leagues
           up
           the
           Country
           ,
           derives
           its
           Original
           from
           an
           Association
           of
           Robbers
           of
           all
           Nations
           ,
           who
           by
           little
           and
           little
           ,
           form'd
           a
           great
           Town
           ,
           and
           a
           kind
           of
           Common-Wealth
           ,
           where
           they
           made
           a
           Law
           ,
           not
           to
           admit
           a
           Governour
           .
           They
           are
           surrounded
           with
           high
           Mountains
           ;
           so
           that
           one
           cannot
           enter
           ,
           or
           go
           out
           ,
           but
           thro'
           a
           Defilé
           or
           narrow
           Passage
           ,
           where
           they
           keep
           a
           strong
           Guard
           ,
           for
           fear
           of
           being
           surpriz'd
           by
           the
           Indians
           ,
           with
           whom
           they
           almost
           continually
           make
           War
           ,
           and
           lest
           their
           Slaves
           should
           find
           Means
           to
           escape
           .
           These
           Paulists
           usually
           march
           40
           or
           50
           in
           a
           Body
           ,
           arm'd
           with
           Bows
           and
           Arrows
           ,
           which
           they
           use
           more
           dexterously
           than
           any
           Nation
           in
           the
           World
           :
           They
           traverse
           the
           whole
           Continent
           of
           Brasil
           ,
           passing
           as
           far
           as
           the
           River
           of
           Plata
           ,
           or
           to
           that
           of
           the
           Amazons
           ,
           and
           return
           at
           the
           End
           of
           four
           or
           five
           Months
           ,
           sometimes
           with
           above
           300
           Slaves
           ,
           whom
           they
           drive
           as
           Herds
           of
           Oxen
           ;
           and
           having
           tamed
           a
           little
           ,
           they
           dispose
           of
           them
           in
           the
           Country
           to
           till
           the
           Ground
           ,
           or
           employ
           them
           in
           fishing
           for
           Gold
           ,
           which
           they
           find
           in
           so
           great
           quantity
           ,
           that
           the
           King
           of
           Portugal
           ,
           to
           
           whom
           they
           carefully
           send
           a
           fifth
           Part
           ,
           receives
           every
           Year
           above
           8
           or
           900
           Marks
           :
           They
           pay
           him
           this
           Tribute
           not
           out
           of
           a
           motive
           of
           Fear
           ,
           for
           they
           are
           more
           potent
           than
           he
           ,
           but
           to
           follow
           the
           Custom
           of
           their
           Ancestors
           ,
           who
           not
           being
           at
           first
           well
           settled
           in
           their
           Retreat
           ,
           endeavoured
           to
           withdraw
           themselves
           from
           Subjection
           to
           their
           Governours
           ,
           under
           pretence
           of
           managing
           the
           King's
           Affairs
           ,
           to
           whom
           they
           own
           themselves
           at
           present
           ,
           to
           be
           Tributaries
           ,
           but
           not
           Subjects
           ,
           that
           they
           may
           shake
           off
           the
           Yoke
           on
           the
           first
           Opportunity
           .
        
         
           On
           the
           25th
           .
           instant
           ,
           
           we
           set
           our
           sick
           Men
           on
           board
           again
           ,
           who
           ,
           except
           five
           or
           six
           ,
           were
           very
           hearty
           .
           The
           Commander
           of
           the
           Place
           where
           they
           lodg'd
           ,
           was
           a
           generous
           old
           Gentleman
           ,
           of
           great
           Integrity
           ,
           and
           was
           not
           at
           all
           tainted
           with
           the
           sordid
           Principles
           of
           his
           Countrymen
           ;
           For
           he
           entertain'd
           our
           sick
           Mariners
           with
           a
           Paternal
           Charity
           ,
           supplying
           them
           with
           Eggs
           ,
           Confits
           ,
           Wine
           ,
           and
           generally
           with
           every
           thing
           that
           was
           necessary
           for
           them
           ,
           at
           his
           own
           proper
           Costs
           and
           Charges
           ;
           nay
           he
           offer'd
           to
           retain
           the
           weakest
           of
           them
           in
           his
           own
           House
           till
           our
           Return
           .
        
         
         
           On
           the
           27th
           .
           we
           set
           sail
           ,
           and
           pass'd
           between
           the
           Forts
           ,
           with
           our
           Cannons
           mounted
           ,
           and
           Matches
           lighted
           ,
           being
           all
           ready
           to
           answer
           them
           if
           they
           shou'd
           attempt
           to
           disturb
           us
           about
           the
           Salute
           at
           parting
           ,
           or
           shou'd
           make
           us
           wait
           for
           the
           Governour
           's
           Orders
           .
           We
           no
           longer
           stood
           in
           need
           of
           them
           ,
           of
           which
           they
           were
           also
           very
           sensible
           :
           They
           all
           appear'd
           in
           Ranks
           on
           their
           Parapets
           ,
           and
           seem'd
           to
           be
           overjoy'd
           at
           our
           departure
           ,
           by
           reason
           that
           they
           were
           tir'd
           with
           the
           continual
           Guards
           that
           they
           kept
           during
           the
           time
           of
           our
           Abode
           among
           them
           .
           The
           Governour
           thought
           himself
           so
           little
           secure
           ,
           that
           he
           summon'd
           all
           the
           Inhabitants
           within
           four
           Leagues
           round
           about
           .
           We
           were
           no
           sooner
           gone
           ,
           but
           he
           caus'd
           a
           Fort
           ,
           furnish'd
           with
           some
           Pieces
           of
           Ordnance
           ,
           to
           be
           built
           below
           the
           Town
           on
           a
           small
           Island
           ,
           which
           commands
           the
           Road
           ,
           and
           where
           the
           French
           settl'd
           when
           this
           River
           was
           first
           discover'd
           .
        
         
           
             An
             unknown
             fruit
             found
             in
             y
             e
             Great
             Island
             at
             Brasil
             ,
          
        
         
           
             p
             :
             65
          
           
             
               A
               Mapou
               Pear
            
             Found
             in
             y
             e
             great
             Island
             at
             Brasil
             ,
          
        
         
           
             La
             Isla
             Grande
          
           or
           
             the
             Great
             Island
          
           ,
           
           being
           about
           18
           Leagues
           in
           compass
           ,
           lies
           high
           ,
           and
           is
           beset
           with
           Woods
           of
           a
           prodigious
           thickness
           ,
           insomuch
           that
           one
           cannot
           walk
           in
           them
           100
           Paces
           together
           :
           But
           there
           are
           entire
           Plains
           of
           Orange-Trees
           and
           Lemmon-Trees
           ,
           with
           much
           variety
           of
           wild
           Fruits
           ;
           and
           among
           others
           the
           Pear
           of
           Mapou
           ,
           which
           bears
           a
           sort
           of
           Red
           Cotton
           ,
           and
           of
           which
           Quilts
           are
           made
           ,
           that
           are
           so
           extremely
           durable
           ,
           that
           they
           can
           scarce
           be
           worn
           out
           ;
           for
           by
           exposing
           them
           to
           the
           Sun
           from
           time
           to
           time
           ,
           the
           Cotton
           swells
           again
           of
           it self
           ,
           and
           the
           Quilt
           becomes
           as
           it
           were
           new
           .
           We
           met
           with
           another
           sort
           of
           Fruit
           ,
           which
           is
           as
           big
           as
           a
           small
           Nut
           ,
           and
           seems
           to
           have
           the
           crown'd
           Head
           of
           a
           Clove
           .
           There
           are
           also
           many
           of
           those
           Animals
           that
           we
           call
           Tatous
           ,
           and
           the
           Scales
           of
           which
           serve
           
           to
           adorn
           Apothecaries
           Shops
           :
           Their
           Flesh
           is
           firm
           ,
           and
           has
           the
           taste
           of
           fresh
           Pork
           .
        
         
           On
           the
           Coast
           over-again●●
           this
           Creek
           ,
           stands
           a
           large
           Town
           belonging
           to
           the
           Portugueses
           ,
           where
           there
           are
           about
           four
           or
           five
           hundred
           Inhabitants
           ,
           and
           two
           Convents
           ,
           viz.
           one
           of
           Carmelites
           ,
           and
           the
           other
           of
           the
           Cordeliers
           .
           We
           there
           bought
           some
           Provisions
           ,
           viz.
           Oxen
           ,
           Fowl
           ,
           dry'd
           Fish
           ,
           and
           four
           Pyrogues
           ,
           
           which
           cost
           us
           from
           forty
           to
           eighty
           Crowns
           :
           These
           are
           large
           Canoos
           ,
           very
           long
           ,
           and
           made
           of
           one
           single
           Tree
           hollow'd
           :
           They
           are
           light
           ,
           fit
           for
           Descents
           ,
           and
           capable
           of
           holding
           60
           Men.
           The
           Governour
           of
           Rio-Janeiro
           sent
           on
           purpose
           to
           forbid
           the
           Inhabitants
           to
           sell
           us
           any
           sorts
           of
           Commodities
           whatever
           ;
           but
           they
           had
           not
           much
           regard
           to
           his
           Prohibition
           ,
           for
           they
           furnish'd
           us
           with
           every
           thing
           we
           desir'd
           .
           They
           have
           all
           Habitations
           in
           the
           Mountains
           ,
           and
           affect
           to
           be
           as
           free
           as
           the
           Paulists
           .
        
         
           On
           the
           5th
           .
           Day
           of
           
             January
             A.
             D.
          
           1696.
           
           after
           having
           taken
           in
           fresh
           Water
           and
           Wood
           ,
           we
           set
           sail
           for
           the
           Streights
           of
           Magellan
           .
        
         
           map of the strait of Magellan
           
             Pag.
             66.
             
          
           
             THE
             STRAIGHT
             OF
             MAGELLAN
          
           
             A
             Scale
             of
             Leagues
          
        
         
           On
           the
           21st
           .
           and
           22d
           .
           at
           Night
           ,
           as
           we
           were
           sailing
           a-cross
           Cape
           St.
           Antony
           ,
           we
           lost
           sight
           of
           the
           Felicity
           ,
           altho'
           the
           Moon
           shone
           bright
           ,
           the
           Sea
           was
           calm
           ,
           and
           the
           Wind
           moderate
           ;
           neither
           could
           the
           Fault
           be
           attributed
           to
           any
           thing
           ,
           but
           the
           Negligence
           of
           those
           Mariners
           who
           were
           then
           upon
           the
           Watch
           ,
           and
           who
           relying
           too
           much
           on
           the
           calmness
           of
           the
           Weather
           ,
           fell
           asleep
           .
           We
           discharg'd
           divers
           Cannon-shot
           ,
           and
           all
           steer'd
           different
           Courses
           ,
           in
           quest
           of
           that
           Ship
           ,
           but
           it
           was
           to
           no
           purpose
           .
        
         
           On
           the
           23d
           .
           we
           saw
           a
           great
           many
           Sea-Wolves
           lying
           asleep
           on
           their
           Backs
           ,
           upon
           the
           Surface
           of
           the
           Water
           .
        
         
           On
           the
           26th
           .
           and
           27th
           .
           we
           had
           a
           dreadful
           Storm
           of
           Thunder
           ,
           and
           much
           Rain
           .
        
         
           On
           the
           29th
           .
           we
           saw
           some
           Whales
           ,
           Sea-Pies
           ,
           and
           prodigious
           Flocks
           of
           other
           Birds
           ,
           that
           follow'd
           us
           as
           it
           were
           so
           many
           Ducks
           .
        
         
         
           On
           the
           30th
           .
           we
           saw
           abundance
           of
           Sea-Weeds
           ,
           which
           made
           us
           conjecture
           we
           were
           near
           Land
           ;
           but
           having
           sounded
           ,
           it
           appear'd
           that
           we
           were
           still
           distant
           from
           it
           above
           forty
           Leagues
           .
        
         
           On
           the
           31st
           .
           the
           Sea
           was
           all
           over
           cover'd
           with
           small
           Cray-Fish
           ,
           insomuch
           that
           it
           might
           well
           be
           call'd
           the
           Red-Sea
           ;
           We
           took
           up
           above
           10000
           of
           them
           in
           Baskets
           .
        
         
           On
           the
           1st
           .
           and
           2d
           .
           of
           February
           ,
           
           the
           Winds
           were
           boisterous
           ,
           and
           the
           Sea
           ran
           high
           .
        
         
           On
           the
           4th
           .
           at
           Noon
           ,
           we
           discover'd
           the
           Cape
           of
           St.
           
             Ynes
             de
             las-Bareras
          
           :
           The
           Lands
           thereabouts
           are
           low
           ,
           and
           as
           far
           as
           we
           cou'd
           discern
           ,
           very
           barren
           :
           We
           discern'd
           a
           very
           thick
           Smoke
           ,
           which
           induc'd
           us
           to
           believe
           that
           there
           were
           some
           Inhabitants
           .
           The
           most
           part
           of
           Navigators
           who
           have
           sail'd
           on
           those
           Coasts
           ,
           and
           who
           have
           publish'd
           Relations
           of
           their
           Voyages
           ,
           affirm
           ,
           that
           when
           the
           Savages
           discover
           the
           Arrival
           of
           any
           Vessels
           ,
           they
           usually
           make
           great
           Fires
           ,
           and
           offer
           Sacrifices
           to
           the
           Devil
           ,
           to
           conjure
           him
           to
           raise
           Storms
           to
           destroy
           them
           .
        
         
           On
           the
           5th
           .
           and
           6th
           .
           the
           Winds
           were
           very
           variable
           ,
           and
           the
           Weather
           hazy
           .
        
         
         
           On
           the
           7th
           .
           at
           three
           a-clock
           in
           the
           Morning
           ,
           the
           Pink
           let
           off
           a
           Gun
           ,
           to
           give
           us
           notice
           that
           she
           descry'd
           Land
           ,
           whereupon
           we
           cast
           Anchor
           ,
           because
           it
           was
           very
           requisite
           for
           us
           to
           discover
           it
           ;
           and
           at
           break
           of
           Day
           we
           discern'd
           a
           Cape
           ,
           which
           our
           Pilot
           ,
           and
           two
           of
           our
           Officers
           ,
           who
           had
           before
           pass'd
           the
           Streights
           of
           Magellan
           ,
           assur'd
           us
           to
           be
           that
           of
           
             The
             Virgins
          
           .
           The
           Winds
           veer'd
           ,
           and
           became
           contrary
           ,
           so
           that
           we
           were
           not
           able
           to
           cast
           Anchor
           ,
           to
           make
           any
           Discovery
           .
        
         
           On
           the
           8th
           .
           the
           Winds
           still
           continu'd
           contrary
           to
           us
           ;
           and
           at
           two
           a-clock
           in
           the
           Afternoon
           blew
           with
           so
           great
           impetuosity
           ,
           that
           our
           Cable
           broke
           ;
           neither
           could
           we
           hoise
           up
           our
           Sails
           ,
           which
           were
           taken
           in
           ,
           to
           give
           less
           Advantage
           to
           the
           Wind
           ;
           forasmuch
           as
           there
           was
           no
           probability
           of
           being
           able
           to
           carry
           any
           Sail
           ,
           we
           suffer'd
           our selves
           to
           lie
           by
           ,
           at
           the
           mercy
           of
           the
           Waves
           ,
           till
           the
           next
           Day
           at
           four
           a-clock
           in
           the
           Morning
           ,
           when
           the
           Fury
           of
           the
           Wind
           being
           somewhat
           abated
           ,
           we
           drew
           near
           the
           Land
           ,
           and
           at
           Noon
           cast
           Anchor
           at
           the
           Mouth
           of
           the
           River
           of
           
             Sancta
             Cruz
          
           ,
           
           there
           to
           wait
           for
           a
           favourable
           Gale
           ,
           to
           rejoyn
           our
           Vessels
           .
           We
           scarce
           let
           fall
           Anchor
           ,
           but
           the
           Storm
           
           was
           appeas'd
           ,
           the
           Sea
           became
           calm
           ,
           and
           we
           made
           as
           much
           Sail
           as
           we
           could
           that
           Day
           .
        
         
           We
           doubl'd
           the
           Cape
           at
           Night
           ,
           and
           at
           break
           of
           Day
           came
           up
           with
           our
           Fleet
           ,
           and
           steer'd
           our
           Course
           to
           the
           above-mention'd
           Promontory
           ,
           
           which
           we
           suppos'd
           to
           be
           that
           of
           the
           Virgins
           ;
           choosing
           rather
           to
           follow
           the
           Directions
           of
           the
           Navigators
           who
           had
           already
           cruis'd
           about
           those
           Coasts
           ,
           than
           that
           of
           the
           Sea-Charts
           ,
           which
           are
           often
           mistaken
           in
           places
           that
           are
           so
           little
           frequented
           :
           However
           we
           insensibly
           drove
           upon
           a
           Shelf
           ,
           from
           whence
           it
           would
           have
           been
           very
           difficult
           to
           get
           off
           ,
           if
           we
           had
           not
           timely
           discover'd
           our
           Error
           by
           sounding
           :
           Therefore
           we
           immediately
           chang'd
           our
           Course
           ,
           and
           lengthen'd
           the
           Coast
           ,
           bearing
           but
           little
           Sail.
           
        
         
           On
           the
           11th
           .
           Instant
           ,
           we
           discover'd
           another
           Cape
           ,
           very
           like
           the
           former
           ,
           and
           altho'
           we
           had
           scarce
           reason
           to
           doubt
           it
           to
           be
           that
           of
           the
           Virgins
           ,
           yet
           we
           could
           not
           be
           well
           satisfy'd
           till
           we
           found
           it
           by
           experience
           .
           We
           tack'd
           about
           for
           some
           time
           ,
           till
           the
           Foggs
           were
           dispers'd
           ,
           and
           at
           Noon
           we
           enter'd
           the
           Straight
           ,
           where
           we
           cast
           Anchor
           at
           four
           a-clock
           in
           the
           Afternoon
           ,
           at
           the
           Entrance
           of
           the
           Bay
           
           of
           Possession
           ,
           with
           a
           favourable
           Wind
           and
           Current
           .
        
         
           On
           the
           12th
           .
           at
           break
           of
           Day
           ,
           we
           prepar'd
           to
           set
           sail
           ,
           but
           there
           was
           so
           little
           Wind
           ,
           that
           we
           were
           not
           able
           to
           make
           three
           Leagues
           during
           the
           whole
           Day
           .
        
         
           On
           the
           13th
           .
           at
           break
           of
           Day
           ,
           we
           set
           out
           again
           ,
           and
           made
           as
           much
           sail
           as
           the
           Tides
           wou'd
           permit
           us
           .
           At
           four
           a-clock
           in
           the
           Afternoon
           we
           doubled
           the
           Cape
           Entrana
           ,
           
           and
           cast
           Anchor
           at
           the
           Entrance
           of
           the
           Bay
           of
           Boucaut
           .
           We
           there
           saw
           several
           Whales
           ,
           and
           a
           great
           number
           of
           Porpoises
           all
           over
           white
           except
           their
           Head
           and
           Tail.
           
        
         
           On
           the
           14th
           .
           we
           weigh'd
           Anchor
           ,
           and
           tack'd
           about
           till
           Noon
           ,
           when
           the
           Tide
           being
           contrary
           to
           us
           ,
           we
           were
           oblig'd
           to
           cast
           Anchor
           within
           two
           Leagues
           of
           the
           Land
           ,
           in
           the
           middle
           of
           Boucaut
           Bay.
           The
           Coast
           is
           flat
           ,
           barren
           ,
           and
           destitute
           both
           of
           fresh
           Water
           and
           Wood.
           We
           there
           met
           with
           Snipes
           ,
           and
           many
           Flocks
           of
           Sea-Pies
           ;
           and
           some
           of
           our
           Mariners
           told
           us
           ,
           that
           a
           League
           up
           the
           Land
           ,
           they
           had
           seen
           Buffles
           and
           Goats
           .
           There
           is
           also
           (
           as
           everywhere
           throughout
           the
           Streights
           )
           a
           prodigious
           quantity
           of
           Cockles
           and
           Muscles
           ,
           which
           are
           
           not
           at
           all
           inferiour
           to
           those
           of
           Charonne
           .
           We
           found
           some
           ,
           the
           Shells
           of
           which
           were
           of
           an
           admirable
           Beauty
           ,
           and
           weigh'd
           half
           a
           pound
           .
        
         
           On
           the
           16th
           .
           
           we
           weather'd
           Cape
           Gregory
           ,
           and
           at
           Noon
           cast
           Anchor
           within
           a
           small
           League
           of
           St.
           
           George's
           Island
           ,
           to
           which
           we
           could
           not
           come
           nearer
           ,
           by
           reason
           that
           we
           were
           becalm'd
           ,
           and
           the
           Tides
           began
           to
           run
           contrary
           .
           This
           Island
           being
           about
           a
           League
           in
           Compass
           ,
           is
           high
           and
           barren
           ,
           yet
           we
           found
           there
           some
           Mushrooms
           ,
           many
           Sea-Pies
           ,
           and
           several
           Hutts
           of
           Savages
           abandon'd
           .
           We
           also
           took
           some
           Penguins
           ,
           
           from
           which
           the
           Island
           derives
           its
           Name
           ,
           which
           was
           impos'd
           by
           the
           English
           ,
           by
           reason
           of
           a
           great
           quantity
           of
           this
           sort
           of
           Birds
           which
           they
           found
           therein
           :
           They
           are
           somewhat
           larger
           than
           Geese
           ,
           have
           short
           Legs
           ,
           with
           Grey
           and
           very
           thick
           Feathers
           ;
           Their
           Wings
           are
           bare
           without
           any
           Feathers
           ,
           and
           serve
           only
           instead
           of
           Finns
           :
           They
           live
           for
           the
           most
           part
           in
           the
           Water
           ,
           retire
           to
           Land
           to
           sleep
           ,
           and
           make
           Holes
           in
           the
           Ground
           like
           Foxes
           .
           The
           most
           part
           of
           our
           Company
           spent
           the
           Night
           there
           ,
           to
           have
           the
           pleasure
           of
           viewing
           the
           Sea-Wolves
           :
           
           These
           Animals
           climb
           up
           steep
           Rocks
           ,
           sit
           on
           
           their
           Tails
           like
           Monkeys
           ,
           and
           make
           a
           dreadful
           noise
           to
           call
           their
           Mates
           :
           When
           they
           bring
           forth
           Young
           ,
           they
           carry
           them
           into
           the
           Woods
           ,
           supply
           them
           with
           Fish
           ,
           and
           tend
           them
           as
           carefully
           as
           an
           indulgent
           Mother
           does
           her
           Children
           .
        
         
           On
           the
           18th
           .
           a
           blustering
           Wind
           arose
           ,
           which
           oblig'd
           us
           to
           stand
           in
           again
           for
           Boucaut-Bay
           ,
           where
           we
           cast
           Anchor
           in
           the
           Evening
           ,
           under
           shelter
           of
           Cape
           Gregory
           :
           The
           Pink
           follow'd
           us
           ,
           and
           the
           other
           Vessels
           were
           not
           long
           in
           coming
           up
           .
        
         
           On
           the
           19th
           ,
           and
           20th
           .
           it
           was
           excessive
           cold
           ,
           and
           the
           Winds
           grew
           more
           boisterous
           .
           We
           saw
           great
           Fires
           on
           the
           Island
           of
           Fuogo
           ,
           and
           the
           Savages
           seem'd
           to
           be
           desirous
           to
           converse
           with
           us
           ,
           but
           the
           Sea
           ran
           so
           high
           ,
           th●●
           we
           could
           not
           come
           near
           them
           .
        
         
           On
           the
           21th
           .
           we
           set
           sail
           again
           ,
           doubled
           Cape
           Gregory
           ,
           and
           having
           cross'd
           St.
           
           George's
           Island
           ,
           along
           which
           we
           coasted
           with
           Plummet
           in
           hand
           ,
           we
           suddenly
           found
           our selves
           fallen
           upon
           the
           Point
           of
           a
           Shelf
           :
           We
           cast
           Anchor
           to
           sound
           ,
           and
           continu'd
           our
           Course
           again
           an
           hour
           after
           .
           At
           5
           a-Clock
           in
           the
           Evening
           ,
           we
           cast
           Anchor
           within
           six
           Leagues
           of
           St.
           
           George's
           Island
           ,
           in
           a
           Creek
           ,
           where
           the
           
           Coast
           arises
           delightfully
           ,
           and
           begins
           to
           be
           beset
           with
           Woods
           :
           There
           are
           divers
           small
           Rivers
           ,
           where
           very
           good
           Water
           may
           be
           taken
           in
           ,
           and
           on
           the
           Banks
           of
           which
           we
           met
           with
           Salery
           ,
           Gooseberries
           ,
           Foxes
           ,
           Bustards
           ,
           Thrushes
           ,
           Ducks
           ,
           and
           Cormorants
           ,
           and
           abundance
           of
           other
           Sea-Fowl
           .
        
         
           On
           the
           22th
           ,
           and
           23th
           .
           the
           Winds
           were
           contrary
           .
        
         
           
             P.
             74
          
           
             Mountaines
             Coverd
             with
             Snow
             dureing
             y
             e
             whole
             year
             .
          
           
             the
             Hutts
             of
             y
             e
             Savages
          
           
             Peng●●●●s
          
           
             M.
             Vander
             Gucht
             Scul
             :
          
        
         
           These
           Savages
           are
           robust
           ,
           and
           of
           a
           tall
           Stature
           ,
           their
           Complexion
           being
           of
           an
           Olive-Colour
           :
           Their
           Hair
           is
           black
           ,
           long
           ,
           and
           cut
           above
           their
           Head
           in
           form
           of
           a
           Crown
           .
           They
           usually
           paint
           their
           Faces
           ,
           Arms
           ,
           and
           several
           other
           parts
           of
           their
           Body
           ,
           with
           a
           white
           Tincture
           .
           Notwithstanding
           the
           excessive
           Cold
           ,
           they
           always
           go
           naked
           ;
           except
           that
           their
           Shoulders
           are
           cover'd
           with
           the
           Skins
           of
           Sea-Dogs
           and
           Sea-Wolves
           .
           They
           are
           destitute
           of
           Religion
           ,
           and
           free
           from
           all
           manner
           of
           Care.
           They
           have
           no
           settled
           Habitation
           ,
           but
           rove
           up
           and
           down
           ,
           sometimes
           in
           one
           place
           ,
           sometimes
           in
           another
           .
           Their
           Hutts
           are
           made
           only
           of
           a
           Semi-Circle
           of
           Branches
           ,
           which
           they
           set
           up
           ,
           and
           let
           one
           into
           another
           ,
           to
           shelter
           themselves
           from
           the
           Wind.
           These
           are
           the
           famous
           Patagons
           whom
           some
           Authors
           avouch
           to
           be
           eight
           or
           ten
           Foot
           high
           ,
           and
           of
           whom
           they
           tell
           so
           many
           strange
           Tales
           ,
           even
           making
           them
           swallow
           whole
           Pails
           full
           of
           Wine
           :
           However
           they
           appear'd
           to
           us
           to
           be
           very
           sober
           ;
           
           and
           the
           tallest
           among
           them
           was
           not
           above
           six
           Foot
           high
           .
        
         
           On
           the
           25th
           .
           
           we
           prepar'd
           to
           set
           Sail
           ,
           but
           had
           scarce
           pass'd
           Cape
           Froward
           ,
           when
           we
           found
           the
           Winds
           variable
           and
           contrary
           ;
           insomuch
           that
           not
           being
           able
           to
           cast
           Anchor
           ,
           we
           were
           oblig'd
           to
           pass
           the
           Cape
           in
           the
           Night
           .
        
         
           map
           
             
               The
               French
               Bay
            
             with
             the
             Mouth
             of
             the
             River
             Gennes
             in
             the
             Straight
             of
             Magellan
          
           
             Pag.
             77
          
        
         
           On
           the
           3d.
           of
           March
           
           we
           put
           out
           to
           Sea
           ,
           with
           a
           favourable
           Gale
           ;
           but
           we
           had
           scarce
           doubl'd
           Cape
           Froward
           ,
           when
           the
           Winds
           veer'd
           after
           their
           usual
           manner
           ,
           with
           Blasts
           that
           came
           by
           Fits
           ,
           and
           fell
           foul
           on
           our
           Vessel
           when
           we
           were
           least
           aware
           of
           it
           .
           We
           pass'd
           the
           Cape
           in
           the
           Night
           ,
           the
           Winds
           blew
           f●●h
           ,
           and
           we
           were
           oblig'd
           to
           stand
           in
           two
           Leagues
           above
           the
           French
           Bay
           ,
           which
           we
           were
           not
           able
           to
           make
           .
        
         
           On
           the
           5th
           .
           we
           discover'd
           
           Famine-Bay
           ,
           
           so
           call'd
           ,
           because
           the
           Inhabitants
           of
           a
           new
           Colony
           of
           Spaniards
           were
           there
           miserably
           starv'd
           to
           death
           ,
           which
           Colony
           was
           settl'd
           by
           Philip
           II.
           King
           of
           Spain
           ,
           who
           endeavour'd
           by
           that
           means
           to
           hinder
           the
           Passage
           of
           Foreigners
           to
           the
           Southern
           Sea.
           This
           Bay
           is
           large
           ,
           having
           a
           firm
           bottom
           ,
           so
           that
           40
           Ships
           
           may
           conveniently
           ride
           at
           Anchor
           therein
           .
           There
           are
           spacious
           Plains
           round
           about
           ,
           which
           may
           be
           sown
           with
           divers
           sorts
           of
           Grains
           .
           There
           is
           also
           great
           plenty
           of
           Game
           ;
           and
           't
           is
           probable
           that
           the
           Spaniards
           might
           find
           more
           in
           those
           Parts
           ,
           if
           it
           were
           not
           destroy'd
           by
           the
           Savages
           .
        
         
           On
           the
           6th
           .
           we
           weigh'd
           Anchor
           ,
           and
           doubl'd
           the
           Capes
           Froward
           and
           Holland
           ,
           where
           we
           felt
           ,
           as
           at
           other
           times
           ,
           very
           furious
           Blasts
           of
           Wind
           ;
           but
           the
           next
           Day
           at
           Noon
           ,
           we
           cast
           Anchor
           two
           Leagues
           below
           Port
           Gallant
           .
        
         
           On
           the
           8th
           .
           a
           high
           Wind
           arose
           ,
           which
           drove
           the
           
             Sun
             of
             Africa
          
           from
           her
           Anchor
           ,
           and
           forc'd
           her
           to
           stand
           in
           for
           the
           French
           Bay●
        
         
           On
           the
           9th
           .
           at
           Noon
           ,
           the
           Winds
           were
           as
           favourable
           as
           could
           be
           wish'd
           for
           ;
           yet
           we
           could
           not
           take
           the
           Advantage
           ,
           by
           reason
           that
           we
           were
           oblig'd
           to
           wait
           for
           the
           
             Sun
             of
             Africa
          
           ,
           which
           did
           not
           appear
           till
           the
           next
           Morning
           at
           break
           of
           Day
           :
           Then
           we
           prepar'd
           to
           set
           Sail
           ,
           but
           the
           Winds
           immediately
           veer'd
           ,
           and
           became
           contrary
           ,
           with
           a
           great
           deal
           of
           Hail
           and
           Rains
           so
           that
           we
           were
           oblig'd
           to
           cast
           Anchor
           a
           League
           below
           Port
           Gallant
           .
        
         
         
           The
           Winds
           continu'd
           contrary
           to
           us
           ,
           till
           the
           20th
           .
           Instant
           ,
           being
           very
           sharp
           ,
           and
           there
           fell
           abundance
           of
           Rain
           ,
           Hail
           ,
           and
           Snow
           ,
           with
           which
           the
           Mountains
           are
           cover'd
           during
           the
           whole
           Year
           .
           We
           took
           in
           fresh
           Water
           and
           Wood
           ,
           and
           saw
           a
           great
           number
           of
           Whales
           .
        
         
           On
           the
           20th
           .
           
           we
           set
           sail
           with
           a
           favourable
           Wind
           ,
           but
           it
           soon
           return'd
           to
           its
           wonted
           Career
           ,
           and
           we
           could
           only
           make
           the
           Road
           of
           Port
           Galant
           ,
           where
           we
           continu'd
           fifteen
           Days
           longer
           ,
           with
           cold
           Winds
           ,
           a
           great
           deal
           of
           Rain
           and
           Snow
           .
           This
           Road
           is
           large
           ,
           and
           shelter'd
           from
           the
           Eastern
           Winds
           .
           The
           Situation
           of
           the
           Harbour
           is
           pleasant
           and
           very
           commodious
           ,
           two
           small
           Rivers
           falling
           into
           it
           .
           There
           are
           also
           to
           be
           seen
           the
           finest
           Shells
           in
           the
           World
           ,
           with
           variety
           of
           Fowl
           ,
           viz.
           Larks
           ,
           Thrushes
           ,
           Ducks
           ,
           and
           abundance
           of
           Sea-Pies
           .
           We
           often
           heard
           the
           Cries
           of
           the
           Savages
           in
           the
           Mountains
           ,
           but
           could
           not
           see
           them
           .
        
         
           Forasmuch
           as
           our
           Provisions
           began
           to
           fail
           ,
           the
           Season
           being
           already
           very
           far
           advanc'd
           ,
           and
           there
           was
           no
           longer
           any
           hopes
           to
           meet
           with
           favourable
           Winds
           to
           convey
           us
           into
           the
           Southern
           Sea
           ;
           we
           held
           a
           Council
           on
           the
           3d.
           Day
           of
           April
           ,
           
           
           and
           it
           was
           determin'd
           that
           if
           the
           Wind
           did
           not
           change
           within
           the
           space
           of
           two
           Days
           ,
           we
           should
           return
           to
           
             La
             Isla
             Grande
          
           ,
           to
           take
           in
           Provisions
           ,
           in
           order
           to
           seek
           our
           Fortunes
           elsewhere
           .
           It
           may
           be
           easily
           imagin'd
           in
           so
           lamentable
           a
           Conjuncture
           ,
           how
           great
           a
           Mortification
           this
           Disappointment
           was
           to
           Persons
           ,
           who
           hoped
           to
           make
           their
           Fortune
           by
           so
           noble
           an
           Enterprize
           .
           There
           was
           not
           one
           Mariner
           of
           the
           whole
           Squadron
           who
           did
           not
           choose
           rather
           to
           perish
           with
           hunger
           ,
           than
           to
           be
           diverted
           from
           the
           right
           Course
           ;
           And
           indeed
           they
           were
           already
           accustom'd
           to
           eat
           Rats
           ,
           and
           paid
           fifteen
           Pence
           a-piece
           for
           them
           .
           Altho'
           we
           were
           not
           so
           happy
           as
           to
           see
           those
           fortunate
           Coasts
           of
           Peru
           ,
           from
           whence
           we
           are
           supply'd
           with
           what
           is
           generally
           esteem'd
           ,
           most
           precious
           ;
           nevertheless
           I
           am
           apt
           to
           believe
           ,
           that
           a
           particular
           Account
           of
           the
           Occasion
           of
           our
           Undertaking
           this
           Voyage
           ,
           may
           not
           be
           altogether
           unacceptable
           to
           the
           Reader
           .
        
         
           In
           the
           Year
           1686.
           
           certain
           Free-booters
           of
           St.
           Domingo
           ,
           who
           are
           well
           known
           to
           be
           Enemies
           to
           Peace
           ,
           after
           having
           for
           many
           Years
           infested
           the
           Coast
           of
           
             Carack
             ,
             New-Spain
          
           ,
           and
           Cuba
           ,
           without
           being
           able
           to
           get
           any
           considerable
           Prize
           ,
           
           took
           a
           Resolution
           to
           pass
           to
           those
           of
           the
           Southern-Sea
           ,
           which
           they
           know
           to
           be
           much
           more
           Rich
           ,
           and
           less
           fortify'd
           .
           There
           were
           two
           Passages
           which
           lay
           open
           into
           those
           Parts
           ,
           viz.
           one
           along
           the
           Coast
           ,
           and
           the
           other
           by
           the
           Streight
           of
           Magellan
           :
           The
           former
           ,
           as
           the
           shortest
           ,
           was
           taken
           by
           some
           other
           Rovers
           ;
           but
           there
           were
           two
           great
           Difficulties
           ,
           one
           of
           being
           attack'd
           by
           the
           Indians
           during
           their
           Course
           ,
           who
           have
           sometimes
           War
           and
           sometimes
           Peace
           with
           the
           Spaniards
           :
           And
           the
           other
           Difficulty
           is
           to
           find
           in
           that
           Sea
           ,
           Vessels
           convenient
           for
           the
           performing
           of
           such
           a
           Voyage
           .
           The
           Passage
           thro'
           the
           Streight
           of
           Magellan
           appearing
           to
           these
           Free-booters
           to
           be
           the
           safest
           ,
           
           they
           set
           Sail
           ,
           being
           80
           Men
           in
           number
           ,
           for
           the
           Southern-Sea
           ,
           where
           they
           soon
           became
           formidable
           by
           the
           frequent
           Descents
           they
           made
           in
           several
           Places
           ,
           and
           by
           the
           great
           number
           of
           Ships
           richly
           laden
           ,
           which
           they
           took
           :
           However
           ,
           notwithstanding
           these
           Prizes
           ,
           they
           made
           but
           little
           Booty
           ,
           as
           well
           by
           reason
           of
           the
           irregular
           Conduct
           of
           their
           ill-disciplin'd
           Company
           ,
           as
           in
           regard
           that
           the
           Merchandizes
           were
           too
           combersome
           to
           be
           manag'd
           by
           Persons
           who
           had
           no
           settled
           place
           of
           Retreat
           :
           Therefore
           they
           
           contented
           themselves
           only
           with
           putting
           them
           to
           Ransome
           ;
           and
           when
           they
           could
           take
           a
           sufficient
           quantity
           of
           Provisions
           for
           five
           or
           six
           Months
           ,
           they
           retir'd
           to
           some
           Island
           ,
           where
           they
           spent
           their
           time
           in
           Hunting
           and
           Fishing
           ;
           and
           after
           having
           consum'd
           their
           whole
           Stock
           ,
           they
           return'd
           to
           the
           Coast
           .
        
         
           Thus
           our
           Free-booters
           liv'd
           wretchedly
           for
           the
           space
           of
           seven
           Years
           ,
           
           till
           some
           of
           them
           ,
           mov'd
           with
           a
           Desire
           to
           return
           to
           their
           Native
           Country
           ,
           took
           a
           Resolution
           to
           sail
           back
           to
           the
           Northern
           Sea
           ,
           and
           to
           that
           purpose
           met
           together
           in
           the
           Island
           Fernand
           ,
           where
           they
           divided
           their
           Booty
           ,
           and
           every
           one
           of
           them
           had
           the
           Summ
           of
           eight
           or
           nine
           thousand
           Livres
           for
           his
           Share
           .
           However
           twenty
           three
           of
           them
           having
           lost
           by
           Gaming
           what
           they
           were
           so
           long
           in
           getting
           ,
           continu'd
           on
           that
           Island
           with
           a
           *
           Pirogue
           ,
           in
           which
           they
           cross'd
           over
           to
           Peru
           ,
           resolving
           either
           to
           perish
           ,
           or
           at
           least
           to
           repair
           their
           Losses
           .
           Some
           time
           after
           ,
           they
           took
           five
           rich
           Ships
           ,
           among
           which
           they
           chose
           that
           which
           they
           judg'd
           to
           be
           most
           convenient
           for
           the
           making
           an
           end
           of
           their
           Voyage
           :
           They
           loaded
           it
           with
           cast
           Metal
           ,
           divers
           Indian
           Merchandizes
           and
           Provisions
           ,
           and
           at
           last
           
           would
           have
           return'd
           with
           a
           much
           richer
           Cargo
           than
           the
           others
           ,
           if
           they
           had
           not
           had
           the
           ill
           Fortune
           to
           lose
           their
           Ship
           in
           the
           Streight
           of
           Magellan
           ,
           where
           they
           spent
           ten
           whole
           Months
           in
           building
           a
           Bark
           ,
           as
           well
           as
           they
           could
           ,
           and
           with
           all
           the
           Application
           requisite
           in
           so
           great
           an
           Exigence
           :
           They
           laded
           their
           Bark
           with
           what
           they
           could
           save
           out
           of
           the
           Wreck
           of
           their
           Ship
           ,
           and
           pass'd
           Cayenna
           .
        
         
           All
           the
           Free-Booters
           being
           come
           back
           to
           the
           Northern
           Sea
           ,
           
           thought
           fit
           to
           retire
           with
           their
           small
           Cargo
           ;
           so
           that
           some
           of
           them
           settled
           at
           Brasil
           ,
           and
           others
           went
           to
           Cayenna
           ,
           St.
           Domingo
           ,
           and
           the
           other
           Islands
           of
           America
           ;
           but
           there
           were
           about
           four
           or
           five
           ,
           who
           being
           unwilling
           any
           longer
           to
           undergo
           the
           Hardships
           of
           so
           mean
           a
           Condition
           ,
           took
           a
           Resolution
           to
           make
           a
           Second
           Voyage
           ,
           and
           to
           that
           purpose
           ,
           they
           pass'd
           over
           into
           France
           ,
           with
           good
           Memoires
           concerning
           their
           Adventures
           .
           One
           of
           them
           nam'd
           Macerty
           ,
           made
           Application
           to
           Mousieur
           
             de
             Gennes
          
           ,
           whom
           he
           knew
           to
           be
           a
           Man
           very
           fit
           for
           the
           Management
           of
           great
           Undertakings
           ,
           insomuch
           that
           the
           latter
           approv'd
           his
           Design
           ,
           and
           went
           to
           Paris
           ,
           to
           represent
           to
           the
           Court
           the
           Advantages
           that
           might
           arise
           from
           such
           a
           
           Voyage
           ,
           proffering
           his
           Service
           to
           carry
           on
           so
           noble
           an
           Enterprize
           .
        
         
           The
           Proposals
           made
           by
           M.
           
             de
             Gennes
          
           were
           receiv'd
           with
           all
           the
           approbation
           ,
           that
           could
           be
           wish'd
           for
           ;
           the
           King
           supply'd
           him
           with
           Ships
           at
           his
           own
           choice
           ,
           and
           the
           Project
           was
           so
           well
           approv'd
           of
           ,
           upon
           account
           of
           its
           Novelty
           ,
           that
           divers
           Persons
           of
           the
           highest
           Quality
           readily
           contributed
           to
           the
           equipping
           of
           our
           Fleet.
           A
           great
           number
           of
           Young
           Men
           ,
           who
           were
           equally
           excited
           by
           Curiosity
           to
           see
           such
           fine
           Countries
           ;
           and
           by
           the
           hopes
           of
           getting
           an
           opportunity
           to
           make
           their
           Fortune
           ,
           earnestly
           desir'd
           to
           be
           admitted
           into
           the
           Company
           :
           However
           it
           seems
           ,
           we
           did
           not
           go
           on
           successfully
           in
           all
           Points
           ,
           since
           our
           Design
           at
           last
           prov'd
           abortive
           :
           But
           't
           is
           to
           be
           hop'd
           ,
           that
           the
           Court
           will
           not
           discourage
           an
           Undertaking
           of
           so
           great
           Importance
           ,
           which
           failed
           only
           by
           reason
           of
           the
           small
           Experience
           we
           then
           had
           of
           the
           Season
           of
           the
           Winds
           .
           'T
           is
           well
           known
           ,
           that
           the
           Spaniards
           are
           not
           in
           a
           Condition
           to
           make
           War
           with
           us
           ;
           that
           by
           the
           means
           of
           the
           vast
           Treasures
           which
           they
           gather
           daily
           out
           of
           New-Spain
           and
           Peru
           ,
           they
           have
           actually
           made
           themselves
           Masters
           of
           those
           Countries
           ,
           by
           spilling
           the
           Blood
           of
           a
           
           vast
           multitude
           of
           poor
           Indians
           ,
           who
           only
           sought
           for
           an
           amicable
           Correspondence
           with
           those
           haughty
           Invaders
           ,
           who
           to
           strike
           a
           greater
           Terror
           into
           their
           Minds
           ,
           gave
           it
           out
           ,
           that
           they
           were
           descended
           of
           the
           Gods.
           Besides
           all
           the
           Tortures
           which
           they
           could
           devise
           for
           the
           destroying
           of
           those
           miserable
           Wretches
           ,
           they
           carried
           on
           their
           Cruelty
           so
           far
           ,
           as
           to
           assassinate
           and
           sell
           them
           for
           the
           Slaughter
           ,
           for
           the
           Maintenance
           of
           their
           Attendants
           .
           And
           indeed
           ,
           there
           are
           many
           Frenchmen
           who
           can
           testifie
           ,
           that
           the
           Coasts
           of
           Peru
           are
           still
           cover'd
           with
           the
           Skeletons
           of
           those
           unfortunate
           Victims
           ,
           whose
           Blood
           cries
           to
           Heaven
           for
           Vengeance
           ,
           and
           for
           the
           Liberty
           of
           their
           native
           Country
           ;
           insomuch
           that
           nothing
           can
           prevent
           the
           Destruction
           of
           those
           Enemies
           of
           God
           and
           Nature
           ,
           who
           under
           the
           Name
           of
           Christians
           ,
           revive
           Idolatry
           ,
           and
           live
           in
           the
           midst
           of
           their
           Treasure
           ,
           in
           a
           Luxury
           that
           even
           surpasses
           that
           of
           brute
           Beasts
           .
           I
           might
           enlarge
           on
           this
           Subject
           ,
           but
           that
           't
           is
           more
           expedient
           to
           resume
           our
           former
           Discourse
           ,
           and
           to
           give
           a
           farther
           Account
           of
           our
           Misfortunes
           .
        
         
           On
           the
           5th
           .
           Instant
           ,
           the
           Winds
           being
           still
           contrary
           ,
           we
           prepar'd
           to
           return
           to
           the
           Northern
           Sea
           ,
           as
           it
           was
           
           determin'd
           two
           Days
           before
           .
           But
           we
           were
           scarce
           under
           sail
           ,
           when
           the
           Winds
           chang'd
           as
           it
           were
           on
           purpose
           to
           deceive
           us
           ,
           and
           induc'd
           us
           to
           make
           another
           Attempt
           ,
           which
           was
           not
           only
           fruitless
           ,
           but
           wou'd
           have
           certainly
           proved
           our
           Ruine
           ,
           if
           we
           had
           not
           been
           apparently
           protected
           by
           Divine
           Providence
           in
           a
           very
           extraordinary
           manner
           .
           We
           had
           not
           made
           a
           League
           ,
           when
           these
           favourable
           Winds
           terminated
           in
           a
           great
           Calm
           ,
           and
           the
           Tides
           (
           the
           Course
           of
           which
           we
           cou'd
           not
           discern
           from
           Cape
           Froward
           )
           drove
           us
           on
           the
           Coasts
           ,
           insomuch
           that
           four
           Shallops
           were
           not
           able
           to
           get
           us
           clear
           of
           the
           Shore
           .
           We
           let
           fall
           a
           large
           Anchor
           ,
           which
           very
           much
           abated
           the
           force
           of
           the
           Current
           ,
           but
           could
           not
           hinder
           us
           from
           running
           a-float
           ,
           by
           reason
           that
           the
           bottom
           not
           being
           firm
           ,
           cou'd
           not
           hold
           it
           .
           We
           might
           have
           leapt
           off
           from
           the
           Poop
           ashore
           ,
           and
           judg'd
           the
           Danger
           to
           be
           unavoidable
           ,
           
           when
           a
           gentle
           Breeze
           happily
           blew
           fresh
           from
           the
           North
           ,
           and
           set
           us
           at
           Liberty
           ;
           whereas
           if
           any
           other
           Wind
           had
           arose
           ,
           we
           had
           certainly
           perish'd
           .
           In
           the
           mean
           while
           ,
           the
           
             Sun
             of
             Africa
          
           and
           the
           Glutton
           Frigate
           were
           very
           near
           running
           the
           same
           Hazard
           .
        
         
         
           We
           lay
           before
           the
           Cape
           during
           the
           whole
           Night
           ,
           and
           at
           break
           of
           Day
           ,
           we
           set
           sail
           again
           ,
           but
           the
           Winds
           being
           contrary
           ,
           we
           were
           forc'd
           to
           spend
           the
           next
           Night
           in
           the
           like
           manner
           ,
           before
           Cape
           Froward
           .
        
         
           On
           the
           7th
           .
           
           at
           break
           of
           Day
           ,
           the
           Winds
           blowing
           fresh
           again
           from
           the
           North-East
           ,
           we
           made
           our
           last
           Effort
           ,
           and
           doubl'd
           Cape
           Froward
           ,
           but
           to
           no
           purpose
           .
           However
           we
           did
           not
           forbear
           to
           put
           out
           to
           Sea
           ,
           and
           on
           the
           11th
           .
           at
           six
           a-clock
           in
           the
           Evening
           ,
           having
           pass'd
           between
           
             Terra
             de
             Fuogo
          
           and
           the
           Shelves
           that
           lie
           at
           the
           Mouth
           of
           the
           Streight
           ,
           we
           re-enter'd
           the
           Northern
           Sea
           ,
           and
           steer'd
           our
           Course
           directly
           for
           
             La
             Isla
             Grande
          
           .
        
         
           On
           the
           16th
           .
           at
           break
           of
           Day
           ,
           we
           were
           separated
           from
           the
           
             Sun
             of
             Africa
          
           and
           the
           Seditious
           Frigat
           ,
           by
           the
           means
           of
           a
           great
           Fog
           ,
           which
           hinder'd
           'em
           from
           hearing
           the
           Signals
           that
           we
           gave
           to
           tack
           about
           .
        
         
           On
           the
           17th
           .
           and
           18th
           .
           we
           had
           foul
           Weather
           ,
           and
           the
           Sea
           ran
           very
           high
           .
        
         
           On
           the
           26th
           .
           the
           Weather
           was
           very
           foggy
           ,
           and
           the
           Winds
           were
           so
           boisterous
           ,
           that
           we
           were
           oblig'd
           to
           take
           down
           the
           Mizzen-Mast
           :
           The
           Waves
           
           swell'd
           extremely
           ,
           and
           we
           were
           beset
           on
           all
           sides
           as
           it
           were
           with
           Mountains
           of
           foaming
           Billows
           ;
           insomuch
           that
           in
           the
           Evening
           we
           lost
           one
           of
           our
           Mariners
           ,
           who
           fell
           into
           the
           Sea
           ,
           as
           he
           was
           coming
           down
           from
           the
           Top-Mast
           .
        
         
           On
           the
           27th
           .
           our
           Pilots
           sail'd
           a-cross
           the
           River
           
             de
             la
             Plata
          
           ,
           at
           the
           distance
           of
           60
           Leagues
           from
           the
           Land
           ,
           and
           on
           the
           29th
           .
           we
           had
           a
           great
           deal
           of
           foul
           Weather
           .
        
         
           The
           Winds
           were
           very
           favourable
           to
           us
           ,
           
           till
           the
           9th
           .
           of
           the
           next
           Month
           ;
           but
           we
           did
           not
           take
           a
           provident
           Care
           to
           sail
           along
           the
           Coasts
           ,
           which
           we
           could
           not
           discover
           till
           within
           20
           Leagues
           to
           the
           North
           of
           the
           Islands
           of
           St.
           Ann.
           
        
         
           On
           the
           12th
           .
           we
           cast
           Anchor
           in
           a
           Road
           very
           full
           of
           Fish
           ,
           where
           we
           took
           a
           great
           quantity
           of
           fine
           ones
           ,
           and
           among
           others
           ,
           divers
           Sea-Porcupines
           ,
           
           so
           called
           ,
           because
           they
           are
           actually
           armed
           with
           sharp-pointed
           Bristles
           ,
           as
           the
           Porcupine
           or
           Hedg-hog
           ,
           which
           they
           prick
           up
           when
           pursued
           by
           other
           Fishes
           .
        
         
           On
           the
           13th
           .
           at
           nine
           a-clock
           in
           the
           Evening
           ,
           we
           made
           ready
           to
           set
           Sail
           ;
           but
           on
           the
           14th
           .
           and
           15th
           .
           the
           Winds
           were
           very
           variable
           .
        
         
           
             P.
             88
          
           
             A
             Sea
             Porcupine
             taken
             on
             the
             Coast
             of
             Brasil
             ▪
          
        
         
         
         
           On
           the
           16th
           .
           we
           discover'd
           Cape
           Frie
           ,
           but
           were
           not
           able
           to
           double
           it
           ,
           because
           there
           was
           very
           little
           Wind
           stirring
           .
           About
           eight
           a-clock
           in
           the
           Evening
           ,
           the
           Sky
           being
           very
           serene
           ,
           we
           discern'd
           the
           Moon
           to
           be
           in
           an
           Eclipse
           ,
           that
           continu'd
           almost
           for
           the
           space
           of
           two
           Hours
           ,
           and
           which
           indeed
           was
           not
           foreseen
           by
           us
           ,
           in
           regard
           that
           we
           did
           not
           meet
           with
           any
           Almanacks
           in
           the
           Straight
           of
           Magellan
           ,
           where
           the
           Inhabitants
           ,
           although
           great
           Star-gazers
           ,
           do
           not
           reap
           the
           Fruits
           of
           their
           Observations
           .
           About
           two
           a-clock
           in
           the
           Morning
           ,
           we
           descry'd
           a
           Vessel
           under
           the
           Wind
           ,
           and
           some
           gave
           it
           out
           that
           there
           were
           two
           :
           Whereupon
           we
           prepar'd
           our
           Batteries
           ,
           and
           kept
           the
           Weather-gage
           during
           the
           whole
           Night
           .
           At
           break
           of
           Day
           ,
           we
           perceiv'd
           it
           to
           be
           a
           Portuguese
           Bark
           ,
           which
           a
           Storm
           had
           driven
           from
           the
           Mouth
           of
           the
           River
           Janëiro
           :
           The
           Mariners
           belonging
           to
           this
           .
           Vessel
           inform'd
           us
           ,
           that
           the
           Fleet
           was
           arriv'd
           ,
           and
           that
           the
           Governor
           was
           chang'd
           ,
           but
           that
           he
           heard
           no
           News
           of
           our
           Ships
           .
           We
           freely
           bestow'd
           on
           them
           two
           Barrels
           of
           Water
           ,
           of
           which
           they
           were
           destitute
           two
           Days
           ,
           and
           were
           
           not
           able
           to
           make
           Land
           ,
           to
           take
           in
           any
           .
        
         
           On
           the
           19th
           .
           we
           doubl'd
           Cape
           Frie
           ,
           and
           on
           the
           20th
           .
           we
           cast
           Anchor
           within
           seven
           Leagues
           of
           Rio-Janeiro
           ;
           but
           we
           had
           not
           so
           much
           as
           one
           blast
           of
           Wind
           ,
           and
           the
           Currents
           were
           contrary
           .
           There
           we
           saw
           Two
           of
           those
           Pillars
           of
           Water
           that
           arise
           out
           of
           the
           Sea
           ,
           and
           which
           are
           commonly
           call'd
           Spouts
           :
           When
           they
           draw
           near
           ,
           't
           is
           customary
           to
           discharge
           several
           Cannon-shot
           ,
           to
           disperse
           them
           ,
           and
           by
           that
           means
           the
           danger
           is
           often
           escap'd
           .
        
         
           On
           the
           21st
           .
           we
           put
           out
           to
           Sea
           ,
           and
           the
           next
           Day
           we
           cast
           Anchor
           ,
           within
           two
           Leagues
           of
           the
           Coast
           ,
           before
           the
           Mouth
           of
           the
           River
           ,
           but
           we
           determin'd
           not
           to
           enter
           it
           ,
           by
           reason
           that
           our
           Place
           of
           Meeting
           was
           appointed
           to
           be
           at
           
             La
             Isla
             Grande
          
           .
        
         
           On
           the
           24th
           .
           we
           prepar'd
           to
           set
           Sail
           again
           ,
           when
           the
           Rocks
           cut
           our
           Cable
           ,
           and
           sav'd
           us
           the
           trouble
           of
           weighing
           Anchor
           ;
           and
           so
           little
           Wind
           was
           stirring
           in
           the
           Night
           ,
           that
           at
           break
           of
           Day
           we
           found
           our selves
           driven
           by
           the
           Currents
           under
           Cape
           Frie
           ,
           which
           made
           us
           take
           a
           Resolution
           to
           stand
           in
           for
           the
           Islands
           of
           St.
           Ann
           ,
           to
           wait
           for
           a
           fair
           Wind
           ,
           as
           also
           to
           take
           in
           fresh
           Water
           
           and
           Provisions
           ,
           of
           which
           we
           had
           a
           very
           short
           Allowance
           .
           Thus
           we
           cast
           Anchor
           on
           the
           26th
           .
           Instant
           at
           Noon
           ,
           and
           found
           the
           Island
           as
           full
           of
           Fowl
           as
           at
           our
           first
           Arrival
           .
        
         
           On
           the
           27th
           .
           we
           sent
           our
           Boat
           ashore
           to
           take
           in
           Provisions
           ,
           and
           to
           get
           Information
           about
           our
           Vessels
           :
           We
           purchas'd
           six
           Oxen
           ,
           two
           Hoggs
           ,
           and
           some
           Pullets
           ,
           but
           not
           without
           a
           great
           deal
           of
           Difficulty
           ,
           by
           reason
           that
           all
           the
           Provisions
           were
           transported
           to
           
             Rio
             Janeiro
          
           ,
           for
           the
           use
           of
           the
           Fleet
           :
           We
           were
           also
           inform'd
           ,
           that
           our
           Ships
           had
           enter'd
           that
           River
           twenty
           Days
           ago
           .
        
         
           On
           the
           29th
           .
           at
           five
           a-clock
           in
           the
           Evening
           ,
           we
           set
           Sail
           with
           a
           favourable
           Wind
           ,
           and
           order'd
           the
           Pink
           to
           carry
           the
           Lanthorn
           :
           We
           follow'd
           her
           for
           some
           time
           ,
           but
           forasmuch
           as
           she
           sail'd
           too
           near
           the
           Coast
           ,
           and
           the
           Night
           was
           dark
           ,
           we
           left
           her
           to
           continue
           her
           Course
           ,
           and
           stood
           somewhat
           farther
           out
           to
           Sea.
           
        
         
           On
           the
           30th
           .
           at
           break
           of
           Day
           ,
           we
           weather'd
           Cape
           Frie
           ,
           and
           found
           the
           Winds
           and
           Currents
           contrary
           as
           before
           .
           At
           the
           same
           time
           ,
           we
           discern'd
           the
           Pink
           four
           large
           Leagues
           to
           the
           Windward
           of
           us
           ;
           nevertheless
           (
           as
           
           we
           were
           afterwards
           inform'd
           )
           she
           continu'd
           at
           Sea
           eight
           Days
           longer
           ,
           before
           she
           could
           find
           means
           to
           enter
           the
           River
           .
        
         
           The
           rest
           of
           that
           Day
           ,
           and
           the
           next
           ,
           we
           had
           but
           little
           Wind
           ,
           and
           that
           too
           was
           contrary
           ;
           insomuch
           that
           after
           divers
           fruitless
           Attempts
           ,
           Monsieur
           
             de
             Gennes
          
           judg'd
           ,
           that
           for
           the
           future
           we
           ought
           not
           to
           be
           obstinately
           resolv'd
           to
           pursue
           our
           intended
           Course
           ,
           lest
           we
           should
           be
           reduc'd
           to
           the
           greatest
           Extremity
           ;
           but
           that
           't
           was
           more
           expedient
           to
           stand
           in
           for
           the
           Bay
           of
           All-Saints
           ;
           since
           by
           sailing
           thither
           ,
           we
           should
           get
           so
           far
           onward
           in
           our
           Way
           ,
           and
           we
           should
           certainly
           meet
           with
           plenty
           of
           Provisions
           in
           that
           Place
           .
        
         
           Therefore
           we
           cast
           Anchor
           June
           the
           first
           ,
           
           at
           Four
           a-clock
           in
           the
           Evening
           ,
           before
           the
           Islands
           of
           St.
           Ann
           ,
           to
           get
           some
           Recruits
           ,
           having
           on
           board
           Victuals
           sufficient
           only
           to
           serve
           for
           eight
           Days
           at
           most
           ;
           and
           forasmuch
           as
           it
           was
           requisite
           to
           give
           notice
           to
           our
           Vessels
           of
           the
           Course
           that
           we
           had
           determin'd
           to
           steer
           ,
           we
           sent
           an
           Officer
           a-shore
           to
           desire
           a
           Pass-port
           of
           the
           Commander
           of
           the
           Town
           ,
           to
           go
           to
           Rio-Janeiro
           by
           Land
           ,
           to
           acquaint
           them
           with
           our
           Design
           :
           
           the
           Officer
           who
           had
           received
           Orders
           to
           return
           the
           same
           Evening
           ,
           not
           appearing
           by
           next
           Day
           Noon
           ;
           Monsieur
           
             de
             Gennes
          
           believing
           some
           Misfortune
           had
           befallen
           him
           ,
           sent
           out
           a
           Shallop
           armed
           with
           two
           small
           Guns
           ,
           to
           get
           Intelligence
           ,
           which
           return'd
           to
           us
           again
           about
           Five
           in
           the
           Evening
           :
           And
           the
           Men
           reported
           ,
           That
           they
           had
           seen
           the
           Canoe
           in
           the
           River
           ,
           where
           there
           were
           Dwelling-places
           ;
           and
           that
           the
           Officer
           who
           appeared
           on
           Shoar
           ,
           came
           up
           to
           the
           point
           of
           Land
           there
           ,
           in
           Order
           to
           give
           them
           Notice
           to
           return
           ,
           because
           it
           was
           shallow
           Water
           ,
           and
           that
           he
           had
           passed
           over
           a
           Ridge
           of
           Rocks
           where
           the
           Surge
           of
           the
           Sea
           was
           very
           frightful
           ;
           and
           that
           this
           was
           the
           Reason
           ,
           together
           with
           his
           tarrying
           for
           three
           Beefs
           they
           were
           in
           quest
           of
           for
           us
           ,
           that
           detained
           our
           Canoe
           from
           returning
           to
           us
           .
        
         
           The
           Shallop
           went
           back
           next
           Day
           ,
           about
           ten
           of
           the
           Clock
           ,
           and
           as
           she
           was
           ready
           to
           enter
           in
           ,
           the
           Officer
           who
           had
           sent
           her
           back
           the
           Day
           before
           ,
           gave
           them
           a
           Signal
           to
           come
           to
           an
           Anchor
           ,
           and
           to
           wait
           till
           the
           Tide
           came
           in
           .
           They
           continued
           in
           that
           Posture
           till
           two
           a
           Clock
           in
           the
           Afternoon
           ;
           when
           the
           Officer
           that
           commanded
           ,
           grown
           quite
           
           weary
           with
           staying
           ,
           made
           use
           both
           of
           his
           Sails
           and
           Oars
           ,
           and
           put
           forwards
           ;
           and
           that
           in
           spight
           of
           the
           Advice
           of
           the
           Master
           ,
           and
           of
           all
           the
           Signals
           that
           could
           be
           made
           from
           the
           Shoar
           to
           the
           contrary
           :
           But
           he
           was
           no
           sooner
           incommoded
           with
           the
           terrible
           Rocks
           aforementioned
           ,
           than
           that
           he
           began
           to
           repent
           (
           tho'
           it
           was
           now
           too
           late
           )
           of
           his
           Rashness
           .
           After
           they
           had
           bore
           divers
           rude
           Attacks
           of
           the
           Sea
           ,
           a
           Wave
           brought
           all
           their
           Oars
           on
           one
           side
           ,
           and
           this
           Wave
           was
           followed
           by
           another
           ,
           that
           opened
           the
           Shallop
           in
           the
           very
           middle
           ,
           and
           drowned
           the
           Commander
           ,
           
           with
           seven
           Seamen
           more
           ;
           but
           the
           Master
           ,
           together
           with
           the
           Gunner
           and
           seven
           other
           Mariners
           ,
           saved
           themselves
           ,
           and
           remained
           on
           Shoar
           to
           seek
           out
           their
           Comrades
           Bodies
           .
        
         
           
             p.
             99
          
           
             
               A
               CAPIVARD
               or
               Water
               Hog
            
             at
             the
             foot
             of
             a
             Bananier
             .
          
        
         
           On
           the
           4th
           we
           sung
           Mass
           for
           the
           dead
           ,
           and
           discharged
           three
           Pieces
           of
           Cannon
           for
           the
           Officer
           that
           had
           been
           drowned
           ,
           whose
           Name
           was
           Salior
           ,
           born
           at
           Paris
           ,
           and
           a
           young
           Gentleman
           whose
           Loss
           deserved
           to
           be
           regretted
           .
           This
           being
           over
           ,
           the
           Canoe
           was
           sent
           to
           shoar
           again
           ,
           to
           bring
           back
           those
           Seamen
           that
           had
           the
           Luck
           to
           escape
           drowning
           ;
           she
           returned
           the
           same
           Day
           ,
           and
           brought
           along
           with
           her
           two
           Beefs
           more
           :
           The
           Bodies
           of
           our
           drowned
           Friends
           could
           not
           be
           found
           ,
           and
           the
           Portuguese
           informing
           us
           that
           the
           Place
           where
           they
           were
           lost
           were
           full
           of
           Requins
           ,
           it
           's
           not
           to
           be
           doubted
           but
           they
           were
           devoured
           by
           them
           .
        
         
           Next
           Day
           ,
           which
           was
           the
           sixth
           ,
           about
           three
           in
           the
           Morning
           ,
           we
           made
           
           ready
           to
           sail
           for
           the
           Bay
           of
           All-Saints
           ,
           without
           giving
           Information
           of
           the
           same
           to
           the
           other
           Vessels
           we
           had
           with
           us
           ;
           but
           seeing
           Monsieur
           
             de
             Gennes
          
           had
           spoken
           of
           it
           before
           at
           
             la
             Gloutonne
          
           ,
           we
           had
           some
           sort
           of
           reason
           to
           hope
           that
           they
           would
           rejoin
           us
           ,
           at
           least
           at
           Cayenne
           .
        
         
           On
           the
           7th
           and
           8th
           we
           steer'd
           a
           wide
           Course
           ,
           that
           we
           might
           put
           by
           the
           Abralhes
           ,
           which
           are
           certain
           Islands
           and
           heaps
           of
           Rocks
           that
           run
           out
           five
           and
           forty
           Leagues
           into
           the
           Sea
           ,
           and
           on
           which
           divers
           Ships
           have
           perished
           .
           The
           Portuguese
           ,
           who
           are
           well
           acquainted
           with
           them
           ,
           make
           no
           great
           Difficulty
           of
           sailing
           through
           the
           midst
           of
           them
           ;
           and
           so
           save
           a
           large
           Compass
           that
           others
           are
           oblig'd
           to
           make
           ,
           to
           avoid
           them
           .
           We
           saw
           a
           great
           Whale
           the
           Day
           following
           ,
           that
           went
           round
           our
           Ship
           several
           times
           ,
           and
           twice
           under
           it
           .
        
         
           We
           were
           on
           the
           10th
           ,
           11th
           ,
           and
           12th
           .
           troubled
           with
           excessive
           Heats
           ,
           and
           had
           but
           very
           little
           Wind
           ;
           at
           what
           time
           we
           catch'd
           a
           great
           Number
           of
           Requins
           ,
           which
           was
           a
           considerable
           help
           to
           lengthen
           out
           our
           Provisions
           :
           But
           tho'
           this
           Fish
           appears
           to
           be
           firm
           Flesh
           enough
           ,
           yet
           it
           is
           so
           insipid
           that
           several
           of
           our
           Men
           were
           injured
           with
           the
           eating
           of
           it
           .
           
           It
           's
           thick
           ,
           and
           five
           or
           six
           Foot
           long
           ,
           a
           great
           Lover
           of
           Man's
           Flesh
           ,
           has
           a
           large
           Mouth
           ,
           and
           therein
           five
           rows
           of
           very
           sharp
           Teeth
           :
           He
           turns
           himself
           upon
           his
           back
           to
           catch
           his
           Prey
           ,
           and
           has
           two
           or
           three
           small
           Fishes
           near
           him
           that
           are
           his
           Pilots
           ,
           and
           never
           forsake
           him
           ,
           but
           serve
           to
           secure
           him
           from
           being
           surprized
           by
           the
           Whale
           .
        
         
           There
           is
           a
           sort
           of
           Fish
           which
           they
           call
           Sucet
           ,
           that
           is
           commonly
           fastened
           to
           the
           Requin
           ,
           and
           this
           has
           given
           many
           Men
           occasion
           to
           believe
           that
           he
           is
           his
           Pilot
           ;
           but
           herein
           they
           are
           mistaken
           ,
           for
           this
           small
           Fish
           never
           closes
           with
           the
           other
           ,
           but
           when
           he
           finds
           himself
           pursued
           ;
           and
           then
           taking
           half
           a
           turn
           round
           ,
           he
           strikes
           the
           Requin
           over
           the
           Head
           ,
           and
           fixes
           himself
           so
           fast
           to
           the
           other
           ,
           that
           it
           's
           impossible
           for
           him
           to
           make
           him
           let
           go
           his
           hold
           ;
           insomuch
           ,
           that
           this
           little
           Fish
           makes
           himself
           to
           be
           convoyed
           with
           this
           pretty
           sort
           of
           Guard
           whithersoever
           he
           pleases
           :
           On
           the
           three
           following
           Days
           ,
           viz.
           the
           13th
           ,
           14th
           ,
           and
           15th
           ,
           we
           were
           incommoded
           with
           contrary
           Winds
           ;
           but
           on
           the
           17th
           we
           kept
           about
           fifteen
           Leagues
           off
           of
           the
           Abralhes
           and
           sailed
           on
           ,
           and
           next
           Day
           passed
           over
           the
           Shallows
           of
           St.
           Antony
           .
        
         
         
           We
           made
           Land
           the
           Nineteenth
           ,
           
           which
           our
           Pilots
           computed
           at
           above
           thirty
           Leagues
           distance
           ;
           and
           this
           made
           us
           judge
           ,
           That
           the
           Sea
           Currents
           moved
           to
           the
           North
           ,
           as
           the
           Portuguese
           had
           assured
           us
           ,
           who
           take
           it
           for
           a
           Maxim
           ,
           that
           the
           Currents
           on
           the
           Coast
           of
           Brasil
           follow
           the
           Course
           of
           the
           Sun
           ;
           that
           when
           the
           same
           is
           in
           the
           Northern
           Hemisphere
           ,
           they
           run
           to
           the
           Northward
           ,
           but
           when
           in
           the
           Southern
           ,
           to
           the
           Southward
           .
           On
           the
           Nineteenth
           at
           Night
           ,
           having
           got
           within
           six
           Leagues
           of
           Cape
           St.
           Antony
           ,
           we
           brought
           to
           ,
           and
           by
           break
           of
           Day
           ,
           we
           saw
           about
           two
           Leagues
           to
           the
           Windward
           of
           us
           ,
           a
           Ship
           that
           steered
           the
           same
           Course
           as
           we
           did
           ;
           whereupon
           we
           slackned
           our
           sail
           to
           let
           her
           come
           up
           ,
           and
           believing
           it
           might
           have
           been
           one
           of
           our
           own
           Fleet
           ,
           we
           gave
           her
           a
           Signal
           whereby
           to
           know
           us
           ,
           but
           she
           returned
           us
           no
           Answer
           ,
           and
           proved
           to
           be
           a
           Portuguese
           Ship
           ,
           that
           was
           making
           the
           best
           of
           her
           way
           for
           the
           Bay
           of
           All-Saints
           as
           well
           as
           we
           :
           About
           Noon
           we
           made
           the
           Cape
           of
           St.
           Antony
           ,
           
           and
           saw
           all
           along
           the
           Coast
           a
           great
           Number
           of
           Barks
           ,
           and
           the
           Negro's
           Piperies
           ,
           as
           they
           are
           called
           ,
           being
           no
           other
           than
           three
           or
           four
           pieces
           of
           Wood
           
           made
           fast
           together
           ,
           whereon
           two
           Men
           go
           out
           a
           fishing
           to
           the
           extent
           of
           two
           Leagues
           :
           Some
           of
           them
           we
           boarded
           ,
           but
           we
           could
           never
           bring
           them
           to
           conduct
           us
           to
           the
           Road
           ,
           they
           alledging
           ,
           they
           were
           forbid
           to
           do
           it
           ;
           but
           I
           believe
           it
           was
           because
           they
           would
           not
           leave
           their
           fishing
           .
        
         
           But
           it
           fortunately
           happen'd
           ,
           that
           we
           descry'd
           two
           sorts
           of
           small
           Tartanes
           ,
           that
           were
           for
           making
           the
           best
           of
           their
           way
           into
           the
           Bay
           as
           well
           as
           we
           ;
           them
           we
           waited
           for
           ,
           and
           required
           them
           to
           grant
           us
           a
           Pilot
           for
           our
           Money
           ;
           upon
           which
           ,
           one
           of
           the
           Masters
           of
           these
           Tartanes
           ,
           offered
           himself
           to
           conduct
           us
           to
           the
           Place
           where
           we
           were
           to
           Anchor
           ,
           and
           this
           he
           performed
           with
           all
           imaginable
           Civility
           :
           We
           drew
           up
           in
           Order
           ,
           within
           Cannon
           Shot
           of
           Cape
           St.
           Antony
           ,
           and
           about
           five
           in
           the
           Evening
           cast
           Anchor
           within
           a
           small
           League
           of
           the
           Town
           ,
           that
           we
           might
           not
           embarrass
           our selves
           with
           the
           Portuguese
           Fleet
           we
           found
           there
           ,
           consisting
           of
           between
           forty
           and
           fifty
           Sail
           ,
           all
           laden
           and
           ready
           every
           minute
           to
           sail
           away
           .
        
         
           As
           soon
           as
           we
           were
           come
           to
           an
           Anchor
           ,
           there
           came
           a
           Lieutenant
           from
           the
           Admiral
           ,
           to
           require
           us
           to
           salute
           him
           ;
           
           but
           Monsieur
           
             de
             Gennes
          
           made
           him
           answer
           ,
           the
           King
           had
           given
           him
           Orders
           not
           to
           salute
           any
           ,
           without
           they
           received
           Gun
           for
           Gun
           ;
           and
           that
           he
           would
           send
           his
           next
           Captain
           ,
           to
           settle
           that
           Affair
           with
           the
           Governour
           :
           The
           Lieutenant
           hereupon
           ,
           sent
           to
           see
           for
           his
           Shallop
           ,
           in
           order
           to
           assist
           us
           ;
           and
           after
           a
           thousand
           tenders
           of
           his
           Service
           to
           us
           ,
           he
           accompanied
           the
           Chevalier
           
             de
             Fontenay
          
           to
           wait
           upon
           the
           Governour
           ,
           with
           whom
           he
           had
           no
           long
           Dispute
           ,
           for
           they
           quickly
           agreed
           not
           to
           salute
           one
           another
           at
           all
           ,
           which
           made
           most
           of
           the
           Portuguese
           to
           murmur
           ,
           and
           concernedly
           to
           say
           ,
           That
           it
           was
           not
           to
           be
           endured
           ,
           that
           a
           Frenchman
           should
           pass
           under
           their
           Forts
           without
           saluting
           them
           ,
           and
           yet
           not
           be
           called
           to
           an
           Account
           for
           it
           :
           But
           't
           is
           well
           known
           ,
           they
           are
           no
           otherwise
           brave
           than
           upon
           their
           own
           Dunghills
           ;
           and
           that
           they
           had
           rather
           ,
           upon
           Occasion
           ,
           have
           Recourse
           to
           their
           Beads
           than
           to
           their
           Courage
           .
        
         
           The
           Morrow
           being
           
             The
             Feast
             of
             God
          
           ,
           Monsieur
           
             de
             Gennes
          
           ,
           accompanied
           with
           several
           other
           Officers
           ,
           went
           to
           wait
           upon
           the
           Governour
           and
           the
           Intendant
           ,
           who
           shew'd
           him
           abundance
           of
           Civilities
           :
           The
           Governour
           's
           Name
           was
           
             Don
             John
             
             de
             Lancastre
          
           ,
           one
           of
           the
           Principal
           Men
           of
           the
           Kingdom
           ,
           and
           Vice-Roy
           of
           Brasil
           :
           Then
           they
           went
           to
           see
           the
           Procession
           of
           the
           Holy
           Sacrament
           ,
           
           which
           is
           as
           remarkable
           in
           that
           Town
           ,
           for
           the
           vast
           Number
           of
           Crosses
           ,
           Shrines
           ,
           rich
           Ornaments
           ,
           armed
           Troops
           ,
           Companies
           ,
           Fraternities
           ,
           and
           Religious
           Orders
           ;
           as
           't
           is
           ridiculous
           for
           the
           Masquerades
           ,
           Musical
           Instruments
           ,
           and
           Dancers
           that
           attend
           thereat
           ,
           and
           who
           by
           their
           wanton
           Postures
           ,
           invert
           the
           end
           of
           this
           Holy
           Ceremony
           .
           The
           Procession
           was
           no
           sooner
           over
           ,
           but
           our
           Gentlemen
           went
           to
           hear
           Mass
           ,
           to
           the
           Convent
           of
           the
           Reverend
           Fathers
           the
           Jesuits
           ;
           where
           they
           were
           received
           by
           some
           Fathers
           of
           the
           French
           Nation
           very
           kindly
           ,
           who
           confirmed
           unto
           them
           the
           Loss
           of
           Namur
           ,
           and
           the
           Hopes
           there
           were
           of
           a
           Peace
           with
           Savoy
           ;
           from
           them
           they
           went
           to
           dine
           with
           the
           French
           Consul
           ,
           and
           heard
           a
           great
           deal
           more
           News
           there
           also
           .
        
         
           We
           were
           also
           informed
           by
           a
           Friar
           newly
           come
           from
           Goa
           ,
           
           that
           before
           he
           had
           left
           that
           Port
           ,
           he
           had
           seen
           a
           French
           Ship
           that
           put
           in
           there
           ,
           after
           having
           fought
           three
           Arabian
           Vessels
           ,
           by
           whom
           she
           had
           been
           very
           rudely
           handled
           .
           When
           these
           mischievous
           Pirates
           board
           any
           Ship
           ,
           
           they
           do
           ,
           in
           order
           to
           blind
           their
           Enemies
           ,
           make
           use
           of
           a
           sort
           of
           wrought
           Lime
           ,
           which
           being
           squashed
           down
           upon
           the
           Bridge
           they
           use
           upon
           that
           Occasion
           ,
           has
           a
           most
           terrible
           Effect
           .
        
         
           Here
           we
           came
           to
           know
           also
           of
           the
           Loss
           of
           the
           Famous
           Montauban
           ,
           
           of
           whom
           the
           Free-booters
           made
           so
           much
           Noise
           at
           Bourdeaux
           .
           He
           met
           with
           a
           large
           English
           Ship
           on
           the
           Coast
           of
           Guinea
           ,
           whom
           he
           boarded
           ,
           and
           took
           her
           by
           main
           Force
           ;
           but
           the
           English
           Commander
           being
           enraged
           that
           he
           should
           be
           taken
           by
           a
           Free-booter
           ,
           he
           set
           the
           Powder
           on
           fire
           ,
           and
           blew
           up
           his
           own
           Ship
           and
           that
           of
           
           Montauban's
           ;
           who
           with
           a
           dozen
           or
           fifteen
           of
           his
           own
           Men
           ,
           threw
           himself
           into
           the
           Sea
           ,
           where
           they
           floated
           upon
           Masts
           for
           five
           Days
           and
           five
           Nights
           ,
           and
           at
           last
           got
           a-shoar
           half
           dead
           in
           the
           King
           of
           the
           Negro's
           Country
           ,
           where
           they
           were
           kindly
           received
           ,
           upon
           the
           account
           of
           an
           old
           Portuguese
           that
           Traded
           upon
           that
           Coast
           ,
           and
           who
           took
           Compassion
           on
           those
           miserable
           Wretches
           :
           When
           they
           had
           been
           there
           about
           five
           or
           six
           Months
           ,
           a
           Dutch
           Ship
           bound
           for
           Jamaica
           passed
           by
           that
           way
           ,
           which
           took
           Montauban
           and
           seven
           or
           eight
           of
           his
           Followers
           ,
           who
           promised
           
           to
           pay
           for
           their
           Passage
           ,
           on
           board
           him
           ;
           while
           the
           other
           six
           ,
           who
           could
           not
           find
           the
           same
           Favour
           at
           the
           
           Dutch-man's
           hands
           ,
           got
           a
           Passage
           in
           a
           Portuguese
           Flute
           ,
           that
           carried
           Negro's
           to
           All-Saints
           Bay
           ,
           from
           whence
           we
           gave
           them
           free
           Transportation
           to
           Martenico
           .
        
         
           On
           the
           4th
           of
           July
           ,
           
           the
           Admiral
           with
           divers
           Merchant
           Ships
           ,
           anchored
           in
           the
           Road
           ;
           and
           on
           the
           8th
           ,
           the
           whole
           Fleet
           made
           ready
           to
           sail
           away
           for
           Lisbon
           ,
           consisting
           in
           all
           of
           45
           Ships
           ,
           laden
           with
           Sugar
           ,
           Tobacco
           ,
           Cotton
           ,
           Fish
           ,
           Oyl
           and
           Skins
           ;
           they
           were
           almost
           all
           of
           them
           mounted
           from
           twelve
           to
           thirty
           six
           pieces
           of
           Cannon
           ,
           but
           the
           Admiral
           and
           Vice-Admiral
           that
           were
           Men
           of
           War
           ,
           and
           out
           upon
           the
           King's
           Account
           ,
           carried
           one
           of
           them
           sixty
           Guns
           ,
           and
           the
           other
           no
           less
           than
           seventy
           two
           .
        
         
           We
           drew
           nearer
           to
           the
           City
           on
           the
           9th
           ,
           having
           hitherto
           taken
           in
           no
           Provisions
           ;
           for
           the
           Portuguese
           Fleet
           had
           made
           it
           excessive
           dear
           ,
           but
           now
           we
           bought
           some
           European
           Meal
           ,
           Magniot
           ,
           and
           Rice
           ;
           and
           the
           Intendant
           was
           so
           civil
           ,
           as
           to
           let
           us
           have
           the
           Use
           of
           the
           King's
           Magazine
           ,
           to
           provide
           Salt
           to
           season
           our
           Provision
           with
           :
           And
           that
           we
           might
           not
           be
           wanting
           in
           any
           thing
           to
           
           our selves
           that
           was
           necessary
           ;
           we
           began
           also
           to
           build
           us
           a
           Shallop
           instead
           of
           that
           which
           we
           had
           lost
           at
           St.
           
           Anne's
           .
        
         
           All-Saints
           may
           be
           reckoned
           for
           one
           of
           the
           largest
           ,
           
           finest
           ,
           and
           most
           convenient
           Bay
           of
           any
           other
           in
           the
           World
           ,
           being
           capable
           of
           containing
           no
           less
           than
           two
           thousand
           Ships
           ;
           of
           a
           very
           good
           Depth
           ,
           and
           no
           Winds
           to
           be
           feared
           there
           .
           They
           take
           a
           great
           Number
           of
           Whales
           therein
           ,
           build
           very
           fine
           Ships
           ,
           and
           they
           had
           one
           then
           upon
           the
           Stocks
           that
           would
           carry
           sixty
           pieces
           of
           Cannon
           .
        
         
           As
           for
           the
           City
           of
           St.
           Salvador
           ,
           that
           is
           seated
           upon
           this
           Bay
           ,
           it
           's
           large
           ,
           well
           built
           ,
           and
           very
           populous
           ;
           but
           the
           Scituation
           of
           it
           is
           not
           so
           advantagious
           ,
           as
           could
           be
           wished
           .
           It
           's
           high
           and
           low
           ,
           and
           scarce
           one
           straight
           Street
           therein
           ;
           it
           's
           the
           Capital
           City
           of
           Brasil
           ,
           an
           Archiepiscopal
           See
           ,
           and
           the
           Residence
           of
           the
           Vice-Roy
           :
           This
           place
           is
           honoured
           with
           a
           Soveraign
           Council
           ,
           and
           the
           Privilege
           to
           coin
           Money
           ;
           where
           ,
           in
           order
           to
           quicken
           Trade
           ,
           they
           make
           such
           sort
           of
           Pieces
           as
           are
           current
           no-where
           else
           ,
           but
           in
           Brasil
           :
           They
           have
           on
           the
           one
           side
           the
           Arms
           of
           Portugal
           ,
           and
           a
           Cross
           charged
           with
           a
           Spear
           on
           the
           other
           ,
           with
           this
           Inscription
           ,
           
             SVBQ
             .
             SIGN
             .
             STABO
          
           .
        
         
         
           This
           City
           ,
           to
           the
           Seaward
           ,
           is
           defended
           with
           some
           Forts
           ,
           and
           several
           Batteries
           mounted
           with
           Cannon
           ,
           and
           to
           the
           Landward
           ,
           with
           earthen
           Bastions
           ill
           made
           .
           We
           saw
           them
           lay
           the
           Foundation
           of
           a
           Fortress
           ,
           the
           Governour
           had
           ordered
           to
           be
           erected
           about
           half
           a
           Cannon
           shot
           without
           the
           Town
           :
           The
           Dutch
           attempted
           divers
           times
           to
           make
           themselves
           Masters
           of
           this
           Place
           ,
           but
           without
           Success
           ,
           tho'
           they
           have
           taken
           away
           two
           and
           twenty
           Ships
           from
           thence
           at
           one
           clap
           .
        
         
           The
           Inhabitants
           ,
           to
           say
           nothing
           of
           the
           common
           People
           ,
           who
           are
           insolent
           to
           the
           highest
           Degree
           ,
           are
           neat
           ,
           civil
           ,
           and
           honest
           ,
           and
           withal
           rich
           ,
           being
           lovers
           of
           Trade
           ,
           and
           for
           the
           most
           part
           are
           of
           a
           Jewish
           Extract
           ;
           and
           this
           is
           the
           Reason
           ,
           that
           when
           any
           one
           of
           the
           Inhabitants
           is
           about
           to
           make
           one
           of
           his
           Sons
           a
           Divine
           ,
           he
           is
           obliged
           to
           prove
           his
           Ancestors
           were
           Christians
           ,
           as
           the
           Knights
           of
           Malta
           are
           under
           an
           Obligation
           of
           making
           out
           their
           Gentility
           ,
           before
           they
           enter
           into
           the
           Order
           .
           They
           love
           Women
           extreamly
           ,
           and
           spare
           no
           Charges
           for
           the
           setting
           out
           of
           their
           Wives
           ,
           who
           in
           respect
           to
           all
           other
           things
           ,
           have
           Cause
           enough
           to
           complain
           ;
           
           for
           they
           are
           never
           allowed
           to
           see
           any
           Body
           ,
           and
           go
           not
           out
           of
           doors
           at
           any
           other
           time
           but
           on
           Sunday
           early
           in
           the
           Morning
           ,
           to
           go
           to
           Church
           :
           They
           are
           a
           very
           jealous
           People
           ,
           and
           't
           is
           a
           kind
           of
           a
           point
           of
           Honour
           for
           a
           Man
           to
           stab
           his
           Wife
           ,
           when
           he
           can
           convict
           her
           of
           being
           unfaithful
           to
           his
           Bed
           ;
           tho'
           for
           all
           that
           ,
           this
           cannot
           hinder
           many
           of
           them
           from
           finding
           out
           a
           way
           to
           impart
           some
           of
           their
           Favours
           to
           us
           Frenchmen
           ,
           whose
           winning
           and
           free
           Conversation
           they
           are
           mightily
           in
           love
           with
           .
        
         
           As
           the
           Town
           is
           nothing
           throughout
           but
           up's
           and
           downs
           ,
           and
           that
           consequently
           Carriages
           are
           very
           impracticable
           there
           ;
           their
           Slaves
           are
           forced
           to
           perform
           what
           Horses
           should
           otherwise
           do
           ,
           and
           carry
           the
           heaviest
           sort
           of
           Goods
           from
           one
           place
           unto
           another
           :
           And
           't
           is
           also
           for
           the
           same
           Reason
           ,
           that
           a
           thing
           they
           call
           a
           Palanquin
           is
           much
           in
           use
           there
           ;
           it
           's
           nothing
           else
           but
           a
           kind
           of
           a
           Sedan
           ,
           covered
           over
           with
           a
           little
           embroidered
           Canopy
           ,
           and
           carried
           by
           two
           Negro's
           by
           the
           help
           of
           a
           long
           Pole
           ,
           whereunto
           it
           's
           fastned
           at
           both
           ends
           :
           Persons
           of
           Quality
           are
           carried
           therein
           to
           Church
           ,
           to
           make
           their
           Visits
           ,
           and
           also
           into
           the
           Fields
           .
           The
           Houses
           are
           
           high-built
           ,
           and
           most
           of
           them
           of
           Free-stone
           and
           Brick
           ;
           their
           Churches
           are
           very
           sumptuous
           ,
           being
           finely
           gilt
           ,
           full
           of
           Silver-plate
           ,
           Sculptures
           ,
           and
           a
           vast
           Number
           of
           the
           best
           Ornaments
           that
           are
           to
           be
           met
           with
           :
           And
           as
           for
           the
           Cathedral-Church
           there
           ,
           dedicated
           to
           the
           Cross
           ,
           the
           Lamps
           and
           Candlesticks
           are
           so
           high
           ,
           and
           massy
           withal
           ,
           that
           two
           Men
           can
           scarce
           carry
           them
           .
        
         
           They
           have
           several
           sorts
           of
           Religious
           Orders
           amongst
           them
           ;
           as
           
             Franciscans
             ,
             Carmelites
             ,
             Benedictines
             ,
             Jesuits
             ,
          
           and
           divers
           others
           ,
           and
           all
           of
           them
           ,
           except
           a
           little
           Convent
           of
           French
           and
           
             Italian
             Capuchins
          
           ,
           are
           very
           rich
           ;
           and
           more
           particularly
           ,
           the
           Jesuits
           are
           very
           potent
           there
           ,
           they
           being
           no
           less
           than
           190
           in
           Number
           ,
           their
           House
           of
           a
           vast
           Extent
           ,
           and
           their
           Church
           large
           and
           well
           beautified
           :
           Their
           Vestry
           is
           one
           of
           the
           most
           Magnificent
           that
           ever
           was
           seen
           ,
           it
           's
           about
           an
           hundred
           and
           fifty
           Foot
           long
           ,
           and
           of
           proportionable
           Breadth
           :
           They
           have
           three
           Altars
           in
           it
           ,
           two
           whereof
           are
           placed
           at
           the
           two
           ends
           ,
           and
           the
           third
           in
           the
           midst
           of
           that
           part
           that
           joins
           to
           the
           Church
           ;
           and
           upon
           which
           may
           be
           seen
           ,
           every
           Morning
           ,
           above
           twenty
           Calices
           ,
           all
           of
           them
           made
           of
           Gold
           ,
           Vermillion
           ,
           
           and
           Silver
           ;
           on
           each
           side
           of
           this
           last
           Altar
           stand
           two
           great
           Tables
           ,
           that
           are
           of
           that
           length
           ,
           that
           there
           is
           room
           only
           left
           for
           two
           doors
           to
           open
           ,
           by
           which
           they
           enter
           into
           the
           Church
           .
           These
           two
           Tables
           are
           made
           of
           very
           fine
           Wood
           ,
           the
           whole
           Surface
           of
           them
           being
           adorned
           with
           Ivory
           ,
           a
           sort
           of
           Net-work
           ,
           and
           a
           great
           many
           fine
           Water-colour
           Paintings
           ,
           that
           are
           brought
           thither
           from
           Rome
           .
           The
           fourth
           side
           of
           this
           Vestry
           ,
           that
           stands
           to
           the
           Seaward
           ,
           is
           pierced
           with
           divers
           large
           Crosses
           from
           top
           to
           bottom
           ,
           and
           the
           Ceiling
           very
           curiously
           painted
           .
        
         
           The
           Soyl
           here
           is
           flat
           or
           level
           ,
           watered
           with
           fine
           Rivers
           ,
           on
           which
           the
           Portuguese
           inhabit
           for
           above
           fifty
           Leagues
           into
           the
           Country
           ,
           whose
           Dominion
           the
           Indians
           shun
           ,
           and
           for
           that
           end
           retire
           into
           the
           Woods
           ;
           but
           they
           steal
           their
           Cattle
           continually
           ,
           and
           eat
           them
           themselves
           when
           they
           can
           catch
           them
           :
           Our
           Capuchins
           ,
           who
           (
           as
           we
           have
           already
           observed
           )
           have
           a
           Convent
           in
           this
           City
           ,
           have
           travelled
           four
           or
           five
           Years
           among
           these
           poor
           People
           ,
           and
           expos'd
           themselves
           with
           an
           Apostolical
           Zeal
           ,
           to
           all
           sorts
           of
           Fatigues
           ,
           in
           order
           to
           reduce
           them
           from
           their
           Blindness
           and
           Ignorance
           .
        
         
         
           The
           Earth
           produces
           Sugar-Canes
           ,
           Tobacco
           ,
           Cotton
           ,
           Magniot-Roots
           ,
           Rice
           ,
           Maes
           ,
           and
           such
           good
           Pasturage
           ,
           that
           they
           breed
           so
           great
           a
           Number
           of
           Cattle
           ,
           that
           Meat
           is
           sold
           there
           under
           a
           Penny
           a
           Pound
           ;
           but
           the
           Country
           is
           so
           pestered
           with
           Ants
           ,
           that
           they
           are
           constrained
           ,
           for
           the
           preserving
           of
           their
           Fields
           of
           Maes
           and
           Magniot
           ,
           to
           carry
           them
           to
           feed
           upon
           the
           Roads
           :
           And
           those
           who
           are
           curious
           in
           Gardening
           ,
           must
           ,
           by
           the
           help
           of
           several
           small
           Channels
           ,
           form
           an
           Island
           of
           every
           Bed
           ,
           to
           drown
           the
           Ants
           in
           their
           Passage
           over
           .
           They
           have
           Pulse
           and
           Fruits
           there
           in
           abundance
           ,
           such
           as
           they
           call
           the
           
             Banane
             ,
             Ananas
             ,
             Patatoes
             ,
             Ighname
             ,
             Cocoe
             ,
          
           and
           Goyave
           ,
           of
           which
           we
           have
           given
           a
           Description
           already
           .
        
         
           Here
           they
           have
           also
           Cinamon
           ,
           Pepper
           ,
           Ginger
           ,
           the
           Oyl
           of
           Capahu
           ,
           Balsom
           ,
           and
           several
           sorts
           of
           Roots
           that
           have
           a
           wonderful
           Effect
           ;
           and
           amongst
           the
           rest
           ,
           those
           called
           Para-ayra-braba
           ,
           and
           Hypopecovana
           .
           The
           Cinnamon-tree
           is
           about
           the
           Height
           of
           a
           small
           Cherry-tree
           ,
           bearing
           long
           Leaves
           ,
           and
           pointed
           at
           the
           end
           ,
           of
           a
           bright
           green
           Colour
           ;
           the
           Jesuits
           were
           the
           first
           that
           brought
           them
           thither
           out
           of
           Ceylan
           ,
           of
           which
           they
           took
           great
           Care
           :
           But
           in
           some
           Years
           
           they
           grew
           very
           common
           ,
           because
           that
           the
           Birds
           who
           eat
           the
           Fruit
           thereof
           ,
           sow
           the
           Seed
           up
           and
           down
           every-where
           ,
           being
           not
           able
           to
           digest
           it
           .
           The
           Plant
           which
           bears
           the
           Pepper
           ,
           clings
           round
           about
           to
           other
           Trees
           like
           Ivy
           ,
           has
           pretty
           large
           Leaves
           ,
           pointed
           at
           the
           ends
           ,
           and
           of
           a
           deep
           green
           ;
           and
           the
           Fruit
           it
           produces
           are
           small
           Grapes
           ,
           like
           those
           growing
           on
           the
           wild
           Vine
           .
        
         
           The
           Capahu-Oyle
           and
           the
           Balsom
           ,
           come
           from
           the
           Jurisdiction
           of
           
             Spiritu
             Sancto
          
           ;
           those
           they
           draw
           from
           certain
           Trees
           ,
           where
           the
           wild
           Beasts
           by
           rubing
           against
           their
           Bark
           ,
           cure
           themselves
           of
           their
           Wounds
           ;
           for
           let
           them
           take
           off
           never
           so
           little
           of
           them
           ,
           these
           Liquors
           will
           gush
           out
           ,
           and
           have
           so
           much
           the
           more
           admirable
           Effect
           ,
           in
           that
           they
           are
           not
           adulterated
           ,
           as
           those
           we
           have
           in
           Europe
           are
           .
           The
           Para-ayra-braba
           ,
           is
           a
           thick
           hard
           Root
           ,
           which
           is
           made
           use
           of
           as
           an
           infallible
           Remedy
           against
           all
           sorts
           of
           Poysons
           :
           And
           as
           for
           the
           Hypopecovana
           it
           's
           a
           small
           Root
           ,
           that
           in
           our
           Armies
           has
           sufficiently
           discovered
           the
           Vertues
           of
           it
           against
           the
           Bloody-flux
           ,
           being
           valued
           at
           ten
           Pistoles
           a
           Pound
           ;
           but
           now
           it
           's
           cheaper
           ,
           as
           being
           more
           common
           .
        
         
         
           Among
           those
           that
           are
           curious
           ,
           you
           shall
           find
           very
           large
           Oranges
           ,
           that
           originally
           were
           brought
           from
           the
           Mogul
           Country
           ;
           according
           to
           which
           they
           have
           their
           Names
           ,
           and
           some
           whereof
           are
           eight
           Inches
           Diameter
           .
           They
           have
           a
           sort
           of
           Roses
           growing
           amongst
           them
           ,
           whose
           Leaves
           are
           very
           like
           unto
           those
           of
           Guimauva
           ,
           and
           the
           Fruit
           whereof
           is
           very
           singular
           ,
           being
           white
           from
           Midnight
           till
           Noon
           ,
           and
           from
           Noon
           to
           Mid-night
           again
           of
           a
           red
           Colour
           .
        
         
           They
           have
           abundance
           of
           wild
           Fowl
           in
           that
           Country
           ,
           and
           a
           great
           Number
           of
           extraordinary
           Birds
           ,
           and
           more
           especially
           the
           finest
           Parrots
           in
           the
           World
           ;
           to
           which
           may
           be
           added
           Tygers
           ,
           Deer
           ,
           wild
           Boars
           ,
           and
           several
           other
           Animals
           that
           are
           unknown
           to
           us
           in
           Europe
           :
           Monsieur
           
             de
             Gennes
          
           was
           presented
           with
           a
           very
           large
           Tortoise
           ,
           that
           lived
           without
           eating
           and
           drinking
           the
           rest
           of
           the
           Summer
           ,
           under
           one
           of
           the
           Carriages
           of
           our
           Cannon
           ;
           and
           these
           are
           a
           sort
           of
           Animals
           that
           will
           never
           die
           till
           all
           their
           Fat
           is
           entirely
           consumed
           .
        
         
           We
           observed
           two
           sorts
           of
           Monkeys
           there
           ,
           which
           they
           distinguished
           by
           the
           Names
           of
           Sagovins
           and
           Macaques
           ;
           the
           former
           are
           about
           the
           Bigness
           of
           a
           Squirrel
           ,
           
           some
           of
           them
           being
           of
           a
           greyish
           Colour
           ,
           but
           others
           have
           a
           fine
           Coat
           ,
           and
           of
           a
           Golden
           Hue
           ;
           they
           are
           always
           very
           merry
           and
           lightsome
           ,
           but
           so
           tender
           that
           the
           least
           Cold
           kills
           them
           :
           The
           Macaques
           are
           larger
           ,
           and
           of
           a
           brown
           Colour
           ,
           weep
           continually
           ,
           and
           are
           no
           otherwise
           diverting
           ,
           but
           that
           they
           will
           imitate
           every
           thing
           they
           see
           you
           do
           ;
           and
           we
           had
           one
           of
           them
           that
           would
           make
           some
           of
           our
           Ship-tackle
           as
           well
           as
           the
           Seamen
           themselves
           .
        
         
           The
           Portuguese
           have
           already
           found
           some
           Silver
           Mines
           there
           ,
           and
           lately
           Amethists
           also
           ;
           they
           have
           Brass
           enough
           from
           the
           Coast
           of
           Angola
           ,
           from
           the
           Traffick
           they
           drive
           there
           ,
           upon
           the
           account
           of
           the
           Negro's
           .
           But
           to
           return
           ,
           on
           the
           17th
           of
           July
           came
           in
           a
           Portuguese
           Ship
           ,
           belonging
           to
           the
           Guinea-Company
           ,
           lately
           erected
           amongst
           them
           ,
           which
           carried
           a
           white
           Flag
           with
           a
           Sinople
           or
           green
           Cross
           in
           it
           ,
           and
           next
           Day
           our
           three
           Ships
           ,
           which
           we
           did
           not
           expect
           to
           see
           till
           we
           came
           to
           Cayenne
           ,
           joined
           us
           ;
           the
           Sun
           of
           Africa
           gave
           us
           seven
           Guns
           ,
           and
           we
           returned
           her
           as
           many
           ;
           the
           Seditious
           had
           lost
           her
           Fore-round-top
           ,
           and
           by
           them
           we
           were
           informed
           that
           a
           Fleet
           of
           eighteen
           Sail
           
           were
           put
           out
           of
           Rio-Janeiro
           ;
           that
           the
           Felicity
           had
           gone
           thither
           ,
           that
           fifteen
           Men
           had
           deserted
           them
           ,
           and
           that
           Monsieur
           
             de
             la
             Roque
          
           had
           two
           of
           his
           Men
           killed
           and
           an
           Officer
           wounded
           ,
           in
           a
           Descent
           they
           had
           made
           against
           the
           Portuguese
           ,
           who
           detained
           five
           or
           six
           of
           our
           Officers
           in
           Prison
           ,
           upon
           account
           of
           a
           Quarrel
           that
           happened
           ,
           wherein
           two
           of
           the
           Inhabitants
           were
           left
           dead
           upon
           the
           spot
           .
        
         
           On
           the
           22d
           we
           heard
           the
           good
           Capuchin
           Father
           Francis
           preach
           ;
           this
           Man
           had
           spent
           five
           and
           twenty
           Years
           in
           preaching
           to
           the
           Indians
           ,
           and
           told
           Monsieur
           
             de
             Gennes
          
           ,
           That
           he
           had
           several
           times
           asked
           Leave
           of
           the
           General
           of
           his
           Order
           ,
           to
           return
           for
           some
           time
           into
           Europe
           ,
           but
           that
           he
           had
           desired
           him
           to
           continue
           where
           he
           was
           ,
           and
           not
           to
           forsake
           that
           Work
           he
           had
           so
           happily
           entered
           upon
           ;
           And
           that
           so
           taking
           the
           Desires
           of
           his
           Superiour
           ,
           as
           a
           Command
           from
           him
           ,
           he
           said
           he
           was
           ready
           to
           re-enter
           upon
           his
           Mission
           ,
           and
           had
           no
           farther
           Thoughts
           of
           his
           Native
           Country
           .
        
         
           Having
           ,
           by
           the
           sixth
           of
           August
           ,
           
           taken
           in
           our
           Stores
           of
           Water
           and
           Wood
           ,
           and
           laid
           in
           Provision
           for
           six
           Months
           ,
           
           we
           prepared
           for
           our
           Departure
           ,
           and
           found
           the
           Governour
           very
           civil
           ,
           who
           made
           a
           Present
           to
           all
           the
           Captains
           of
           some
           Amethists
           ,
           and
           of
           all
           sorts
           of
           Refreshments
           ;
           and
           the
           seventh
           Day
           being
           come
           ,
           we
           sailed
           away
           ,
           and
           having
           doubled
           the
           Cape
           of
           St.
           Antony
           ,
           we
           kept
           our
           Course
           out
           at
           Sea
           for
           some
           Days
           ,
           that
           we
           might
           shun
           the
           Coast
           ,
           which
           ,
           by
           reason
           of
           the
           Banks
           of
           Rocks
           ,
           as
           well
           as
           the
           Storms
           that
           are
           frequent
           there
           ,
           is
           very
           dangerous
           .
        
         
           On
           the
           8
           th
           we
           descry'd
           two
           Barks
           ,
           that
           made
           all
           the
           sail
           they
           could
           to
           come
           up
           with
           us
           ,
           and
           we
           staid
           for
           them
           ,
           as
           believing
           they
           were
           about
           to
           bring
           us
           some
           News
           ,
           because
           there
           was
           a
           Ship
           put
           in
           there
           the
           Day
           before
           .
           But
           they
           proved
           to
           be
           Negro's
           ,
           who
           came
           to
           desire
           us
           to
           take
           them
           away
           with
           us
           ,
           or
           else
           they
           would
           commit
           themselves
           to
           the
           mercy
           of
           the
           Waves
           ,
           sooner
           than
           they
           would
           return
           again
           under
           the
           Tyranny
           of
           their
           Masters
           ;
           but
           we
           sent
           them
           back
           ,
           that
           we
           might
           not
           give
           the
           Portuguese
           Occasion
           to
           complain
           of
           us
           ,
           that
           we
           had
           taken
           away
           their
           Slaves
           :
           
           And
           in
           truth
           ,
           these
           sort
           of
           Wretches
           are
           in
           a
           very
           miserable
           State
           ;
           they
           are
           born
           Slaves
           ,
           and
           they
           
           are
           scarce
           able
           to
           lift
           up
           their
           hands
           to
           their
           heads
           ,
           but
           they
           make
           them
           work
           at
           tilling
           the
           Ground
           as
           Oxen
           do
           :
           Besides
           they
           are
           ill-fed
           ,
           and
           bastinado'd
           for
           the
           least
           Fault
           :
           They
           behold
           their
           Children
           sold
           before
           their
           Faces
           ,
           and
           sometimes
           their
           Wives
           :
           And
           this
           does
           affect
           the
           greatest
           part
           of
           those
           who
           have
           been
           bred
           up
           in
           the
           Christian
           Religion
           ,
           to
           that
           Degree
           ,
           that
           they
           run
           away
           from
           their
           Masters
           ,
           and
           chuse
           rather
           to
           go
           and
           die
           in
           the
           Woods
           among
           the
           Indians
           ,
           where
           they
           meet
           with
           greater
           Humanity
           than
           with
           the
           other
           :
           But
           this
           they
           must
           execute
           with
           the
           greatest
           Precaution
           ,
           for
           if
           their
           Masters
           once
           catch
           them
           ,
           they
           give
           them
           no
           Quarter
           ;
           for
           they
           hang
           a
           great
           Iron
           Collar
           about
           their
           Necks
           on
           each
           side
           whereof
           there
           are
           Hooks
           ,
           whereunto
           is
           fastened
           a
           Stake
           or
           Branch
           of
           a
           Tree
           ,
           with
           which
           they
           thrash
           them
           at
           Pleasure
           ;
           and
           this
           they
           repeat
           so
           often
           ,
           that
           they
           put
           them
           almost
           out
           of
           Condition
           to
           follow
           their
           Work
           :
           But
           if
           it
           so
           happen
           ,
           that
           after
           this
           sort
           of
           Chastisement
           they
           relapse
           again
           into
           the
           same
           Fault
           ,
           they
           without
           any
           more
           ado
           ,
           cut
           off
           one
           of
           their
           Legs
           ,
           nay
           ,
           and
           sometimes
           hang
           them
           for
           an
           Example
           
           of
           Terrour
           unto
           others
           ;
           and
           tho'
           all
           this
           is
           bad
           enough
           ,
           yet
           the
           Spaniards
           and
           the
           English
           treat
           them
           still
           in
           a
           more
           cruel
           manner
           .
        
         
           I
           knew
           one
           living
           in
           Martinico
           ,
           who
           being
           of
           a
           compassionate
           Nature
           ,
           could
           not
           find
           in
           his
           heart
           to
           cut
           off
           his
           Slave's
           Leg
           ,
           who
           had
           run
           away
           four
           or
           five
           times
           ,
           but
           to
           the
           end
           he
           might
           not
           again
           run
           the
           risque
           of
           losing
           him
           altogether
           ,
           he
           bethought
           himself
           of
           fastening
           a
           Chain
           to
           his
           Neck
           ,
           which
           trailing
           down
           backwards
           ,
           catches
           up
           his
           Leg
           behind
           ,
           as
           may
           be
           seen
           by
           the
           Cut
           :
           And
           this
           ,
           in
           the
           space
           of
           two
           or
           three
           Years
           ,
           does
           so
           contract
           the
           Nerves
           ,
           that
           it
           will
           be
           impossible
           for
           this
           Slave
           to
           make
           use
           of
           his
           Leg.
           And
           thus
           ,
           without
           running
           the
           Hazard
           of
           this
           unhappy
           Wretch's
           Death
           ,
           and
           without
           doing
           him
           any
           Mischief
           ,
           he
           thereby
           deprived
           him
           of
           the
           means
           to
           make
           his
           Escape
           .
        
         
           
             P
             120
          
           
             How
             y
             e
             Portuguese
             Whip
             their
             Slaves
             when
             they
             run
             away
          
           
             A
             Slave
             that
             has
             his
             leg
             cut
             off
             for
             running
             away
          
           
             An
             invention
             of
             a
             French
             Man
             in
             Marlinico
          
        
         
           On
           the
           27th
           by
           break
           of
           Day
           ,
           as
           our
           Pilots
           allow'd
           us
           to
           be
           yet
           above
           sixty
           Leagues
           from
           the
           Shoar
           ,
           we
           observ'd
           the
           Water
           to
           be
           of
           a
           yellowish
           Colour
           ,
           and
           muddy
           ;
           and
           those
           of
           the
           Company
           ,
           who
           were
           so
           curious
           as
           to
           taste
           them
           ,
           told
           us
           ,
           they
           did
           not
           want
           much
           of
           being
           sweet
           ;
           and
           this
           made
           us
           believe
           
           that
           we
           were
           come
           to
           the
           Mouth
           of
           the
           famous
           River
           of
           the
           Amazons
           ,
           
           that
           is
           so
           rapid
           as
           to
           preserve
           the
           Sweetness
           of
           its
           Waters
           for
           near
           twenty
           Leagues
           within
           the
           Sea
           ;
           we
           ran
           upon
           the
           Coast
           till
           three
           in
           the
           Afternoon
           ,
           when
           we
           discovered
           a
           flat
           ,
           even
           ,
           and
           woody
           Coast
           ,
           where
           we
           anchored
           about
           six
           in
           the
           Evening
           ;
           and
           on
           the
           28th
           and
           29th
           ,
           we
           followed
           the
           said
           Coast
           ,
           at
           three
           or
           four
           Leagues
           distance
           from
           the
           Shoar
           ,
           and
           never
           found
           above
           five
           or
           six
           Fathom
           Water
           .
        
         
           On
           the
           30th
           ,
           
           about
           seven
           in
           the
           Morning
           ,
           we
           descry'd
           the
           Cape
           of
           Orange
           ,
           where
           we
           began
           to
           see
           the
           Foot
           of
           the
           Mountains
           :
           About
           three
           in
           the
           Afternoon
           ,
           we
           doubled
           a
           great
           Rock
           called
           the
           Constable
           ,
           three
           Leagues
           out
           in
           the
           Sea
           ,
           and
           five
           from
           Cayenne
           ;
           we
           drew
           up
           ,
           at
           about
           half
           a
           Cannon
           shot
           's
           distance
           ,
           and
           about
           six
           in
           the
           Evening
           came
           to
           an
           Anchor
           ,
           three
           Leagues
           to
           the
           North
           of
           Cayenne
           before
           five
           little
           Islands
           lying
           near
           to
           that
           place
           .
           When
           next
           Day
           was
           come
           ,
           Monsieur
           
             de
             Gennes
          
           sent
           an
           Officer
           to
           complement
           the
           Governour
           ,
           and
           to
           desire
           him
           to
           send
           us
           a
           Pilot
           to
           conduct
           us
           to
           a
           sase
           Anchorage
           ;
           but
           our
           Arrival
           had
           already
           allarm'd
           the
           
           whole
           Island
           ,
           and
           they
           fired
           off
           their
           Cannon
           all
           Night
           long
           ,
           to
           give
           the
           Inhabitants
           Notice
           to
           come
           together
           ;
           and
           they
           would
           not
           trust
           to
           our
           Colours
           ,
           because
           the
           Dutch
           in
           their
           Passage
           to
           Surinam
           and
           Barbicha
           ,
           have
           often
           cast
           Anchor
           within
           a
           League
           of
           the
           Town
           ,
           under
           white
           Colours
           ;
           and
           as
           they
           had
           not
           been
           used
           to
           see
           four
           French
           Ships
           at
           one
           time
           ,
           they
           were
           apprehensive
           of
           some
           Design
           upon
           them
           .
        
         
           Our
           Shallop
           could
           not
           return
           before
           next
           Day
           ,
           
           which
           happened
           to
           be
           the
           first
           of
           September
           ,
           the
           same
           being
           oblig'd
           to
           take
           a
           Course
           round
           the
           Island
           ,
           for
           avoiding
           the
           Currents
           ,
           which
           are
           very
           violent
           on
           that
           Coast
           ;
           but
           she
           brought
           a
           Pilot
           along
           ,
           tho'
           the
           Sea
           was
           so
           shallow
           that
           we
           were
           forced
           to
           tarry
           where
           we
           were
           till
           the
           Day
           following
           :
           And
           then
           on
           the
           second
           and
           third
           ,
           we
           made
           as
           much
           use
           of
           the
           Tide
           as
           possibly
           we
           could
           ,
           in
           order
           to
           get
           in
           ,
           because
           there
           was
           so
           very
           little
           Water
           ,
           and
           that
           we
           could
           not
           make
           ready
           before
           it
           had
           half
           flowed
           :
           But
           about
           four
           in
           the
           Evening
           ,
           we
           cast
           Anchor
           under
           the
           Cannon
           of
           the
           Town
           ,
           within
           Pistol-shot
           of
           Land
           ;
           there
           were
           two
           Merchants
           Ships
           already
           in
           Cayenne
           ,
           that
           had
           waited
           seven
           or
           eight
           Months
           
           for
           their
           Cargo
           ,
           besides
           another
           Vessel
           that
           came
           in
           the
           Day
           before
           us
           ,
           laden
           with
           Wine
           and
           Brandy
           .
           As
           our
           Men
           had
           ,
           just
           about
           this
           time
           ,
           received
           a
           Month's
           Pay
           ,
           and
           that
           it
           was
           now
           a
           long
           time
           since
           they
           had
           met
           with
           so
           good
           an
           Opportunity
           ,
           they
           not
           only
           drank
           up
           the
           Ship
           's
           whole
           Cargo
           in
           eight
           Days
           time
           ,
           but
           also
           all
           the
           Wine
           they
           had
           in
           the
           Island
           .
        
         
           Cayenne
           is
           a
           French
           Island
           ,
           
           scituated
           on
           the
           Coast
           of
           Guiana
           ,
           four
           Degrees
           and
           forty
           five
           Minutes
           North
           Latitude
           ,
           and
           332
           Longitude
           ;
           it
           's
           formed
           by
           the
           two
           Arms
           of
           a
           River
           ,
           and
           may
           be
           reckoned
           to
           be
           about
           eighteen
           Leagues
           in
           Circumference
           ;
           it
           stands
           high
           ,
           upon
           the
           Brink
           of
           the
           Sea
           ,
           and
           is
           so
           marshy
           in
           the
           middle
           ,
           that
           you
           cannot
           travel
           by
           Land
           ,
           from
           one
           end
           to
           the
           other
           ;
           the
           Fens
           of
           it
           are
           covered
           with
           a
           sort
           of
           large
           Trees
           called
           Mangles
           ,
           
           which
           above
           all
           other
           ,
           have
           the
           peculiar
           Quality
           of
           growing
           in
           Sea-Water
           ;
           these
           Trees
           are
           so
           thick
           ,
           and
           their
           Roots
           for
           the
           most
           part
           springing
           out
           of
           the
           Earth
           ,
           rise
           up
           ,
           and
           are
           so
           well
           interlaced
           one
           with
           another
           ,
           that
           in
           some
           places
           a
           Man
           may
           walk
           upon
           them
           above
           fifteen
           or
           twenty
           Leagues
           together
           ,
           without
           
           setting
           his
           Foot
           upon
           the
           Ground
           ;
           amongst
           them
           also
           divers
           Indians
           retire
           with
           their
           Canoes
           ,
           and
           there
           they
           make
           their
           Carbets
           .
        
         
           The
           Town
           stands
           on
           the
           West-part
           of
           the
           Island
           ,
           and
           is
           very
           advantageously
           scituated
           ,
           Nature
           and
           Art
           having
           both
           equally
           contributed
           to
           the
           fortifying
           of
           it
           :
           It
           's
           of
           an
           irregular
           Hexagone-Figure
           ,
           has
           near
           sixty
           pieces
           of
           Cannon
           planted
           upon
           Batteries
           ,
           for
           the
           Security
           of
           it
           ;
           and
           on
           the
           Sea-side
           ,
           upon
           an
           Eminence
           ,
           there
           is
           a
           Fort
           built
           that
           commands
           every
           way
           :
           The
           Garrison
           of
           the
           place
           consists
           of
           two
           Hundred
           Regular
           Troops
           ,
           but
           there
           are
           above
           four
           Hundred
           Inhabitants
           living
           either
           upon
           ,
           or
           round
           about
           the
           Island
           ,
           that
           upon
           the
           least
           Alarm
           are
           oblig'd
           to
           stand
           to
           their
           Arms.
           Monsieur
           
             de
             Feroles
          
           ,
           the
           Governour
           ,
           is
           a
           Person
           that
           has
           great
           Insight
           into
           the
           Affairs
           of
           a
           Colony
           ;
           the
           Power
           of
           distributing
           Justice
           is
           vested
           in
           him
           ,
           and
           he
           is
           much
           beloved
           by
           the
           Inhabitants
           :
           The
           Jesuits
           have
           a
           Church
           in
           the
           Town
           ,
           and
           a
           Chappel
           at
           the
           other
           end
           of
           the
           Island
           ,
           for
           the
           Conveniency
           of
           those
           that
           live
           remote
           .
        
         
         
           This
           Island
           was
           formerly
           very
           unhealthy
           ,
           as
           well
           for
           the
           continual
           Rains
           that
           fell
           there
           ,
           for
           nine
           Months
           in
           the
           Year
           ,
           as
           because
           the
           Ground
           was
           covered
           with
           Wood
           ,
           and
           withal
           very
           marshy
           ;
           Diseases
           were
           very
           rife
           amongst
           them
           ,
           and
           Infants
           usually
           died
           almost
           as
           soon
           as
           they
           were
           born
           ;
           but
           since
           the
           Island
           has
           been
           grubbed
           up
           ,
           they
           have
           begun
           to
           grow
           more
           healthy
           ,
           the
           Women
           have
           good
           Lyings-in
           ,
           and
           their
           Children
           are
           lusty
           .
        
         
           The
           chief
           Commodity
           of
           the
           Country
           ,
           
           is
           Sugar
           and
           Rocou
           ,
           but
           they
           make
           no
           great
           Quantity
           ,
           because
           the
           Inhabitants
           want
           Slaves
           to
           work
           for
           them
           ,
           and
           that
           is
           the
           Reason
           that
           Ships
           wait
           sometimes
           for
           near
           a
           Year's
           time
           for
           their
           lading
           :
           Those
           Negro's
           which
           we
           had
           sent
           thither
           by
           the
           Ship
           called
           the
           Fertill
           ,
           were
           almost
           all
           dead
           before
           they
           got
           to
           the
           Place
           ;
           for
           being
           taken
           with
           a
           Calm
           ,
           they
           wanted
           both
           Water
           and
           Victuals
           :
           But
           we
           having
           still
           about
           forty
           on
           board
           ,
           we
           sold
           them
           for
           five
           hundred
           Livres
           a
           Man.
           The
           Commodities
           they
           have
           from
           France
           ,
           are
           Wine
           ,
           Brandy
           ,
           Meal
           ,
           and
           powdered
           Meats
           ;
           for
           Beefs
           are
           very
           rare
           to
           be
           found
           there
           ,
           besides
           they
           are
           not
           allowed
           to
           
           kill
           any
           of
           them
           without
           Leave
           ,
           as
           being
           desirous
           to
           let
           them
           multiply
           .
        
         
           They
           carry
           Iron
           Tools
           ,
           and
           small
           Wares
           also
           thither
           ,
           for
           to
           traffick
           with
           the
           Indians
           :
           Four
           or
           five
           Years
           since
           ,
           Money
           was
           very
           scarce
           amongst
           them
           ;
           but
           the
           Free-booters
           who
           returned
           from
           the
           Southern-Seas
           ,
           and
           the
           meanest
           of
           which
           had
           at
           least
           two
           or
           three
           thousand
           Crowns
           for
           his
           Share
           ,
           bought
           them
           Habitations
           here
           ,
           increased
           the
           Colony
           ,
           and
           thereby
           made
           Money
           current
           amongst
           them
           .
           They
           drive
           a
           considerable
           Trade
           in
           Slaves
           ,
           dry'd
           Fish
           ,
           and
           Amacks
           ,
           with
           the
           Indians
           living
           upon
           the
           River
           of
           the
           Amazons
           ,
           and
           by
           this
           Commerce
           the
           Colony
           is
           very
           much
           enriched
           ;
           but
           the
           Portuguese
           ,
           who
           for
           some
           Years
           past
           have
           a
           mind
           to
           settle
           there
           ,
           have
           massacred
           in
           a
           most
           cruel
           manner
           those
           Persons
           who
           before
           went
           thither
           unmolested
           ,
           and
           in
           all
           manner
           of
           Security
           .
           Monsieur
           
             de
             Feroles
          
           hath
           begun
           a
           Road
           which
           is
           to
           go
           by
           Land
           to
           this
           River
           ,
           
           and
           pretends
           he
           'll
           drive
           the
           Portuguese
           from
           thence
           .
           The
           same
           belongs
           to
           France
           ,
           and
           't
           is
           our
           Interest
           to
           preserve
           it
           ,
           not
           only
           upon
           the
           account
           of
           our
           Traffick
           ,
           but
           also
           because
           there
           are
           Silver
           Mines
           there
           .
        
         
         
           The
           Earth
           ,
           besides
           Sugar
           and
           Rocou
           ;
           produces
           Cotton
           and
           Indigo
           ,
           and
           is
           withal
           very
           fertil
           in
           Maes
           and
           Magniot
           ;
           besides
           those
           Fruits
           we
           have
           seen
           in
           Brasil
           ,
           we
           find
           growing
           here
           ,
           
           the
           
             Cassia
             ,
             Papaye
             ,
             Acajou-Apples
          
           ,
           the
           
             Vanilla
             ,
             Peet
          
           ,
           and
           several
           others
           .
           As
           for
           the
           Papaye
           ,
           it
           's
           a
           thick
           Fruit
           ,
           and
           tastes
           somewhat
           like
           a
           Cucumber
           ;
           it
           grows
           round
           the
           stem
           of
           a
           tall
           but
           tender
           Tree
           that
           has
           large
           Leaves
           ,
           and
           cleft
           as
           your
           Vine
           Leaves
           are
           ;
           the
           Tree
           it self
           is
           hollow
           ,
           and
           grows
           above
           fifteen
           Foot
           in
           one
           Year's
           time
           .
        
         
           The
           Acajou-Apple
           is
           thick
           ,
           long
           ,
           and
           of
           a
           yellow-red
           ;
           has
           a
           sharp
           Taste
           ,
           and
           is
           usually
           eaten
           baked
           .
           At
           the
           end
           of
           this
           Apple
           you
           have
           a
           little
           green
           Nut
           ,
           that
           tastes
           like
           a
           Filbert
           ,
           and
           in
           form
           resembles
           a
           Sheeps-kidney
           :
           This
           Fruit
           grows
           upon
           a
           tall
           and
           round
           sort
           of
           a
           Tree
           ,
           like
           unto
           a
           Chesnut-tree
           ,
           whose
           Leaves
           are
           of
           the
           same
           Form
           and
           Colour
           ,
           as
           those
           of
           the
           Laurel
           :
           The
           Wood
           of
           it
           is
           very
           fine
           ,
           and
           proper
           to
           make
           Houshold
           Furniture
           of
           ,
           and
           Pirogues
           of
           forty
           and
           fifty
           Foot
           long
           ;
           if
           a
           Line
           ,
           or
           such
           a
           thing
           ,
           be
           once
           spotted
           with
           the
           Juice
           of
           this
           Acajou-Apple
           ,
           it
           's
           impossible
           to
           take
           away
           the
           Stain
           ,
           
           till
           the
           Season
           of
           the
           Fruit
           be
           entirely
           gone
           .
        
         
           The
           Vanilla
           is
           a
           Plant
           that
           creeps
           up
           along
           other
           Trees
           ,
           in
           the
           same
           manner
           as
           Ivy
           does
           ;
           its
           Leaves
           being
           of
           a
           bright
           green
           Colour
           ,
           thick
           ,
           long
           ,
           strait
           ,
           and
           pointed
           at
           the
           ends
           .
           About
           seven
           Years
           after
           it
           is
           planted
           ,
           it
           begins
           to
           hear
           a
           sort
           of
           Husks
           that
           are
           full
           of
           an
           oyly
           Matter
           ,
           and
           Seed
           that
           is
           smaller
           than
           that
           of
           Poppy
           ,
           which
           they
           make
           use
           of
           in
           that
           Country
           ,
           to
           give
           a
           good
           Scent
           to
           Tobacco
           ,
           and
           Liquors
           they
           have
           amongst
           them
           .
        
         
           The
           Peet
           is
           an
           Herb
           that
           can
           be
           peeled
           in
           the
           same
           manner
           ,
           as
           Hemp
           with
           us
           ,
           and
           whose
           threads
           are
           stronger
           and
           finer
           than
           Silk
           ,
           the
           Use
           whereof
           it
           would
           have
           long
           since
           put
           out
           of
           doors
           ,
           if
           so
           be
           it
           would
           have
           been
           allowed
           to
           be
           transported
           to
           
             France
             .
             Ebony
          
           ,
           of
           a
           different
           sort
           ,
           Letter-wood
           (
           as
           they
           call
           it
           )
           and
           that
           of
           Violet
           ,
           with
           several
           others
           ,
           are
           very
           common
           in
           that
           Country
           .
           To
           say
           nothing
           of
           the
           Fish
           and
           Fowl
           that
           we
           find
           there
           in
           great
           abundance
           ,
           as
           we
           do
           also
           Tygers
           ,
           Deer
           ,
           Pigs
           ,
           little
           Porcupines
           ,
           Camelions
           ,
           those
           Beasts
           they
           call
           Agontills
           and
           Sapaions
           ,
           and
           divers
           sorts
           of
           Animals
           more
           .
        
         
         
           As
           for
           the
           Agontill
           ,
           it
           's
           a
           Creature
           of
           the
           same
           Bigness
           with
           an
           Hare
           ,
           of
           a
           reddish
           Colour
           like
           unto
           a
           Deer
           ,
           sharp
           Muzzle
           ,
           small
           Ears
           ,
           and
           short
           as
           well
           as
           very
           small
           Legs
           ;
           but
           the
           Sapaion
           is
           a
           kind
           of
           a
           little
           Monkey
           ,
           of
           a
           yellowish
           Colour
           ,
           having
           large
           Eyes
           ,
           a
           white
           Face
           and
           black
           Chin
           :
           It
           's
           of
           a
           low
           Stature
           ,
           but
           of
           a
           lively
           and
           caressing
           Nature
           .
        
         
           The
           Camelion
           doth
           somewhat
           resemble
           those
           small
           Lizards
           that
           creep
           up
           our
           Walls
           ,
           whose
           Colour
           cannot
           be
           agreed
           on
           ,
           because
           they
           receive
           it
           from
           every
           thing
           they
           touch
           :
           They
           have
           here
           also
           very
           large
           Serpents
           ,
           but
           not
           very
           venomous
           ,
           and
           some
           of
           them
           have
           been
           observed
           to
           have
           swallowed
           a
           whole
           Deer
           at
           a
           time
           .
        
         
           As
           for
           Birds
           ,
           
           they
           have
           very
           curious
           Parrots
           in
           that
           Country
           ,
           that
           will
           quickly
           learn
           to
           speak
           ;
           from
           which
           the
           Indians
           pluck
           Feathers
           of
           divers
           Colours
           ,
           by
           the
           help
           of
           the
           Blood
           of
           certain
           creeping
           Animals
           ,
           with
           which
           they
           rub
           them
           .
           They
           have
           also
           other
           Birds
           ,
           called
           
             Flamands
             ,
             Ocos
             ,
             Toucans
          
           ,
           and
           many
           sorts
           besides
           .
           The
           first
           whereof
           ,
           viz.
           the
           Flamands
           are
           Sea-birds
           ,
           about
           the
           Bigness
           of
           an
           Hen
           ,
           which
           flie
           in
           Bands
           as
           
           Ducks
           ,
           or
           rather
           Cranes
           do
           ;
           and
           whose
           Feathers
           being
           of
           a
           scarlet
           Colour
           ,
           the
           Indians
           make
           unto
           themselves
           Crowns
           of
           them
           :
           The
           Ocos
           are
           as
           big
           as
           the
           Indian
           Poultry
           ,
           black
           on
           the
           Back
           ,
           but
           white
           breasted
           ,
           with
           a
           short
           yellow
           Bill
           ,
           a
           fierce
           Gate
           ,
           and
           have
           small
           frizled
           Feathers
           standing
           up
           like
           a
           Cop
           upon
           their
           Heads
           .
           And
           for
           the
           Toucan
           ,
           that
           is
           a
           Bird
           that
           hath
           both
           black
           ,
           red
           ,
           and
           yellow
           Feathers
           ,
           being
           very
           near
           as
           big
           as
           a
           Pidgeon
           ,
           whose
           Bill
           is
           almost
           as
           thick
           as
           his
           Body
           ,
           and
           of
           a
           very
           singular
           make
           ,
           as
           being
           all
           over
           nothing
           but
           black
           and
           white
           welts
           or
           streaks
           ,
           like
           Ebony
           and
           Ivory
           interlaid
           ;
           neither
           is
           his
           Tongue
           less
           admirable
           ,
           being
           nought
           but
           a
           plain
           Feather
           ,
           and
           that
           very
           streight
           .
        
         
           We
           shall
           say
           nothing
           of
           several
           Birds
           ,
           who
           have
           nothing
           remarkable
           in
           them
           besides
           their
           Feathers
           ;
           and
           therefore
           ,
           we
           shall
           now
           proceed
           to
           a
           short
           Description
           of
           the
           Government
           of
           Cayenne
           ,
           which
           some
           ,
           by
           reason
           of
           the
           Bigness
           of
           it
           ,
           and
           its
           Scituation
           under
           the
           Equator
           ,
           have
           called
           Equinoxial
           France
           .
        
         
           The
           Government
           of
           Cayenne
           contains
           about
           an
           hundred
           Leagues
           in
           length
           ,
           
           upon
           the
           Ocean
           ,
           wherewith
           it
           's
           bounded
           
           both
           on
           the
           East
           and
           North
           ;
           as
           it
           has
           to
           the
           West
           the
           River
           Marony
           ,
           which
           separates
           the
           same
           from
           Surinam
           ,
           now
           in
           the
           hands
           of
           the
           States
           of
           Holland
           ;
           and
           to
           the
           South
           ,
           the
           Northern
           Boundary
           of
           the
           Amazons
           ,
           where
           the
           Portuguese
           have
           already
           built
           three
           Forts
           upon
           the
           Rivers
           of
           Paron
           and
           Macaba
           :
           One
           may
           see
           by
           the
           Map
           made
           of
           this
           Government
           (
           which
           I
           have
           taken
           Care
           to
           correct
           ,
           according
           to
           the
           Memoirs
           of
           Monsieur
           
             de
             Feroles
          
           ,
           for
           to
           send
           it
           to
           Court
           )
           the
           Road
           that
           has
           been
           made
           ,
           in
           order
           to
           drive
           them
           from
           thence
           :
           This
           Road
           begins
           at
           the
           River
           of
           Peira
           ,
           which
           falls
           into
           that
           of
           Paron
           ,
           and
           by
           which
           they
           can
           afterwards
           go
           down
           in
           Canoes
           :
           Here
           also
           Observations
           may
           be
           made
           of
           the
           different
           Nations
           of
           the
           Indians
           that
           dwell
           in
           those
           Parts
           ,
           and
           who
           all
           of
           them
           ,
           tho'
           intermixt
           one
           with
           another
           ,
           speak
           different
           Languages
           ,
           and
           are
           almost
           always
           ingaged
           in
           War
           ,
           which
           is
           not
           usually
           put
           an
           end
           to
           ,
           until
           they
           make
           forty
           or
           fifty
           of
           their
           Enemies
           Prisoners
           .
           We
           were
           informed
           by
           the
           Jesuits
           ,
           That
           several
           of
           these
           Nations
           were
           once
           entred
           into
           a
           League
           against
           one
           another
           ;
           and
           that
           they
           were
           about
           a
           Year's
           Space
           in
           making
           
           grand
           Preparation
           for
           War
           ,
           which
           after
           all
           ended
           one
           Night
           ,
           in
           their
           surprizing
           two
           or
           three
           Carbets
           ,
           where
           they
           might
           burn
           perhaps
           about
           an
           hundred
           Persons
           ,
           Men
           ,
           Women
           and
           Children
           ,
           and
           so
           returned
           home
           as
           fierce
           and
           vaunting
           ,
           as
           if
           they
           had
           made
           a
           Conquest
           of
           the
           whole
           Country
           .
        
         
           These
           Indians
           are
           red
           ,
           
           of
           short
           Stature
           ,
           having
           black
           ,
           long
           ,
           and
           lank
           Hair
           ;
           they
           go
           all
           naked
           ,
           unless
           it
           be
           their
           Privy-parts
           ,
           which
           they
           cover
           with
           a
           little
           Cotton-welt
           ,
           that
           hangs
           down
           by
           their
           Legs
           :
           But
           for
           the
           Women
           ,
           they
           use
           a
           piece
           of
           Cloth
           half
           a
           Foot
           square
           ,
           which
           they
           call
           Camisa
           ,
           and
           which
           is
           usually
           woven
           after
           a
           striped
           manner
           ,
           of
           divers
           Colours
           ,
           and
           especially
           white
           ,
           which
           they
           prefer
           above
           any
           other
           ;
           but
           some
           of
           them
           there
           are
           ,
           who
           only
           hang
           a
           Carrot-leaf
           at
           their
           Girdle
           :
           The
           Men
           cut
           off
           their
           Beards
           ,
           dye
           their
           Faces
           with
           Rocou
           ,
           and
           cover
           their
           Arms
           and
           Faces
           with
           several
           folds
           of
           the
           forementioned
           sort
           of
           Cloth
           ;
           they
           generally
           ,
           by
           way
           of
           Ornament
           ,
           wear
           Crowns
           made
           of
           Feathers
           of
           various
           Colours
           ,
           and
           bore
           a
           hole
           between
           their
           Nostrils
           ,
           where
           they
           hang
           a
           little
           piece
           of
           Money
           ,
           or
           a
           large
           knob
           of
           green
           
           Crystal
           that
           is
           brought
           from
           the
           River
           of
           Amazons
           ,
           and
           which
           they
           mightily
           value
           :
           But
           there
           is
           particularly
           one
           whole
           Nation
           of
           these
           Indians
           ,
           that
           make
           a
           large
           hole
           in
           the
           nether
           Lip
           ,
           through
           which
           they
           put
           a
           piece
           of
           Wood
           ,
           whereunto
           they
           fasten
           this
           Crystal
           :
           And
           as
           these
           are
           thus
           singular
           ,
           all
           the
           other
           Nations
           have
           particular
           marks
           of
           Distinction
           also
           .
        
         
           These
           People
           are
           very
           skilful
           in
           Bows
           and
           Arrows
           ,
           which
           they
           make
           use
           of
           as
           well
           in
           fishing
           as
           fowling
           :
           They
           work
           their
           Amacks
           very
           curiously
           ,
           and
           make
           very
           pretty
           Pots
           and
           Baskets
           ,
           which
           they
           call
           Pagara
           ,
           and
           are
           wrought
           in
           such
           a
           manner
           ,
           that
           they
           go
           one
           into
           another
           ,
           and
           cannot
           be
           penetrated
           by
           Water
           :
           They
           also
           make
           use
           of
           their
           Couis
           or
           Calabasses
           ,
           about
           which
           they
           turn
           their
           Ornaments
           ,
           and
           varnish
           them
           with
           divers
           Colours
           ,
           so
           as
           that
           the
           Waters
           shall
           not
           injure
           them
           ;
           but
           for
           all
           this
           Skill
           of
           theirs
           ,
           they
           are
           very
           lazy
           ,
           and
           continually
           lain
           down
           ,
           taking
           no
           Care
           for
           the
           Morrow
           ,
           no
           ,
           not
           for
           their
           necessary
           Subsistence
           :
           And
           there
           is
           nothing
           but
           Famine
           that
           can
           draw
           them
           out
           of
           their
           Amacks
           .
           When
           they
           are
           in
           the
           Country
           ,
           or
           waging
           War
           ,
           and
           
           chance
           to
           hear
           that
           the
           Wife
           lies
           in
           ,
           they
           return
           with
           all
           speed
           ,
           bind
           up
           their
           Heads
           ,
           and
           ,
           as
           if
           themselves
           were
           in
           labour
           ,
           they
           lie
           in
           their
           Beds
           ,
           where
           their
           Neighbours
           come
           to
           comfort
           them
           under
           their
           imaginary
           Illness
           :
           There
           are
           several
           of
           them
           live
           together
           in
           one
           or
           more
           large
           Cottages
           ,
           which
           they
           call
           Carbets
           ,
           over
           each
           of
           which
           there
           is
           a
           Captain
           constituted
           .
           As
           for
           their
           Diet
           ,
           they
           feed
           upon
           that
           which
           they
           call
           
             Cassave
             ,
             Maes
          
           ,
           Fish
           and
           Fruits
           ;
           the
           Men
           they
           live
           by
           fishing
           ,
           and
           't
           is
           the
           Women
           that
           till
           the
           Ground
           :
           They
           earry
           but
           a
           small
           matter
           of
           Victuals
           along
           with
           them
           ,
           when
           they
           go
           to
           War
           ;
           for
           they
           feast
           upon
           the
           fattest
           part
           of
           their
           Prisoners
           Flesh
           ,
           and
           for
           the
           rest
           they
           sell
           them
           to
           the
           French.
           
        
         
           They
           have
           divers
           sorts
           of
           Feasts
           amongst
           them
           ,
           unto
           which
           one
           Carbet
           invites
           another
           ;
           and
           there
           they
           appear
           with
           Crowns
           on
           their
           Heads
           ,
           and
           Feather-girdles
           ,
           and
           spend
           the
           Day
           in
           dancing
           round
           ,
           and
           in
           feasting
           ,
           where
           they
           make
           themselves
           drunk
           with
           a
           strong
           sort
           of
           Liquor
           ,
           which
           they
           call
           Ovicon
           ,
           made
           of
           Cassave
           and
           Fruit
           ,
           boyled
           together
           .
        
         
         
           These
           poor
           People
           live
           in
           miserable
           Ignorance
           ,
           for
           they
           worship
           the
           Stars
           ,
           and
           are
           very
           much
           afraid
           of
           the
           Devil
           ,
           which
           they
           call
           Piaye
           ,
           and
           who
           (
           as
           they
           say
           )
           comes
           to
           Beat
           and
           Torment
           them
           :
           Every
           one
           of
           them
           hath
           his
           Wife
           ,
           which
           they
           cannot
           forsake
           ,
           '
           tho
           they
           find
           them
           Tardy
           :
           Old
           Men
           they
           highly
           venerate
           ,
           and
           when
           any
           of
           them
           die
           ,
           they
           bury
           them
           in
           their
           Carbets
           ,
           without
           any
           other
           Ceremony
           than
           to
           make
           themselves
           soundly
           drunk
           :
           But
           as
           soon
           as
           they
           think
           the
           Corps
           is
           almost
           rotten
           ,
           they
           dig
           up
           the
           bones
           ,
           and
           burning
           the
           same
           to
           ashes
           ,
           they
           put
           it
           into
           their
           Ovicon
           ,
           and
           this
           they
           esteem
           excellent
           chear
           ;
           the
           Jesuits
           take
           a
           deal
           of
           Pains
           in
           Instructing
           these
           poor
           People
           ,
           who
           with
           much
           Docility
           give
           ear
           to
           the
           Mysteries
           of
           the
           Christian
           Faith.
           
        
         
           On
           the
           16th
           a
           Fire
           broke
           out
           in
           the
           House
           of
           one
           of
           the
           Officers
           ,
           which
           was
           a
           great
           loss
           not
           only
           to
           the
           Owners
           ,
           but
           also
           to
           several
           of
           the
           Inhabitants
           round
           the
           Town
           ,
           who
           had
           their
           Moveables
           there
           .
           All
           these
           Houses
           are
           built
           of
           Wood
           ,
           and
           thatched
           over
           ,
           which
           is
           the
           reason
           that
           Fire
           takes
           them
           so
           fast
           that
           nothing
           can
           be
           saved
           .
        
         
         
           On
           the
           25th
           we
           made
           ready
           for
           a
           cruise
           upon
           the
           Coast
           of
           Barbadoes
           ,
           which
           Island
           is
           under
           the
           Dominion
           of
           the
           English
           ,
           who
           send
           thither
           above
           six
           hundred
           Ships
           every
           Year
           :
           It
           's
           well
           Peopled
           ,
           and
           they
           reckon
           no
           less
           than
           six
           thousand
           Negro-Slaves
           to
           be
           in
           it
           ,
           so
           that
           without
           Contradiction
           it
           may
           be
           esteemed
           the
           most
           Powerful
           Colony
           of
           all
           the
           American
           Islands
           .
        
         
           Monsieur
           
             de
             Gennes
          
           had
           some
           thoughts
           of
           going
           to
           attack
           Surinam
           ,
           and
           for
           furthering
           of
           his
           design
           ,
           Monsieur
           
             de
             Feroles
          
           made
           him
           an
           offer
           to
           go
           thither
           in
           Person
           with
           part
           of
           his
           Garrison
           ;
           but
           certain
           Indians
           who
           do
           nothing
           else
           but
           go
           backwards
           and
           forwards
           to
           give
           an
           Account
           of
           what
           is
           done
           both
           on
           the
           one
           and
           the
           other
           side
           ,
           informed
           us
           there
           were
           two
           large
           Dutch
           Ships
           there
           carrying
           70
           Pieces
           of
           Cannon
           ,
           that
           were
           ready
           to
           put
           out
           forthwith
           ,
           and
           that
           so
           we
           should
           have
           to
           deal
           with
           the
           Fort
           and
           these
           two
           Ships
           at
           a
           time
           ;
           which
           made
           us
           alter
           our
           resolution
           ,
           and
           to
           continue
           Cruising
           .
        
         
           On
           the
           14th
           of
           October
           ,
           
           believing
           our selves
           to
           be
           in
           the
           height
           of
           Barbadoes
           ,
           we
           sent
           the
           Glutton
           to
           Martinico
           ,
           with
           Orders
           to
           lade
           her self
           with
           Sugar
           ,
           and
           so
           to
           sail
           away
           for
           France
           :
           
           And
           there
           we
           Cruised
           to
           the
           16th
           ,
           fifty
           ,
           forty
           ,
           and
           thirty
           Leagues
           distance
           from
           the
           Shoar
           ,
           without
           seeing
           any
           thing
           ,
           and
           therefore
           we
           thought
           it
           advisable
           to
           draw
           near
           to
           the
           Island
           .
        
         
           The
           17th
           the
           Weather
           was
           very
           Hazy
           till
           five
           in
           the
           Afternoon
           ,
           when
           clearing
           up
           all
           of
           a
           sudden
           ,
           we
           discovered
           Barbadoes
           ,
           from
           which
           we
           might
           be
           about
           five
           Leagues
           distance
           :
           About
           an
           Hour
           after
           we
           descryed
           a
           Ship
           ;
           But
           as
           we
           found
           she
           was
           near
           the
           Shoar
           ,
           and
           that
           it
           was
           now
           Night
           ,
           we
           thought
           it
           more
           Convenient
           to
           bear
           off
           than
           to
           come
           up
           with
           her
           .
        
         
           On
           the
           18th
           the
           Wind
           being
           very
           slack
           ,
           we
           found
           our selves
           still
           to
           be
           at
           the
           same
           distance
           from
           Shoar
           ,
           but
           about
           Noon
           we
           gave
           chase
           under
           English
           Colours
           to
           a
           Carvet
           that
           came
           to
           discover
           what
           we
           were
           ,
           but
           upon
           her
           putting
           up
           French
           Colours
           ,
           and
           giving
           us
           a
           Gun
           as
           a
           Signal
           that
           she
           was
           really
           such
           ,
           we
           hung
           out
           ours
           also
           ,
           and
           gave
           her
           the
           same
           assurance
           .
           This
           was
           a
           small
           Vessel
           from
           Martinico
           called
           the
           Malovin
           ,
           carrying
           four
           Guns
           ,
           and
           was
           manned
           with
           five
           and
           forty
           Buccaneers
           ,
           whose
           Captain
           came
           on
           board
           us
           ,
           and
           gave
           us
           an
           Account
           of
           the
           
           Death
           of
           Monsieur
           
             de
             Blenac
          
           ,
           General
           of
           the
           American
           Islands
           ,
           adding
           farther
           that
           he
           had
           met
           with
           our
           Fleet
           ,
           and
           that
           there
           were
           six
           and
           twenty
           Sail
           of
           Ships
           got
           into
           Barbadoes
           about
           six
           Weeks
           before
           .
        
         
           About
           five
           in
           the
           Evening
           we
           discovered
           three
           Ships
           near
           the
           Shoar
           ,
           which
           the
           Malovin
           told
           us
           was
           a
           Man
           of
           War
           for
           a
           Guard-ship
           ,
           that
           carried
           four
           and
           fifty
           Guns
           ,
           and
           two
           small
           Frigates
           of
           fourteen
           Guns
           each
           ,
           and
           that
           they
           were
           come
           out
           to
           hinder
           her
           to
           take
           a
           Merchant
           Ship
           ,
           that
           she
           had
           chased
           to
           the
           very
           mouth
           of
           the
           Port.
           
        
         
           On
           the
           19th
           by
           Break
           of
           Day
           we
           discovered
           the
           said
           Guard-ship
           followed
           by
           a
           Skiff
           about
           two
           Leagues
           off
           of
           us
           :
           But
           as
           there
           was
           but
           very
           little
           Wind
           stirring
           ,
           and
           that
           she
           had
           a
           great
           mind
           to
           know
           what
           we
           were
           ,
           she
           made
           use
           of
           her
           Oars
           to
           get
           out
           ,
           and
           about
           three
           in
           the
           Afternoon
           sent
           her
           Shallop
           to
           see
           what
           the
           Seditious
           was
           ,
           which
           was
           not
           above
           two
           Cannon-shot
           off
           ,
           but
           about
           five
           she
           recalled
           her
           ,
           and
           an
           Hour
           after
           she
           sailed
           off
           and
           made
           a
           show
           of
           getting
           to
           the
           Shoar
           and
           recovering
           land
           :
           But
           we
           did
           not
           think
           fit
           to
           pursue
           
           her
           ,
           because
           we
           were
           apprehensive
           she
           might
           return
           ,
           and
           had
           a
           design
           to
           surprize
           us
           :
           But
           in
           short
           we
           saw
           her
           again
           at
           ten
           at
           Night
           within
           Cannon-shot
           of
           us
           ,
           and
           she
           followed
           us
           all
           that
           Night
           long
           almost
           within
           Musket-shot
           ,
           and
           from
           time
           to
           time
           fired
           Rockets
           as
           a
           Signal
           for
           the
           Shallop
           to
           come
           up
           ,
           that
           had
           not
           yet
           rejoyned
           her
           .
           At
           break
           of
           Day
           we
           came
           up
           to
           her
           with
           a
           good
           Wind
           under
           French
           Colours
           ,
           and
           all
           our
           sails
           loose
           ,
           but
           as
           she
           had
           no
           other
           design
           than
           to
           see
           what
           we
           were
           ,
           and
           not
           to
           fight
           ,
           she
           gave
           us
           no
           Occasion
           to
           desire
           her
           to
           return
           to
           Port
           ,
           which
           she
           did
           very
           safely
           ,
           as
           did
           also
           the
           Skiff
           and
           her
           Shallop
           ,
           which
           we
           discharged
           some
           shot
           at
           .
        
         
           On
           the
           20th
           and
           21th
           we
           bore
           off
           to
           Sea
           ,
           and
           next
           Day
           about
           Noon
           discovered
           a
           Ship
           ,
           about
           three
           Leagues
           to
           the
           Windward
           of
           us
           ,
           with
           which
           we
           came
           very
           near
           up
           ,
           when
           the
           Night
           approached
           and
           prevented
           our
           taking
           of
           her
           .
        
         
           On
           the
           24th
           we
           took
           a
           small
           Fly-boat
           of
           forty
           Tunn
           ,
           
           coming
           from
           Virginia
           ,
           laden
           with
           Tobacco
           ,
           Bacon
           ,
           and
           Meal
           for
           Barbadoes
           ,
           and
           was
           valued
           at
           10000
           Livres
           ;
           and
           the
           Seditious
           the
           very
           same
           
           Day
           gave
           chase
           to
           another
           small
           Ship
           ,
           that
           made
           her
           escape
           by
           the
           favour
           of
           the
           Night
           .
        
         
           The
           25th
           and
           26th
           we
           had
           a
           great
           deal
           of
           bad
           Weather
           ,
           on
           the
           last
           of
           which
           ,
           about
           three
           in
           the
           Afternoon
           we
           saw
           a
           large
           Ship
           two
           Leagues
           to
           the
           Windward
           of
           us
           ,
           towards
           which
           we
           bare
           ,
           and
           all
           that
           Night
           kept
           a
           different
           Course
           that
           we
           might
           not
           lose
           her
           ,
           but
           all
           in
           vain
           .
        
         
           On
           the
           28th
           we
           found
           our selves
           in
           sight
           of
           Barbadoes
           ,
           from
           which
           we
           computed
           our selves
           to
           be
           five
           and
           twenty
           Leagues
           distance
           ;
           we
           were
           surprized
           with
           our
           mistake
           ,
           and
           could
           attribute
           the
           cause
           of
           it
           to
           nothing
           but
           the
           Currents
           ;
           but
           we
           took
           this
           opportunity
           to
           send
           our
           Fly-boat
           to
           Martinico
           ,
           towards
           which
           she
           made
           good
           sail
           by
           the
           help
           of
           the
           Night
           ,
           and
           a
           favourable
           Wind.
           
        
         
           We
           spent
           the
           rest
           of
           our
           time
           to
           the
           fourth
           of
           November
           ,
           
           to
           get
           thirty
           or
           forty
           Leagues
           out
           to
           Sea
           ,
           because
           the
           Winds
           are
           always
           contrary
           ,
           and
           that
           no
           way
           can
           be
           made
           but
           upon
           a
           tack
           ;
           and
           on
           the
           sixth
           ,
           seventh
           ,
           and
           eighth
           we
           had
           very
           bad
           weather
           ,
           and
           next
           Day
           we
           were
           ready
           to
           sail
           back
           ,
           when
           we
           discovered
           
           a
           Ship
           two
           Leagues
           off
           to
           the
           See-ward
           ,
           
           which
           as
           well
           as
           we
           ,
           was
           at
           the
           Cape
           ,
           to
           stay
           for
           the
           weather
           to
           prove
           better
           ;
           hereupon
           we
           made
           all
           the
           sail
           we
           could
           ,
           and
           in
           two
           Hours
           time
           came
           within
           Cannon-shot
           of
           her
           ;
           she
           put
           out
           English
           Colours
           ,
           which
           we
           Answered
           with
           ours
           ,
           and
           at
           the
           same
           time
           gave
           her
           some
           chase
           Guns
           ;
           she
           kept
           Fighting
           ,
           Retreating
           ,
           and
           wounded
           three
           of
           the
           
             Sun
             of
          
           Africa's
           Men
           ,
           which
           was
           ready
           to
           give
           her
           a
           whole
           Broadside
           and
           to
           send
           her
           to
           the
           Deep
           ,
           when
           ,
           to
           prevent
           it
           ,
           she
           presently
           struck
           .
        
         
           She
           was
           a
           tight
           Ship
           ,
           carrying
           two
           and
           twenty
           Guns
           ,
           belonged
           to
           
             New
             England
          
           ,
           and
           this
           was
           her
           first
           Voyage
           :
           Her
           lading
           consisted
           chiefly
           in
           Materials
           for
           Shipping
           ,
           and
           some
           Cod
           ;
           we
           put
           twenty
           Men
           on
           board
           her
           ,
           and
           steered
           for
           Martinico
           ,
           but
           that
           Night
           it
           blew
           very
           hard
           ,
           and
           we
           were
           separated
           from
           the
           Seditious
           in
           the
           storm
           ;
           and
           on
           the
           11th
           we
           had
           sight
           of
           Barbadoes
           ,
           which
           we
           left
           to
           the
           North
           of
           us
           .
        
         
           Next
           Day
           early
           in
           the
           Morning
           ,
           we
           found
           our selves
           at
           two
           Leagues
           distance
           from
           St.
           Lucia
           ,
           which
           we
           had
           a
           desire
           to
           leave
           behind
           us
           ,
           but
           the
           Wind
           
           took
           us
           short
           :
           This
           Island
           is
           high
           of
           Scituation
           ,
           covered
           all
           over
           with
           Wood
           ,
           and
           very
           remarkable
           for
           two
           Peaks
           in
           it
           like
           a
           Sugar-loaf
           ,
           that
           may
           be
           seen
           at
           twenty
           Leagues
           distance
           in
           clear
           Weather
           :
           We
           Coasted
           it
           all
           Day
           ,
           and
           on
           the
           13th
           early
           in
           the
           Morning
           ,
           we
           found
           we
           were
           three
           Leagues
           from
           the
           Diamond-Point
           of
           Martinico
           ;
           we
           plyed
           till
           Evening
           for
           to
           get
           into
           the
           mouth
           of
           Sack-Royal
           ,
           (
           as
           they
           call
           it
           )
           where
           we
           Anchored
           at
           five
           ,
           within
           half
           a
           League
           of
           the
           Fort
           ,
           which
           we
           saluted
           with
           seven
           Pieces
           of
           Cannon
           ,
           and
           were
           answered
           with
           as
           many
           from
           thence
           .
        
         
           Next
           Day
           the
           Captain
           of
           the
           Fort
           entred
           us
           for
           Careening
           ;
           we
           found
           four
           or
           five
           Ships
           there
           from
           Rochel
           and
           Bourdeaux
           ,
           and
           two
           Danes
           hired
           by
           French
           Merchants
           for
           the
           Voyage
           ,
           one
           of
           which
           saluted
           us
           with
           five
           Guns
           ,
           which
           we
           answered
           with
           three
           :
           We
           Anchored
           about
           two
           Spears
           length
           from
           the
           Mead
           ,
           where
           we
           took
           out
           our
           first
           Tier
           ,
           Provision
           ,
           and
           Utensils
           ,
           in
           order
           to
           cleanse
           our
           Ship.
           
        
         
           We
           understood
           on
           the
           16th
           ,
           that
           the
           Seditious
           was
           come
           to
           Fort
           St.
           Peter
           ,
           and
           that
           the
           Glutton
           ,
           laden
           with
           Sugar
           ,
           
           was
           sailed
           away
           for
           France
           ,
           the
           same
           Day
           we
           were
           entred
           for
           Careening
           .
        
         
           The
           English
           failed
           not
           to
           send
           a
           Packet-boat
           to
           fetch
           away
           their
           Prisoners
           ,
           with
           a
           design
           to
           discover
           what
           state
           we
           were
           in
           ,
           and
           the
           French
           Prisoners
           she
           brought
           over
           ,
           told
           us
           that
           the
           Guard-ship
           ,
           that
           had
           given
           us
           Chase
           ,
           when
           she
           understood
           what
           we
           were
           ,
           not
           thinking
           her self
           safe
           in
           that
           Port
           ,
           had
           sailed
           away
           for
           Antegoe
           to
           joyn
           another
           Ship
           of
           sixty
           Guns
           that
           cruised
           about
           that
           Island
           :
           The
           Packet-boat
           went
           from
           
             Port
             Royal
          
           to
           Fort
           St.
           Peter
           ,
           where
           all
           the
           English
           Prisoners
           that
           were
           in
           the
           Island
           ,
           were
           delivered
           up
           to
           her
           ,
           and
           some
           of
           whom
           the
           very
           same
           Night
           ,
           they
           were
           to
           sail
           for
           Barbadoes
           ,
           took
           away
           a
           small
           Privateer
           that
           was
           ready
           to
           put
           to
           Sea
           ,
           and
           had
           but
           one
           Man
           to
           look
           after
           her
           ;
           whereupon
           the
           English
           Officers
           were
           presently
           seized
           ,
           and
           the
           Packet-boat
           sent
           back
           to
           demand
           Satisfaction
           for
           this
           Seisure
           ,
           which
           was
           contrary
           to
           the
           Law
           of
           War.
           
        
         
           On
           the
           first
           of
           December
           ,
           
           tho'
           we
           had
           not
           fully
           embarked
           all
           our
           things
           that
           we
           had
           to
           put
           a
           Shoar
           ,
           we
           left
           the
           Careening
           place
           ,
           to
           the
           end
           we
           might
           put
           an
           stop
           to
           the
           desertion
           of
           
           our
           Men
           ,
           of
           whom
           we
           had
           already
           lost
           no
           less
           than
           thirty
           ,
           all
           of
           them
           brave
           young
           Fellows
           ,
           who
           sought
           for
           nothing
           more
           than
           an
           opportunity
           to
           fight
           for
           the
           honour
           of
           their
           Country
           ,
           in
           order
           to
           make
           their
           Fortune
           ,
           or
           lose
           their
           Lives
           ,
           and
           who
           were
           enraged
           at
           their
           sufferings
           now
           for
           two
           Years
           together
           without
           any
           hopes
           of
           attaining
           their
           Ends
           :
           And
           what
           is
           still
           more
           lamentable
           ,
           there
           were
           three
           or
           four
           of
           them
           found
           starved
           to
           Death
           on
           the
           Mountains
           about
           fifteen
           Days
           after
           .
        
         
           From
           the
           third
           at
           Night
           to
           the
           fourth
           we
           set
           Sail
           for
           St.
           
           Peter's
           Fort
           ,
           where
           we
           anchored
           at
           five
           in
           the
           Evening
           ,
           within
           Pistol-shot
           of
           Land
           ,
           and
           continued
           there
           to
           the
           thirteenth
           to
           take
           in
           Water
           .
        
         
           But
           seeing
           it
           is
           now
           a
           long
           time
           since
           we
           have
           had
           any
           account
           of
           the
           Islands
           of
           America
           ;
           and
           that
           the
           face
           of
           things
           there
           is
           much
           altered
           since
           fifteen
           or
           twenty
           Years
           ,
           I
           thought
           it
           would
           not
           be
           impertinent
           to
           make
           a
           short
           Description
           of
           the
           same
           ,
           whereon
           depends
           all
           the
           rest
           that
           are
           in
           our
           possession
           .
        
         
         
           Martinico
           was
           at
           first
           Inhabited
           by
           some
           French
           and
           English
           ,
           
           who
           took
           this
           ,
           as
           was
           done
           by
           all
           the
           other
           Islands
           ,
           as
           a
           place
           of
           refuge
           ,
           and
           each
           of
           them
           upon
           different
           accounts
           :
           They
           lived
           there
           a
           long
           time
           at
           Peace
           with
           the
           Indians
           ,
           who
           gave
           them
           a
           share
           of
           the
           Cassave
           and
           Fruits
           that
           they
           Cultivated
           ;
           but
           after
           the
           descent
           Monsieur
           
             d'
             Enambuc
          
           made
           on
           St.
           Christopher
           ,
           in
           the
           Year
           1625
           ,
           those
           Indians
           being
           put
           in
           the
           head
           by
           their
           Wizards
           ,
           that
           these
           new
           Guests
           came
           with
           an
           Intention
           to
           destroy
           them
           ,
           and
           to
           take
           away
           their
           Country
           ,
           they
           resolved
           to
           Massacre
           them
           ;
           but
           the
           French
           discovering
           the
           design
           ,
           took
           all
           the
           Caution
           imaginable
           to
           prevent
           it
           .
        
         
           In
           1626
           there
           was
           a
           Company
           erected
           for
           the
           American
           Islands
           ,
           and
           then
           they
           began
           to
           be
           Peopled
           ,
           and
           Ships
           frequently
           sailed
           thither
           ,
           to
           Trade
           for
           Sugar
           ,
           for
           which
           they
           paid
           ready
           Money
           ;
           but
           after
           divers
           petty
           Wars
           ,
           there
           was
           a
           general
           Peace
           made
           with
           the
           Indians
           in
           1660
           ,
           and
           they
           had
           St.
           Vincent
           and
           Domingo
           assigned
           them
           to
           retire
           to
           .
           They
           continue
           there
           to
           this
           Day
           ,
           and
           come
           constantly
           to
           Trade
           with
           our
           French-men
           ,
           between
           
           whom
           and
           them
           there
           is
           so
           great
           an
           unity
           ,
           that
           when
           they
           catch
           the
           English
           ,
           whom
           they
           know
           to
           be
           our
           Enemies
           ,
           they
           Murder
           and
           Eat
           them
           ,
           and
           the
           French
           themselves
           have
           no
           power
           to
           bring
           them
           to
           give
           them
           Quarter
           :
           The
           Jesuits
           ,
           and
           other
           Orders
           settled
           in
           these
           Parts
           ,
           do
           from
           time
           to
           time
           make
           small
           Voyages
           into
           their
           Islands
           ,
           to
           Instruct
           them
           in
           the
           Principles
           of
           Religion
           ;
           which
           they
           hear
           with
           a
           great
           deal
           of
           Joy
           ,
           but
           reap
           little
           Benefit
           thereby
           ,
           as
           being
           still
           very
           tenacious
           of
           their
           old
           Superstition
           .
        
         
           The
           American
           Islands
           Company
           were
           of
           no
           longer
           Duration
           than
           the
           Year
           1651
           ,
           when
           they
           sold
           them
           to
           the
           Knights
           of
           Malta
           ,
           and
           several
           particular
           Persons
           ;
           but
           now
           the
           King
           is
           Master
           of
           them
           ;
           where
           he
           has
           erected
           Forts
           ,
           and
           keeps
           good
           Garrisons
           .
           Martinico
           is
           the
           residence
           of
           the
           General
           ,
           and
           Soveraign
           Courts
           of
           Judicature
           ;
           whereon
           depends
           St.
           
             Domingo
             ,
             Guadalupa
             ,
             Granada
             ,
             Mary-Galanda
             ,
          
           the
           Saints
           ,
           St.
           Cross
           ,
           St.
           Lucia
           ,
           and
           Tabago
           ;
           of
           which
           they
           have
           abandoned
           the
           last
           three
           .
           This
           Island
           is
           scituated
           in
           14
           degrees
           North
           Latitude
           ;
           and
           315
           ,
           25
           minutes
           Longitude
           ,
           stands
           high
           ,
           and
           
           is
           fifty
           five
           or
           sixty
           Leagues
           in
           Circumference
           .
           It
           has
           the
           conveniency
           of
           three
           Ports
           ,
           where
           you
           may
           lade
           above
           an
           hundred
           Ships
           every
           Year
           ;
           and
           their
           Names
           are
           the
           
             Cul-de-sac
             Royal
          
           ,
           the
           Bourg
           of
           St.
           Peter
           ,
           and
           the
           
             Cul-de-sac
             de
             la
             Trinity
          
           .
        
         
           
             Cul-de-sac
             Royal
          
           is
           a
           large
           Bay
           to
           the
           South
           of
           the
           Island
           ,
           
           and
           at
           the
           bottom
           whereof
           stands
           a
           pretty
           Town
           ,
           containing
           near
           three
           hundred
           Inhabitants
           ,
           where
           the
           General
           resides
           ,
           and
           the
           Courts
           of
           Justice
           are
           kept
           :
           The
           Streets
           of
           it
           are
           straight
           ,
           the
           Houses
           regular
           ,
           and
           mostly
           built
           of
           Wood
           ;
           and
           here
           the
           Capuchins
           have
           a
           very
           fine
           Convent
           .
           The
           Fort
           which
           is
           very
           advantageously
           scituated
           ,
           is
           built
           upon
           a
           large
           and
           long
           Point
           of
           land
           that
           runs
           out
           into
           the
           Sea
           ,
           and
           makes
           the
           best
           Careening
           place
           in
           all
           the
           Islands
           :
           The
           Fort
           is
           no
           other
           way
           accessible
           to
           the
           Sea-ward
           ,
           but
           by
           Layes
           or
           Banks
           of
           Rocks
           which
           do
           encompass
           it
           ;
           and
           the
           Town
           cannot
           be
           otherwise
           approached
           to
           ,
           than
           by
           a
           small
           but
           very
           narrow
           Clascis
           ,
           that
           is
           flanked
           with
           an
           half
           Moon
           ,
           and
           two
           Bastions
           ,
           lined
           with
           good
           Stone-work
           ;
           and
           defended
           with
           a
           Ditch
           
           full
           of
           Water
           ;
           they
           have
           eighteen
           and
           four
           and
           twenty
           Pounders
           mounted
           every
           way
           upon
           it
           ,
           and
           six
           Marine
           Companies
           in
           Garrison
           .
           Monsieur
           
             de
             Blenac
          
           before
           his
           death
           erected
           a
           Magazine
           of
           Powder
           there
           ,
           and
           a
           Cistern
           Bomb-proof
           ,
           so
           that
           the
           Fort
           is
           now
           in
           a
           Condition
           to
           withstand
           a
           whole
           Army
           .
        
         
           The
           Town
           of
           St.
           Peter
           is
           pretty
           large
           ,
           
           and
           better
           peopled
           than
           that
           of
           
             Fort
             Royal
          
           ;
           but
           to
           speak
           the
           truth
           of
           it
           ,
           it
           's
           no
           more
           than
           one
           Street
           ,
           a
           good
           quarter
           of
           a
           League
           in
           length
           ,
           full
           of
           ascents
           and
           descents
           ,
           and
           in
           several
           Places
           interrupted
           with
           diverse
           curious
           Rows
           of
           Orange
           Trees
           ;
           to
           say
           nothing
           of
           a
           River
           that
           runs
           cross
           the
           middle
           thereof
           ,
           that
           has
           excellent
           Water
           ;
           this
           River
           comes
           down
           from
           a
           great
           Valley
           ,
           that
           stands
           behind
           the
           Town
           ,
           and
           where
           may
           be
           seen
           a
           great
           many
           Sugar
           Plantations
           ,
           that
           are
           very
           agreeable
           to
           the
           Eye
           :
           At
           one
           end
           of
           the
           Town
           stands
           the
           Jesuits
           House
           ,
           which
           is
           curiously
           Built
           ;
           and
           at
           the
           other
           the
           Jacobins
           Church
           ;
           where
           also
           there
           is
           a
           small
           Convent
           of
           Vrsulines
           in
           the
           middle
           ,
           besides
           an
           Hospital
           ,
           over
           which
           the
           Brethren
           of
           Charity
           (
           as
           they
           are
           called
           )
           have
           the
           super-intendency
           :
           
           Most
           of
           the
           Houses
           there
           are
           built
           of
           Wood
           ,
           but
           very
           well
           ,
           and
           the
           Inhabitants
           are
           very
           Civil
           and
           Affable
           .
           France
           may
           be
           known
           there
           by
           the
           neatness
           of
           the
           People
           ,
           and
           Martinico
           can
           boast
           that
           her
           Females
           are
           as
           handsome
           as
           the
           Women
           of
           Europe
           :
           There
           had
           been
           a
           Fort
           at
           the
           mouth
           of
           the
           River
           ,
           which
           the
           Hurricans
           entirely
           ruined
           and
           levelled
           to
           the
           Ground
           ;
           they
           have
           no
           more
           now
           there
           ,
           than
           two
           Companies
           of
           Foot
           ,
           and
           two
           Batteries
           at
           both
           ends
           of
           the
           Town
           ,
           consisting
           of
           eight
           or
           ten
           Pieces
           of
           Cannon
           each
           ;
           but
           they
           are
           continually
           at
           Work
           there
           to
           raise
           new
           Fortifications
           .
        
         
           The
           English
           came
           thither
           in
           1693
           ,
           with
           sixty
           Sail
           of
           Ships
           ,
           and
           made
           a
           descent
           above
           the
           Town
           towards
           the
           
             Preacher's
             Point
          
           ,
           from
           whence
           they
           were
           vigorously
           repulsed
           by
           the
           Inhabitants
           ,
           who
           killed
           about
           fifteen
           Hundred
           of
           them
           upon
           the
           spot
           ,
           with
           the
           disadvantage
           of
           no
           more
           than
           twenty
           Killed
           and
           Wounded
           on
           their
           own
           side
           ;
           and
           Monsieur
           
             de
             Blenac
          
           signalized
           himself
           very
           much
           upon
           this
           Occasion
           :
           He
           Marched
           in
           one
           Night
           from
           
             Fort
             Royal
          
           with
           two
           hundred
           Men
           thither
           ,
           and
           so
           incouraged
           the
           Inhabitants
           ,
           that
           it
           
           may
           be
           said
           ,
           it
           was
           almost
           to
           him
           alone
           that
           the
           Success
           of
           this
           Expedition
           was
           owing
           .
        
         
           
             Cul-de
             sac
             de
             la
             Trinity
          
           ,
           that
           stands
           on
           the
           other
           side
           of
           the
           Island
           ,
           is
           much
           smaller
           ,
           and
           less
           frequented
           than
           the
           other
           Ports
           ;
           besides
           which
           ,
           there
           are
           divers
           small
           Places
           on
           the
           Sea-side
           ,
           where
           Barks
           and
           Canoes
           take
           in
           their
           Lading
           ;
           so
           that
           since
           the
           taking
           of
           St.
           Christopher's
           ,
           whose
           Inhabitants
           withdrew
           into
           other
           Islands
           ,
           they
           reckon
           Martinico
           to
           have
           three
           thousand
           Men
           bearing
           Arms
           ,
           and
           above
           fifteen
           thousand
           Negro-Slaves
           .
        
         
           This
           Island
           ,
           as
           has
           been
           already
           noted
           ,
           is
           very
           high
           and
           so
           full
           of
           Mountains
           ,
           that
           the
           middle
           part
           thereof
           cannot
           be
           inhabited
           ;
           but
           it
           's
           very
           fruitful
           in
           Sugars
           ,
           where
           they
           are
           now
           refined
           ,
           in
           Cotton
           ,
           Rocou
           ,
           Cinnamon
           ,
           Cocoe
           ,
           of
           which
           they
           make
           Chocolate
           ,
           in
           Magniot
           ,
           and
           the
           Fruits
           of
           the
           Country
           ,
           which
           I
           have
           describ'd
           already
           .
           They
           have
           very
           fine
           sort
           of
           Wood
           there
           ,
           especially
           that
           which
           they
           call
           the
           Gayac
           ,
           of
           which
           they
           make
           Pullies
           ,
           and
           such
           like
           things
           ,
           for
           the
           King's
           Men
           of
           War.
           
        
         
           These
           ,
           and
           several
           other
           Fruits
           ,
           which
           are
           transported
           thence
           into
           France
           grow
           
           in
           this
           Country
           mighty
           well
           ;
           and
           Sheep
           ,
           Oxen
           ,
           and
           Horses
           ,
           multiply
           amongst
           them
           apace
           ;
           and
           the
           Ships
           that
           sail
           thither
           ,
           whether
           singly
           ,
           or
           in
           company
           ,
           to
           lade
           Sugar
           ,
           carry
           with
           them
           Wines
           ,
           Corn
           ,
           Salt-meats
           ,
           and
           all
           sorts
           of
           Merchandizes
           they
           may
           have
           occasion
           for
           ;
           so
           that
           a
           Man
           of
           an
           Estate
           can
           live
           there
           ,
           as
           well
           as
           in
           France
           :
           But
           yet
           the
           high
           Scituation
           of
           the
           Country
           makes
           the
           Air
           unwholsome
           ,
           and
           there
           are
           but
           a
           few
           Ships
           that
           go
           thither
           ,
           whose
           Crew
           does
           not
           feel
           the
           Effects
           of
           it
           ;
           and
           we
           our selves
           ,
           lost
           about
           a
           dozen
           or
           fifteen
           Men
           ,
           who
           died
           as
           it
           were
           from
           one
           Day
           to
           another
           ,
           without
           any
           Symptom
           of
           being
           sick
           .
           The
           Inhabitants
           ,
           besides
           the
           Inconveniency
           of
           a
           bad
           Air
           ,
           are
           much
           incommoded
           with
           Ants
           ,
           Mousticks
           ,
           and
           a
           kind
           of
           an
           Hand-worm
           ,
           which
           they
           call
           Chiques
           ,
           and
           which
           fix
           themselves
           in
           the
           soles
           of
           the
           Feet
           ,
           and
           are
           so
           much
           the
           more
           troublesome
           and
           insupportable
           ,
           in
           that
           they
           cannot
           be
           rooted
           out
           from
           thence
           ,
           if
           they
           have
           once
           time
           given
           them
           to
           lay
           their
           Eggs
           there
           :
           Serpents
           are
           also
           very
           common
           in
           this
           Island
           ,
           and
           creep
           into
           the
           very
           Houses
           ,
           of
           which
           there
           are
           se●eral
           sorts
           ,
           whose
           stinging
           is
           very
           
           dangerous
           ;
           but
           the
           Negro's
           find
           Simples
           there
           that
           cure
           them
           presently
           .
        
         
           We
           made
           ready
           on
           the
           13th
           to
           go
           and
           take
           in
           Wood
           at
           St.
           Lucia
           ,
           
           and
           from
           thence
           to
           return
           to
           cruise
           on
           the
           Coast
           of
           Barbadoes
           ;
           but
           the
           Seditious
           had
           been
           ordered
           away
           for
           a
           Convoy
           to
           a
           Merchant-Ship
           ,
           bound
           for
           Guadalupa
           ,
           where
           she
           received
           Monsieur
           
             de
             Gennes
          
           his
           Commands
           ,
           to
           make
           the
           best
           of
           her
           way
           for
           France
           .
        
         
           On
           the
           14th
           ,
           
           about
           Nine
           in
           the
           Morning
           ,
           we
           anchored
           in
           a
           great
           Bank
           of
           Sand
           at
           St.
           Lucia
           ,
           where
           a
           very
           good
           Port
           may
           be
           made
           ,
           and
           convenient
           Habitations
           fixed
           .
           St.
           Lucia
           is
           of
           a
           high
           Scituation
           ,
           covered
           with
           Wood
           ,
           and
           rendred
           almost
           uninhabitable
           ,
           by
           a
           vast
           Number
           of
           Serpents
           that
           are
           to
           be
           found
           there
           ;
           but
           for
           all
           that
           ,
           there
           are
           two
           or
           three
           
             Indian
             Carbets
          
           ,
           or
           Villages
           ,
           upon
           the
           place
           ,
           and
           some
           Frenchmen
           ,
           who
           fetch
           Tortoises
           from
           thence
           for
           Martinico
           :
           You
           will
           find
           upon
           the
           Sea-shoar
           ,
           a
           great
           many
           Macheveliers
           ,
           which
           is
           a
           Tree
           that
           does
           not
           grow
           very
           tall
           ,
           whose
           Wood
           is
           very
           fine
           ,
           and
           its
           Leaves
           like
           unto
           those
           of
           a
           Pear-tree
           ;
           it
           bears
           small
           Apples
           ,
           that
           are
           of
           such
           a
           Smell
           and
           Colour
           ,
           as
           do
           invite
           People
           
           to
           eat
           of
           them
           ;
           but
           it
           's
           very
           dangerous
           to
           comply
           with
           the
           Temptation
           ;
           for
           there
           is
           no
           Antidote
           that
           can
           secure
           a
           Man
           from
           a
           speedy
           Death
           ,
           that
           hath
           once
           tasted
           of
           them
           :
           The
           very
           Leaf
           of
           it
           makes
           an
           Ulcer
           upon
           the
           place
           it
           toucheth
           ,
           the
           Dew
           that
           falls
           from
           them
           takes
           away
           the
           Skin
           ,
           and
           the
           very
           Shadow
           of
           this
           Tree
           makes
           a
           Man
           swell
           to
           that
           degree
           ,
           that
           it
           will
           infallibly
           kill
           him
           without
           speedy
           help
           .
        
         
           On
           the
           15th
           ,
           in
           the
           Afternoon
           ,
           we
           weigh'd
           Anchor
           ,
           and
           kept
           pretty
           near
           the
           Shoar
           ,
           that
           we
           might
           be
           able
           to
           get
           to
           the
           Coast
           of
           St.
           Vincent
           ,
           within
           two
           Leagues
           of
           which
           we
           found
           our selves
           next
           Morning
           by
           break
           of
           Day
           :
           But
           it
           was
           three
           in
           the
           Afternoon
           before
           we
           could
           draw
           near
           ,
           tho'
           we
           had
           a
           small
           Gale
           that
           was
           favourable
           enough
           ;
           and
           this
           made
           us
           suppose
           that
           the
           Currents
           were
           against
           us
           ;
           but
           it
           blowing
           at
           length
           ,
           at
           three
           of
           the
           Clock
           ,
           a
           fresh
           Gale
           ,
           we
           made
           a
           little
           more
           sail
           ,
           and
           coasted
           within
           half
           a
           League
           of
           the
           Island
           ,
           where
           we
           saw
           a
           very
           fine
           Country
           ,
           and
           seemingly
           well
           cultivated
           :
           The
           same
           is
           inhabited
           ,
           on
           the
           Coast
           by
           which
           we
           passed
           ,
           with
           twelve
           or
           fifteen
           
           hundred
           Negro's
           ,
           that
           fled
           thither
           from
           the
           Neighbouring
           Islands
           ,
           and
           especially
           from
           Barbadoes
           ,
           from
           whence
           they
           made
           their
           Escapes
           ,
           with
           a
           favourable
           Wind
           ,
           in
           their
           Masters
           Canoes
           :
           But
           the
           other
           side
           is
           Peopled
           with
           two
           or
           three
           thousand
           Indians
           ,
           who
           have
           a
           great
           Trade
           with
           those
           that
           dwell
           upon
           the
           River
           Orenoquo
           that
           is
           on
           the
           Continent
           ,
           whither
           they
           pass
           in
           their
           Pirogues
           ,
           as
           they
           do
           to
           all
           the
           Islands
           scituate
           in
           the
           Gulph
           of
           Mexico
           ;
           and
           that
           which
           is
           very
           wonderful
           ,
           is
           ,
           That
           they
           are
           never
           overtaken
           with
           bad
           Weather
           ,
           but
           that
           on
           the
           contrary
           ,
           they
           are
           always
           aware
           of
           the
           Day
           wherein
           an
           Hurricane
           happens
           ,
           a
           long
           time
           before
           the
           same
           doth
           come
           to
           pass
           .
        
         
           St.
           Vincent
           is
           also
           high
           of
           Scituation
           ,
           abounding
           in
           Fruits
           ,
           Fowl
           ,
           in
           Goats
           and
           Hogs
           .
           There
           is
           a
           very
           fine
           Port
           there
           to
           Lee-ward
           ,
           which
           the
           English
           some
           Years
           since
           ,
           would
           have
           made
           themselves
           Masters
           of
           ;
           but
           the
           Indians
           prevented
           their
           making
           a
           Descent
           ,
           with
           Showers
           of
           poison'd
           Arrows
           ,
           and
           the
           Assistance
           of
           the
           Negro's
           ,
           who
           took
           Vengeance
           on
           them
           for
           all
           the
           ill
           Usage
           they
           had
           met
           with
           at
           the
           hands
           of
           that
           Nation
           .
        
         
         
           On
           the
           17th
           we
           doubled
           that
           Place
           they
           call
           the
           Pomgranates
           ,
           and
           next
           Day
           saw
           the
           Island
           of
           Tabago
           ,
           which
           the
           Mareschal
           
             d'
             Estre
          
           took
           from
           the
           Dutch
           in
           1678.
           after
           two
           of
           the
           sharpest
           Engagements
           that
           have
           been
           heard
           of
           ;
           but
           this
           Island
           is
           now
           desolate
           ,
           and
           serves
           only
           for
           a
           place
           of
           Retreat
           to
           Birds
           .
           About
           Noon
           we
           steered
           towards
           Barbadoes
           ,
           which
           we
           discovered
           on
           the
           one
           and
           twentieth
           ;
           and
           having
           a
           fair
           Wind
           on
           the
           25th
           and
           26th
           ,
           we
           made
           much
           of
           our
           way
           towards
           Barbadoes
           .
        
         
           On
           the
           31th
           we
           discovered
           ,
           by
           break
           of
           Day
           ,
           
           a
           small
           Vessel
           to
           Leeward
           ,
           and
           made
           all
           the
           Sail
           we
           could
           to
           come
           up
           with
           her
           ;
           and
           as
           she
           saw
           we
           were
           got
           near
           her
           ,
           and
           that
           it
           was
           to
           no
           purpose
           to
           flee
           ,
           she
           came
           to
           ,
           and
           staid
           for
           us
           :
           She
           was
           a
           Vessel
           of
           forty
           Tuns
           ,
           that
           had
           been
           three
           Months
           sailing
           from
           Bristol
           for
           the
           Barbadoes
           ,
           and
           was
           laden
           with
           Beer
           ,
           Syder
           ,
           Herrings
           ,
           Cheese
           ,
           Butter
           ,
           Hats
           ,
           and
           several
           sorts
           of
           other
           Goods
           ,
           being
           valued
           at
           20000
           Livres
           .
           We
           put
           eight
           Men
           on
           board
           her
           ,
           and
           sent
           her
           away
           for
           Martinico
           .
        
         
           Next
           Day
           ,
           which
           was
           the
           first
           of
           January
           ,
           1697.
           
           we
           discovered
           also
           another
           Vessel
           ,
           four
           Leagues
           to
           Windward
           
           of
           us
           ,
           and
           we
           bore
           up
           towards
           her
           till
           three
           in
           the
           Afternoon
           ,
           but
           could
           not
           come
           up
           with
           her
           ,
           which
           made
           us
           give
           o'er
           the
           Chase
           .
        
         
           On
           the
           6th
           we
           had
           a
           sight
           of
           Barbadoes
           .
           As
           Monsieur
           
             de
             Gennes
          
           ,
           who
           had
           been
           sick
           for
           fifteen
           Days
           ,
           found
           himself
           now
           sicker
           than
           ordinary
           ,
           he
           thought
           fit
           to
           return
           to
           Martinico
           .
           
           We
           left
           the
           
             Sun
             of
             Africa
          
           behind
           us
           ,
           to
           cruise
           ,
           which
           she
           did
           for
           five
           or
           six
           Days
           ,
           without
           purchase
           ;
           and
           we
           making
           all
           the
           Sail
           we
           could
           ,
           next
           Day
           about
           four
           in
           the
           Evening
           discovered
           the
           Coast
           of
           St.
           Lucia
           ,
           which
           we
           left
           to
           Leeward
           of
           us
           ;
           and
           on
           the
           8th
           ,
           about
           ten
           in
           the
           Morning
           ,
           entred
           the
           Port
           they
           call
           
             Cul-de-Sac
             Royal
          
           :
           We
           were
           come
           very
           near
           the
           Fort
           ,
           and
           ready
           to
           cast
           Anchor
           ,
           when
           we
           met
           with
           a
           great
           Rock
           ,
           that
           took
           out
           three
           of
           our
           Ship
           's
           outer
           Planks
           ,
           without
           doing
           us
           any
           further
           Damage
           ;
           we
           quickly
           brought
           her
           back
           ,
           and
           anchored
           a
           good
           Cannon-shot
           from
           the
           Shoar
           ;
           and
           indeed
           it
           's
           dangerous
           to
           get
           nearer
           ,
           and
           we
           had
           good
           luck
           to
           come
           off
           so
           well
           .
        
         
           We
           discharged
           our
           Prizes
           ,
           and
           sold
           the
           Goods
           very
           well
           ,
           because
           the
           Inhabitants
           ,
           who
           were
           in
           daily
           Expectation
           
           of
           the
           Arrival
           of
           Monsieur
           d'
           Amblimont's
           Fleet
           ,
           wanted
           Provisions
           ;
           and
           it
           's
           certain
           they
           had
           not
           twenty
           Barrels
           of
           Meal
           left
           in
           the
           whole
           Island
           .
           The
           Free-booters
           had
           contributed
           very
           much
           to
           subsist
           them
           for
           the
           first
           Years
           of
           the
           War
           ,
           by
           the
           many
           Prizes
           they
           had
           taken
           on
           the
           Coast
           of
           Barbadoes
           ,
           St.
           Christopher
           ,
           and
           the
           other
           Islands
           belonging
           to
           the
           English
           ,
           but
           now
           their
           Merchant-ships
           sailed
           together
           in
           Fleets
           ;
           and
           there
           are
           also
           some
           of
           them
           ,
           who
           to
           avoid
           the
           Privateers
           ,
           go
           to
           the
           Coast
           of
           Tabago
           and
           
             la
             Trinity
          
           ,
           and
           come
           back
           again
           to
           recover
           Barbadoes
           .
        
         
           On
           the
           24th
           we
           made
           ready
           to
           sail
           for
           the
           Fort
           of
           St.
           Peter
           ,
           where
           we
           anchored
           on
           the
           25th
           ,
           and
           continued
           in
           that
           place
           till
           the
           fourth
           of
           the
           next
           Month
           ,
           to
           take
           in
           Sugar
           ,
           Cassia
           ,
           and
           Cocoe
           ,
           with
           which
           Martinico
           almost
           supplies
           all
           France
           :
           The
           Cassia
           grows
           in
           Husks
           about
           half
           a
           Foot
           long
           ,
           upon
           a
           Tree
           much
           like
           unto
           our
           Walnut-tree
           .
        
         
           The
           Cocoe
           grows
           no
           where
           but
           in
           moist
           Places
           ,
           
           and
           such
           as
           are
           but
           little
           exposed
           to
           the
           Sun
           ;
           the
           Tree
           that
           produces
           it
           is
           but
           small
           ,
           the
           Fruit
           is
           long
           and
           uneven
           ,
           like
           a
           Cucumber
           ;
           
           when
           it
           is
           ripe
           they
           gather
           it
           ,
           and
           leave
           it
           for
           a
           time
           to
           dry
           in
           the
           Sun
           ;
           it
           's
           properly
           nothing
           else
           but
           a
           rind
           ,
           like
           that
           of
           the
           Pomgranate
           ,
           that
           contains
           about
           five
           and
           twenty
           ,
           or
           thirty
           Beans
           ,
           of
           which
           thy
           make
           Chocolate
           .
        
         
           On
           the
           31st
           .
           we
           fitted
           out
           a
           Brigantine
           ,
           to
           sail
           to
           Barbadoes
           ,
           to
           exchange
           the
           Prisoners
           they
           had
           made
           of
           the
           Crew
           of
           a
           small
           Free-booter
           ,
           that
           had
           been
           taken
           in
           sight
           of
           Guadalupa
           .
        
         
           I
           have
           a
           mind
           ,
           before
           we
           go
           from
           hence
           ,
           to
           relate
           the
           Adventure
           of
           our
           Poor
           Mango
           ,
           who
           gave
           us
           continually
           some
           diversion
           or
           other
           ;
           this
           was
           an
           old
           Monkey
           we
           had
           ,
           belonging
           once
           to
           the
           Governour
           of
           Gambie
           ;
           who
           was
           so
           prodigiously
           strong
           ,
           that
           he
           broke
           his
           Chain
           at
           least
           once
           in
           eight
           Hours
           ;
           and
           as
           soon
           as
           he
           got
           loose
           ,
           he
           failed
           not
           to
           make
           a
           Ravage
           :
           His
           main
           Care
           was
           to
           get
           him
           a
           Dinner
           ,
           and
           when
           he
           had
           fooled
           any
           poor
           Seaman
           out
           of
           his
           Mess
           ,
           it
           was
           very
           pleasant
           to
           see
           him
           get
           up
           to
           the
           top
           of
           the
           Masts
           ,
           and
           to
           jump
           from
           one
           Sail
           unto
           another
           with
           a
           dish
           of
           Rice
           ,
           or
           a
           great
           Piece
           of
           Bacon
           in
           his
           Paws
           .
           If
           any
           one
           was
           
           so
           bold
           as
           to
           go
           about
           to
           take
           away
           his
           prey
           ,
           he
           threw
           a
           Cannon-ball
           at
           his
           Head
           ,
           or
           what
           ever
           else
           came
           in
           his
           way
           ;
           all
           which
           was
           nothing
           in
           comparison
           of
           the
           Wounds
           of
           his
           Teeth
           ,
           which
           made
           such
           an
           Impression
           ,
           that
           the
           Marks
           of
           them
           some
           times
           remained
           for
           the
           space
           of
           two
           Months
           and
           upwards
           .
           At
           last
           he
           took
           upon
           him
           to
           throw
           into
           the
           Sea
           the
           Wheels
           of
           an
           Ivory-Clock
           which
           Monsieur
           
             de
             Gennes
          
           had
           ordered
           to
           be
           made
           ,
           and
           took
           up
           two
           Years
           time
           in
           the
           doing
           :
           But
           this
           was
           no
           sooner
           known
           ,
           than
           that
           the
           poor
           Devil
           was
           condemned
           to
           have
           his
           head
           chopped
           off
           ,
           and
           therefore
           he
           was
           carryed
           a
           Shoar
           to
           have
           the
           Sentence
           Executed
           upon
           him
           ;
           but
           he
           managed
           his
           part
           so
           well
           ,
           that
           after
           two
           or
           three
           Pistols
           shot
           at
           him
           ,
           he
           broke
           his
           Cord
           and
           took
           to
           his
           feet
           ;
           and
           all
           that
           Day
           we
           saw
           the
           poor
           Animal
           ,
           as
           wounded
           as
           he
           was
           ,
           run
           up
           and
           down
           along
           the
           Shoar
           ,
           to
           seek
           out
           an
           opportunity
           to
           return
           on
           Board
           ;
           and
           if
           he
           was
           much
           concerned
           for
           losing
           of
           us
           ,
           we
           were
           no
           less
           to
           find
           our selves
           deprived
           of
           his
           dear
           Company
           .
        
         
         
           From
           the
           fourth
           at
           Night
           to
           the
           fifth
           of
           February
           ,
           
           we
           made
           ready
           to
           sail
           for
           Guadalupa
           .
           As
           for
           our
           Great
           Prize
           which
           remained
           at
           Fort
           Royal
           ,
           to
           dispose
           of
           her
           Wood
           ,
           and
           relade
           with
           Sugar
           ,
           we
           left
           twenty
           Men
           on
           board
           of
           her
           ;
           but
           for
           the
           other
           two
           Prizes
           ,
           we
           sold
           them
           ,
           tho'
           to
           no
           great
           advantage
           ,
           because
           they
           were
           but
           small
           ,
           and
           the
           Lading
           inconsiderable
           .
        
         
           At
           the
           
           Preacher's
           Point
           we
           met
           an
           English
           Prize
           ,
           taken
           by
           the
           Merchant-ship
           ,
           that
           entred
           at
           the
           same
           time
           with
           us
           into
           Cayenne
           ,
           near
           St.
           Christophers
           ;
           then
           we
           Coasted
           St.
           Domingo
           ,
           and
           on
           the
           sixth
           anchored
           very
           near
           the
           Shoar
           before
           Guadalupa
           ,
           even
           in
           the
           midst
           of
           the
           Town
           ,
           to
           the
           South-west
           of
           the
           Island
           ,
           at
           the
           bottom
           of
           a
           very
           high
           Sulphurous
           Cavity
           ,
           that
           casts
           out
           smoke
           continually
           ,
           and
           oftentimes
           fire
           .
           We
           got
           our
           full
           Cargoe
           in
           less
           than
           two
           Days
           ,
           and
           the
           Inhabitants
           came
           to
           intreat
           us
           with
           great
           earnestness
           to
           take
           off
           their
           Goods
           ,
           so
           that
           we
           could
           have
           laden
           fifteen
           Ships
           in
           fifteen
           Days
           time
           .
        
         
           This
           Island
           is
           very
           large
           ,
           and
           healthier
           than
           Martinico
           ,
           being
           divided
           into
           
           two
           parts
           by
           an
           Arm
           of
           the
           Sea
           ,
           called
           the
           Salt-River
           ,
           by
           which
           Barks
           may
           pass
           up
           when
           the
           Tide
           is
           in
           ;
           the
           Land
           is
           high
           ,
           but
           fruitful
           in
           Sugar
           ,
           Indico
           ,
           and
           Cotton
           :
           Here
           also
           they
           have
           
             Rocou
             ,
             Cassia
             ,
             Cocoe
          
           ,
           and
           very
           good
           Comfits
           .
           Fruits
           and
           Fowl
           are
           very
           common
           there
           ;
           and
           they
           have
           a
           sort
           of
           Birds
           about
           the
           forementioned
           sulphurous
           Cavity
           ,
           which
           they
           call
           Diabolins
           ,
           which
           are
           very
           large
           ,
           and
           as
           good
           as
           Pullets
           ;
           they
           live
           upon
           nothing
           else
           but
           Fish
           ,
           which
           they
           vomit
           up
           to
           feed
           their
           Young
           withal
           ,
           and
           the
           Inhabitants
           send
           out
           their
           Negro's
           to
           take
           them
           ;
           but
           whether
           it
           be
           that
           they
           are
           not
           used
           to
           it
           ,
           or
           that
           the
           Cold
           ,
           or
           the
           Air
           of
           the
           said
           sulphurous
           Cavity
           seizes
           upon
           them
           ,
           they
           are
           taken
           with
           such
           a
           languishment
           upon
           it
           ,
           that
           they
           cannot
           surmount
           without
           much
           Difficulty
           ;
           they
           also
           find
           several
           boyling
           Fountains
           in
           this
           Island
           .
        
         
           That
           part
           of
           the
           Island
           which
           stands
           to
           the
           Northward
           ,
           because
           of
           its
           being
           larger
           than
           the
           other
           ,
           is
           called
           
             The
             Great
             Land
          
           ,
           and
           hath
           been
           inhabited
           a
           long
           time
           ,
           but
           at
           present
           has
           not
           above
           an
           hundred
           Inhabitants
           .
           The
           other
           ,
           which
           is
           known
           by
           the
           Name
           of
           Guadalupa
           ,
           
           has
           two
           Companies
           of
           Foot
           in
           it
           ,
           about
           a
           thousand
           Inhabitants
           fit
           to
           bear
           Arms
           ,
           and
           a
           great
           Number
           of
           Negro-Slaves
           :
           The
           
             Jesuits
             ,
             Jacobins
             ,
             Capuchins
          
           and
           Carmelites
           ,
           have
           their
           Parishes
           there
           in
           distinct
           Places
           ,
           as
           well
           as
           in
           Mary-Galand
           ,
           and
           the
           Island
           called
           Saints
           .
        
         
           The
           Town
           where
           we
           cast
           Anchor
           ,
           is
           the
           most
           considerable
           and
           almost
           the
           only
           one
           of
           the
           Island
           ,
           being
           divided
           into
           two
           parts
           by
           a
           small
           River
           ,
           which
           runs
           from
           behind
           the
           sulphurous
           Cavity
           we
           have
           already
           mentioned
           ;
           it
           's
           large
           enough
           ,
           and
           the
           greatest
           part
           of
           the
           Houses
           in
           it
           are
           built
           of
           Stone
           :
           There
           is
           a
           Battery
           of
           eight
           pieces
           of
           Cannon
           erected
           in
           the
           middle
           ,
           and
           the
           same
           commands
           all
           the
           Road
           ;
           and
           at
           the
           end
           thereof
           ,
           upon
           the
           Bank
           of
           a
           swift
           Torrent
           ,
           stands
           a
           little
           Fort
           defended
           by
           eight
           pieces
           of
           Cannon
           ,
           and
           lined
           with
           good
           Stone-Work
           .
        
         
           The
           English
           made
           a
           Descent
           upon
           this
           Place
           in
           1691
           ,
           burnt
           the
           Town
           ,
           took
           away
           the
           Battery
           that
           stood
           in
           the
           middle
           of
           it
           ;
           and
           there
           was
           none
           but
           this
           Fort
           made
           good
           by
           the
           Inhabitants
           ,
           till
           Monsieur
           
             d'
             Vragny
          
           ,
           then
           General
           of
           the
           Islands
           ,
           came
           with
           three
           
           or
           four
           Men
           of
           War
           ,
           and
           some
           Merchant
           Ships
           ,
           fitted
           up
           in
           haste
           to
           raise
           the
           Siege
           ;
           when
           the
           English
           re-imbarked
           with
           Precipitation
           ;
           and
           left
           above
           two
           hundred
           Men
           in
           the
           Woods
           ,
           to
           the
           Mercy
           of
           the
           French.
           
        
         
           Between
           the
           tenth
           at
           Night
           ,
           and
           the
           eleventh
           ,
           we
           weighed
           Anchor
           ,
           and
           at
           break
           of
           Day
           saw
           a
           Brigantine
           ,
           that
           bore
           up
           towards
           us
           ,
           when
           we
           on
           our
           part
           did
           the
           same
           in
           respect
           to
           her
           ;
           upon
           which
           about
           Noon
           we
           fired
           three
           Pieces
           of
           Cannon
           ,
           which
           made
           her
           presently
           alter
           her
           Course
           ;
           it
           is
           likely
           she
           might
           be
           some
           small
           English
           Privateer
           ,
           that
           look'd
           after
           some
           Prey
           on
           these
           Coasts
           .
        
         
           On
           the
           12th
           and
           13th
           we
           were
           very
           much
           becalmed
           ,
           
           and
           on
           the
           15th
           we
           discovered
           the
           Island
           of
           St.
           Cross
           ,
           which
           many
           of
           our
           Crew
           were
           confident
           ,
           to
           be
           the
           Islands
           called
           the
           Virgins
           ;
           for
           indeed
           at
           a
           distance
           it
           appeared
           to
           be
           no
           other
           than
           a
           Number
           of
           little
           Islands
           separated
           from
           one
           another
           :
           Here
           they
           have
           Sugar
           ,
           Cotton
           ,
           and
           Indico
           ,
           great
           plenty
           of
           Fowl
           and
           Swine
           .
           And
           Cows
           and
           Horses
           would
           have
           multiplied
           here
           apace
           :
           But
           as
           they
           were
           from
           Day
           to
           Day
           apprehensive
           
           of
           the
           loss
           of
           this
           Island
           ,
           they
           caused
           the
           Inhabitants
           to
           withdraw
           to
           St.
           Domingo
           ,
           with
           all
           their
           Effects
           ,
           and
           entirely
           to
           abandon
           the
           Place
           .
        
         
           On
           the
           16th
           by
           break
           of
           Day
           we
           discovered
           St.
           Thomas
           ,
           
           that
           is
           to
           Leeward
           of
           all
           the
           Isles
           of
           the
           Virgins
           :
           It
           's
           very
           remarkable
           for
           many
           Banks
           ,
           and
           white
           Towers
           that
           do
           surround
           the
           Port
           of
           it
           :
           Upon
           our
           approach
           we
           discovered
           the
           Town
           ,
           and
           a
           great
           Fortress
           of
           Stone-work
           that
           defends
           the
           Entrance
           of
           it
           ,
           without
           which
           rode
           three
           large
           Ships
           .
           This
           Island
           belonged
           to
           the
           Danes
           ;
           the
           Hamburghers
           have
           an
           Agent
           there
           ,
           and
           the
           Product
           of
           the
           Place
           is
           Sugar
           and
           Indico
           ,
           but
           no
           very
           great
           Quantity
           of
           either
           ;
           and
           they
           would
           not
           think
           it
           worth
           their
           while
           to
           mind
           it
           ,
           but
           that
           this
           does
           facilitate
           the
           Trade
           they
           drive
           in
           Negro's
           with
           the
           Spaniards
           of
           Portorico
           ,
           that
           is
           about
           fifteen
           Leagues
           off
           .
        
         
           About
           Noon
           we
           doubled
           the
           Island
           of
           St.
           Thomas
           ,
           and
           left
           a
           great
           white
           Rock
           on
           the
           left
           ,
           that
           looked
           at
           a
           distance
           ,
           like
           a
           Hoy
           under-sail
           :
           This
           Euripus
           ,
           as
           I
           may
           call
           it
           ,
           is
           very
           commodious
           for
           the
           Merchant-ships
           that
           stand
           in
           fear
           of
           the
           Corsairs
           ,
           which
           they
           
           cannot
           many
           times
           escape
           ,
           when
           they
           sail
           by
           St.
           
             Christophers
             ,
             Saba
          
           ,
           and
           others
           of
           the
           Enemies
           Islands
           .
        
         
           On
           the
           seventeenth
           ,
           eighteenth
           ,
           nineteenth
           and
           twentieth
           ,
           we
           had
           a
           great
           deal
           of
           Rain
           and
           but
           little
           Wind
           ;
           and
           on
           the
           one
           and
           twentieth
           ,
           we
           past
           the
           Tropick
           of
           Cancer
           .
           From
           the
           twenty
           third
           to
           the
           twenty
           eighth
           we
           had
           variable
           Winds
           ,
           and
           very
           rainy
           Weather
           .
        
         
           The
           second
           and
           third
           of
           March
           we
           had
           great
           Winds
           ,
           
           Rains
           ,
           and
           foggy
           Weather
           ,
           and
           the
           following
           Days
           we
           were
           becalmed
           :
           We
           found
           our selves
           parallel
           to
           the
           Bermudoes
           ,
           but
           an
           hundred
           and
           fifty
           Leagues
           distance
           from
           it
           ,
           as
           being
           a
           Place
           which
           all
           the
           Ships
           that
           come
           from
           the
           Islands
           ,
           take
           care
           to
           shun
           ,
           seeing
           they
           have
           found
           by
           constant
           Experience
           ,
           they
           must
           meet
           with
           bad
           Weather
           there
           ;
           for
           the
           contrary
           Winds
           either
           forces
           them
           to
           draw
           near
           it
           ,
           or
           to
           pass
           to
           Lee-ward
           of
           it
           .
        
         
           On
           the
           6th
           ,
           7th
           ,
           8th
           ,
           and
           9th
           ,
           we
           had
           a
           fair
           Wind
           and
           moderate
           Weather
           but
           from
           the
           time
           of
           our
           leaving
           St.
           Thomas
           ,
           till
           we
           came
           parallel
           with
           the
           Azores
           ,
           we
           saw
           Herbs
           every
           Day
           
           floating
           upon
           the
           Sea
           ,
           which
           those
           who
           had
           sailed
           upon
           the
           Coasts
           of
           
             New
             Spain
          
           ,
           told
           us
           came
           from
           the
           Channel
           of
           Bahama
           ,
           from
           whence
           they
           were
           carried
           into
           the
           main
           Ocean
           by
           the
           rapidity
           of
           the
           Currents
           ,
           and
           then
           dispersed
           over
           all
           this
           Sea
           ,
           by
           the
           Westerly
           Winds
           that
           continually
           blow
           upon
           the
           Coasts
           of
           Virginia
           and
           New-England
           .
        
         
           On
           the
           10th
           we
           had
           both
           Winds
           and
           Rain
           ,
           and
           the
           Weather
           was
           very
           cold
           ;
           we
           came
           parallel
           to
           the
           Azores
           ,
           and
           kept
           at
           an
           hundred
           and
           fifty
           Leagues
           distance
           from
           the
           Isle
           of
           Corva
           .
        
         
           On
           the
           11th
           we
           had
           very
           great
           Winds
           ,
           but
           they
           blowing
           of
           us
           onward
           in
           our
           way
           ,
           we
           were
           easily
           brought
           to
           acquiesce
           with
           them
           .
        
         
           Very
           early
           on
           the
           12th
           in
           the
           Morning
           ,
           the
           Winds
           blew
           very
           hard
           ,
           the
           Heavens
           were
           all
           over-cast
           ,
           and
           the
           Sea
           grew
           very
           boisterous
           and
           terrible
           ,
           and
           it
           was
           with
           very
           great
           Difficulty
           that
           we
           could
           carry
           low
           Sails
           :
           We
           had
           a
           Foot
           of
           Water
           in
           the
           Hole
           ,
           but
           we
           could
           not
           use
           our
           Pumps
           ;
           the
           Waves
           were
           as
           high
           as
           our
           Masts
           ,
           and
           came
           in
           upon
           us
           on
           all
           sides
           :
           And
           in
           this
           dangerous
           pickle
           
           we
           continued
           all
           the
           Day
           :
           But
           about
           ten
           at
           Night
           the
           Winds
           began
           to
           allay
           ,
           and
           on
           the
           thirteenth
           we
           rejoned
           the
           
             Sun
             of
             Africa
          
           ,
           which
           the
           bad
           Weather
           had
           separated
           from
           us
           the
           Day
           before
           ,
           and
           whose
           Gallery
           had
           been
           swept
           away
           by
           a
           great
           Wave
           .
        
         
           On
           the
           sixteenth
           ,
           being
           come
           parallel
           to
           Cape
           Finister
           ,
           we
           made
           all
           the
           Sail
           we
           could
           to
           get
           a
           sight
           of
           it
           ;
           and
           next
           Day
           ,
           at
           five
           in
           the
           Evening
           ,
           we
           saw
           a
           small
           Vessel
           two
           Leagues
           to
           Windward
           of
           us
           ,
           and
           which
           we
           believed
           was
           bound
           for
           the
           Bank
           of
           New-found-Land
           :
           But
           on
           this
           ,
           and
           the
           two
           succeeding
           Days
           ,
           we
           had
           Hail
           ,
           Rain
           ,
           and
           very
           cold
           Winds
           .
        
         
           On
           the
           nineteenth
           we
           discovered
           a
           pretty
           large
           Ship
           three
           Leagues
           to
           Leeward
           ,
           whom
           we
           chased
           for
           four
           Hours
           ,
           but
           could
           not
           come
           up
           with
           her
           .
        
         
           And
           on
           the
           twentieth
           ,
           by
           break
           of
           Day
           ,
           we
           found
           another
           within
           two
           Cannon-shot
           of
           us
           ,
           which
           made
           us
           put
           out
           all
           our
           Sails
           ,
           and
           give
           her
           chase
           ,
           which
           continued
           for
           seven
           hours
           :
           But
           as
           we
           had
           but
           little
           Wind
           ,
           we
           could
           not
           come
           up
           with
           
           her
           ,
           and
           so
           we
           resumed
           our
           Course
           again
           .
        
         
           From
           the
           two
           and
           twentieth
           to
           the
           27th
           ,
           the
           Weather
           was
           very
           hazy
           ;
           and
           for
           six
           Days
           together
           ,
           we
           saw
           neither
           Sun
           ,
           Moon
           ,
           nor
           Stars
           ,
           and
           had
           but
           very
           little
           Wind.
           
        
         
           On
           the
           17th
           we
           saw
           three
           Ships
           to
           Windward
           of
           us
           ,
           which
           we
           did
           not
           think
           convenient
           to
           look
           after
           ,
           seeing
           our
           Provision
           was
           now
           almost
           spent
           ,
           and
           that
           it
           was
           our
           Interest
           to
           improve
           our
           time
           well
           ;
           and
           this
           same
           Night
           ,
           we
           beheld
           a
           Rain-bow
           cross
           the
           Heavens
           ,
           which
           ,
           without
           receiving
           any
           Reflection
           from
           the
           Stars
           ,
           that
           were
           very
           much
           over-cast
           ,
           had
           a
           very
           lively
           red
           Colour
           .
        
         
           The
           28th
           ,
           29th
           ,
           and
           30th
           ,
           we
           had
           favourable
           Winds
           ,
           and
           fine
           moderate
           Weather
           .
        
         
           But
           now
           the
           first
           Day
           of
           the
           Month
           of
           April
           being
           come
           ,
           
           the
           Wind
           chopp'd
           about
           all
           of
           a
           sudden
           ,
           and
           came
           contrary
           ;
           at
           what
           time
           we
           accounted
           our selves
           not
           above
           fifty
           Leagues
           from
           Cape
           Finister
           :
           Next
           Day
           the
           Winds
           bare
           hard
           upon
           us
           ,
           and
           disabled
           us
           to
           make
           the
           Cape
           .
        
         
         
           But
           on
           the
           fourth
           and
           fifth
           they
           began
           to
           allay
           ,
           and
           proved
           fair
           enough
           ;
           and
           next
           Day
           ,
           at
           seven
           in
           the
           Morning
           ,
           we
           discovered
           about
           a
           League
           from
           us
           to
           Leeward
           ,
           a
           pretty
           large
           Ship
           ,
           which
           we
           chased
           all
           Night
           long
           ,
           gained
           much
           upon
           her
           ,
           and
           had
           it
           not
           been
           for
           a
           Fog
           that
           fell
           for
           two
           Hours
           ,
           by
           favour
           of
           which
           she
           sailed
           away
           ,
           she
           had
           certainly
           given
           us
           either
           Bullets
           or
           Bread
           ,
           which
           last
           we
           now
           most
           wanted
           ,
           all
           our
           Provisions
           being
           spent
           ,
           and
           the
           Winds
           still
           contrary
           .
        
         
           On
           the
           eighth
           we
           saw
           Pewets
           ,
           and
           other
           Sea-birds
           ,
           who
           are
           never
           seen
           very
           far
           from
           the
           Shoar
           ;
           next
           Day
           being
           the
           ninth
           ,
           we
           met
           with
           a
           sort
           of
           little
           Sparrows
           ,
           who
           passed
           over
           our
           Sail-yards
           without
           resting
           themselves
           ;
           and
           this
           was
           an
           infallible
           sign
           unto
           us
           ,
           that
           we
           were
           not
           far
           from
           Land.
           
        
         
           On
           the
           12th
           at
           break
           of
           Day
           ,
           we
           descry'd
           two
           Ships
           at
           a
           League
           's
           distance
           from
           us
           ,
           but
           we
           could
           not
           come
           up
           with
           them
           ,
           our
           Ships
           being
           too
           foul
           ,
           too
           full
           of
           Herbs
           and
           Shell-work
           ,
           to
           think
           of
           gaining
           upon
           Vessels
           newly
           careened
           ,
           as
           we
           apprehended
           these
           to
           be
           .
        
         
         
           On
           the
           13th
           we
           saw
           several
           Birds
           that
           waited
           as
           well
           as
           we
           ,
           for
           a
           favourable
           Wind
           to
           put
           them
           a-shoar
           ;
           next
           Day
           the
           Wind
           was
           boisterous
           ,
           and
           we
           had
           much
           Rain
           ,
           Hail
           and
           melting
           Snow
           :
           And
           we
           lost
           Company
           with
           the
           
             Sun
             of
             Africa
          
           in
           a
           Fog
           ,
           who
           not
           observing
           the
           Signal
           ,
           sailed
           away
           ,
           while
           we
           were
           setting
           our
           Round-tops
           ,
           that
           were
           displaced
           ,
           in
           order
           again
           .
        
         
           On
           the
           15th
           the
           Wind
           being
           somewhat
           allay'd
           ,
           and
           the
           Weather
           clearing
           up
           ,
           about
           break
           of
           Day
           we
           saw
           five
           Ships
           ,
           three
           to
           the
           Star-board
           ,
           and
           two
           to
           the
           Lar-board
           ;
           but
           we
           were
           not
           in
           a
           Condition
           to
           go
           and
           look
           after
           any
           them
           .
        
         
           By
           the
           sixteenth
           our
           Provision
           was
           all
           spent
           ,
           
           and
           we
           necessitated
           to
           use
           the
           Sugar
           and
           Cocoe
           of
           the
           Merchants
           ,
           to
           make
           Chocolate
           for
           the
           Ships
           Crew
           ;
           which
           is
           a
           Liquor
           that
           is
           of
           a
           very
           nourishing
           nature
           ,
           and
           might
           serve
           instead
           of
           Victuals
           ;
           but
           our
           Seamen
           ,
           who
           were
           not
           accustomed
           to
           it
           ,
           did
           not
           like
           it
           at
           all
           ,
           and
           said
           it
           made
           their
           heads
           giddy
           .
        
         
           On
           the
           17th
           at
           Sun
           rising
           ,
           we
           thought
           we
           had
           the
           sight
           of
           the
           Tower
           of
           Cordovan
           ,
           but
           our
           joy
           was
           short-lived
           ,
           and
           
           this
           Tower
           was
           all
           of
           a
           sudden
           Transformed
           into
           a
           Ship.
           
        
         
           At
           last
           on
           the
           18th
           ,
           after
           a
           traverse
           of
           sixty
           seven
           Days
           ,
           we
           sounded
           and
           found
           a
           Bottom
           ,
           and
           were
           come
           parallel
           to
           
             Pertuis
             de
             Maumusson
          
           ,
           about
           twenty
           Leagues
           distance
           from
           the
           Shoar
           :
           On
           the
           ninteenth
           we
           had
           but
           a
           small
           Wind.
           
        
         
           But
           on
           the
           20th
           we
           discovered
           Rochebonne
           ,
           which
           is
           fifteen
           Leagues
           wide
           of
           
             Pertuis
             d'
             Antioch
          
           ;
           the
           Sea
           ,
           tho'
           very
           even
           ,
           proved
           now
           to
           be
           broken
           and
           violent
           :
           About
           Noon
           we
           saw
           four
           Ships
           ,
           and
           they
           Steered
           the
           same
           Course
           with
           us
           .
           Soon
           after
           we
           discovered
           the
           Steeple
           of
           
           God's
           -
           Island
           ,
           about
           five
           in
           the
           the
           Evening
           ,
           the
           Whale-Tower
           in
           the
           Isle
           of
           Rhee
           ,
           and
           at
           Night
           we
           came
           to
           an
           Anchor
           ,
           to
           wait
           for
           the
           Tide
           .
        
         
           On
           the
           21st
           we
           weigh'd
           ,
           and
           by
           break
           of
           Day
           we
           found
           our selves
           within
           two
           Cannon-shot
           of
           four
           Ships
           ,
           which
           we
           had
           seen
           the
           Day
           before
           ,
           which
           made
           us
           put
           out
           French
           Colours
           :
           They
           did
           the
           like
           ,
           and
           we
           sent
           our
           Canoe
           on
           board
           them
           ,
           to
           know
           what
           news
           from
           France
           :
           They
           happened
           to
           be
           a
           Bark
           of
           the
           Isle
           of
           Oleron
           ,
           and
           
           three
           St.
           Malo
           Men
           ,
           half
           men
           of
           War
           ,
           and
           half
           Merchants
           ,
           who
           were
           going
           to
           take
           in
           Salt
           in
           the
           Isle
           of
           Rhee
           ,
           and
           from
           thence
           to
           fish
           on
           the
           bank
           of
           New-found-Land
           :
           They
           gave
           us
           six
           Baskets
           of
           Bread
           ,
           one
           Barrel
           of
           Bacon
           ,
           and
           some
           Beer
           ,
           which
           a
           little
           refreshed
           our
           men
           .
           The
           St.
           Malo
           men
           passed
           by
           
             Pertuis
             Breton
          
           ,
           and
           we
           by
           that
           of
           Antioch
           ,
           and
           so
           on
           till
           about
           Midnight
           ,
           we
           cast
           Anchor
           before
           Rochelle
           ,
           where
           we
           found
           the
           Sun
           of
           Africa
           ,
           who
           was
           got
           into
           that
           Port
           two
           Days
           before
           us
           .
        
         
           FINIS
           .
        
      
    
     
       
         
         
           An
           EXTRACT
           of
           the
           French
           King's
           Grant
           ,
           for
           the
           Printing
           of
           this
           Book
           .
        
         
           BY
           the
           King's
           Grant
           ,
           made
           at
           Paris
           the
           15th
           of
           October
           ,
           1697.
           and
           signed
           Midy
           ;
           the
           Sieur
           
             de
             Fer
          
           ,
           Geographer
           to
           the
           Dauphin
           ,
           is
           allowed
           to
           Print
           ,
           Sell
           ,
           and
           Dispose
           of
           ,
           by
           the
           Hands
           of
           what
           Printer
           or
           Bookseller
           he
           pleases
           ,
           a
           Book
           Intituled
           ,
           
             A
             Relation
             of
             a
             Voyage
             made
             on
             the
             Coasts
             of
          
           Africa
           ,
           Brasil
           ,
           
             the
             Streights
             of
          
           Magellan
           ,
           
             and
             Islands
             of
          
           America
           ,
           for
           the
           space
           of
           eight
           Years
           :
           And
           all
           Persons
           ,
           of
           what
           Quality
           or
           Condition
           soever
           they
           be
           ,
           are
           forbidden
           to
           Print
           the
           said
           Book
           ,
           
           without
           the
           Consent
           of
           the
           said
           Sieur
           
             de
             Fer
          
           ,
           upon
           Pain
           of
           such
           Penalty
           ,
           Confiscation
           of
           the
           Copies
           ,
           &c.
           as
           are
           held
           forth
           in
           the
           said
           Grant.
           
        
         
           Entred
           in
           the
           Hall-Book
           of
           the
           Company
           of
           Stationers
           and
           Printers
           of
           Paris
           ,
           the
           12th
           of
           October
           ,
           1697.
           
           
             Signed
             P.
             Aubouyn
             ,
             Syndic
             .
          
           Begun
           to
           be
           Printed
           the
           first
           time
           ,
           
             January
             the
             9th
             ,
             1698.
             
          
        
         
           THE
           END
           .
        
      
       
         
         
           BOOKS
           Printed
           for
           
             M.
             Gillyflower
             ,
             W.
             Freeman
             ,
             M.
             Wotton
             ,
             J.
             Walthoe
             ,
          
           and
           
             R.
             Parker
          
           .
        
         
           OF
           Wisdom
           ,
           Three
           Books
           .
           Written
           Originally
           in
           French
           by
           the
           Sieur
           
             de
             Charron
          
           ,
           with
           an
           Account
           of
           the
           Author
           ;
           made
           English
           ;
           with
           some
           necessary
           Advertisements
           .
           By
           
             George
             Stanhope
          
           ,
           D.
           D.
           late
           Fellow
           of
           Kings-College
           in
           Cambridge
           ,
           from
           the
           best
           Edition
           .
           Corrected
           and
           Enlarged
           by
           the
           Author
           ,
           a
           little
           before
           his
           Death
           .
        
         
           The
           
             Roman
             History
          
           ,
           from
           the
           Building
           of
           the
           City
           to
           the
           perfect
           Settlement
           of
           the
           Empire
           by
           
             Augustus
             Caesar
          
           ,
           containing
           the
           Space
           of
           727
           Years
           ;
           Designed
           as
           well
           for
           the
           Understanding
           of
           the
           Roman
           Authors
           ,
           as
           the
           Roman
           Affairs
           .
           By
           
             Lawrence
             Echard
          
           ,
           A.
           M.
           of
           
           Christ's
           -
           College
           in
           Cambridge
           .
        
         
           
             Now
             in
             the
             Press
             .
          
           
             The
             
               Roman
               History
            
             ,
             the
             Second
             Part.
             By
             
               Lawrence
               Echard
            
             ,
             A.
             M.
             
          
           
             A
             Compleat
             Body
             of
             
               Chirurgical
               Operations
            
             ;
             Containing
             their
             Definitions
             and
             Causes
             ,
             from
             the
             Structures
             of
             the
             several
             Parts
             :
             The
             Signs
             of
             the
             Diseases
             for
             which
             the
             Operations
             are
             made
             :
             The
             Preparations
             for
             ,
             and
             the
             Manual
             Performance
             of
             each
             :
             The
             manner
             of
             Cure
             after
             every
             particular
             Operation
             :
             Together
             with
             Remarks
             of
             the
             most
             skilful
             Practitioners
             upon
             each
             Case
             ;
             as
             also
             Instructions
             for
             Sea-Surgeons
             ,
             and
             all
             concerned
             in
             Midwifery
             .
          
           
             The
             whole
             Illustrated-with
             Copper-Plates
             ,
             explaining
             the
             several
             Bandages
             and
             Instruments
             .
             By
             Monsieur
             
               de
               la
               Vauguion
            
             ,
             M.
             D.
             and
             Intendant
             o●
             the
             Royal
             Hospitals
             about
             Paris
             .
          
           
        
      
       
         Notes, typically marginal, from the original text
         
           Notes for div A40503-e570
           
             June
             3.
             1695.
             
          
           
             The
             Island
             of
             Madera
             .
          
           
             July
             1.
             1695.
             
          
           
             Cape
             Verd.
             
          
           
             The
             Island
             of
             Gorea
             .
          
           
             *
             Pirogues
             .
          
           
             Superstition
             of
             the
             Negro's
             .
          
           
             The
             Description
             of
             the
             Island
             of
             Gorea
             .
          
           
             The
             People
             .
          
           
             Their
             Religion
             .
          
           
             Their
             Burials
             .
          
           
             St.
             
             James's
             Fort
             summon'd
             .
          
           
             The
             King
             of
             Block
             styled
             Emperor
             .
          
           
             The
             King
             of
             Barifet
             Tributary
             .
          
           
             The
             Bombarding
             of
             the
             Fort.
             
          
           
             The
             Fort
             surrender'd
             
          
           
             The
             Description
             of
             the
             Fort.
             
          
           
             August
             ,
             1695.
             
          
           
             The
             meeting
             of
             a
             Free-booter
             .
          
           
             The
             Fort
             is
             blown
             up
             .
          
           
             The
             Description
             of
             the
             River
             .
          
           
             Hutts
             .
          
           
             Balafo
             ,
             a
             Musical
             Instrument
             .
          
           
             Their
             Departure
             from
             the
             Coast
             of
             Brasil
             .
          
           
             Septemb.
             1695.
             
          
           
             They
             stand
             in
             for
             Gorea
             .
          
           
             Their
             Arrival
             at
             the
             Island
             of
             Cape
             Verd.
             
          
           
             A
             Description
             of
             St.
             
             Vincent's
             Island
             .
          
           
             Great
             Plenty
             in
             St.
             
             Antony's
             Island
             .
          
           
             Bourse
             .
          
           
             They
             steer'd
             their
             Course
             again
             to
             Brasil
             .
          
           
             Blowers
             and
             Porpoises
             .
          
           
             They
             passed
             the
             Line
             .
          
           
             Novemb.
             1695.
             
             
               Flying
               Fish
            
             .
          
           
             The
             Frigate
             .
          
           
             The
             Island
             of
             the
             Ascension
             .
          
           
             A
             Sow
             that
             brought
             forth
             a
             Monster
             .
          
           
             The
             Isle
             of
             St.
             Ann.
             
          
           
             Channell'd
             Cherries
             .
          
           
             Cape
             Frie.
             
          
           
             The
             River
             Jeneiro
             .
          
           
             A
             Scruple
             made
             to
             permit
             them
             to
             enter
             the
             River
             .
          
           
             The
             sick
             Men
             set
             on
             Shore
             .
          
           
             They
             do
             not
             salute
             the
             Town
             .
          
           
             The
             Governour
             's
             unfair
             Dealing
             .
          
           
             St.
             Sebastian
             .
          
           
             The
             Manners
             of
             the
             Inhabitants
             of
             St.
             Sebastian
             .
          
           
             A
             notable
             Adventure
             .
          
           
             Sugar
             Canes
             .
          
           
             Manioc
             .
          
           
             The
             Town
             of
             
               S.
               Paul
            
             tributary
             ,
             but
             not
             subject
             to
             the
             King
             of
             Portugal
             .
          
           
             The
             Generosity
             of
             a
             Portuguese
             .
          
           
             La
             Isla
             Grande
             .
          
           
             What
             Pyrogues
             are
             ,
          
           
             Jan.
             96.
             
          
           
             February
             1696.
             
          
           
             The
             River
             of
             
               Sancta
               Cruz.
            
             
          
           
             Cape
             24.
             taken
             for
             that
             of
             the
             Virgins
             .
          
           
             Cape
             Entrana
             .
             Boucaut
             .
             Bay.
             
          
           
             Cape
             Gregory
             .
             S.
             George
             '
             
               s
               Island
            
             .
          
           
             Penguins
             .
          
           
             Sea
             Wolves
             .
          
           
             Cape
             Froward
             .
          
           
             March
             3.
             1696.
             
          
           
             Famine
             -
             Bay.
             
          
           
             The
             Rode
             of
             Port
             Gallant
             .
          
           
             April
             1696.
             
          
           
             The
             Occasion
             of
             our
             Voyage
             .
          
           
             The
             Free-booters
             enter
             the
             Southern
             Sea
             thro'
             the
             Streight
             
          
           
             They
             continu'd
             there
             seven
             Years
             
          
           
             *
             A
             sort
             of
             Vessel
             .
          
           
             They
             return
             to
             the
             Northern
             Sea.
             
          
           
             Apparent
             Danger
             .
          
           
             They
             stand
             in
             for
             the
             Northern
             Sea.
             
          
           
             May
             1696
             
          
           
             Sea-Porcupines
             .
          
           
             June
             1696
             
          
           
             The
             Shallop
             lost
             .
          
           
             The
             Currents
             follow
             the
             Course
             of
             the
             Sun
             on
             the
             Coast
             of
             Brasil
             .
          
           
             Cape
             St.
             Antony
             .
          
           
             The
             Procession
             of
             the
             Holy
             Sacrament
             .
          
           
             News
             from
             Goa
             .
          
           
             Montauban
             Shipwreck'd
             .
          
           
             July
             ,
             1696
             
          
           
             A
             Description
             of
             All-Saints
             Bay.
             
          
           
             Aug.
             1696
             
          
           
             The
             miserable
             Condition
             of
             the
             Negro
             Slaves
             .
          
           
             The
             River
             of
             the
             Amazons
             .
          
           
             Cape
             of
             Orange
             .
          
           
             Sep.
             1696.
             
          
           
             The
             Description
             of
             Cayenne
             .
          
           
             The
             Mangle
             .
          
           
             Traffick
             .
          
           
             A
             Road
             from
             Cayenne
             to
             the
             River
             of
             Amazons
             .
          
           
             Fruits
             .
          
           
             Birds
             .
          
           
             The
             Government
             of
             Cayenne
             .
          
           
             The
             Indians
             of
             Cayenne
             .
          
           
             October
             ,
             1696.
             
          
           
             The
             taking
             of
             an
             English
             Fly-boat
             .
          
           
             Novem.
             1696.
             
          
           
             The
             taking
             of
             another
             Vessel
             .
          
           
             December
             1696.
             
          
           
             A
             Description
             of
             Martinico
             .
          
           
             Cul-de-sac
             Royal.
             
          
           
             The
             Town
             of
             
               St.
               Peter
            
             .
          
           
             Their
             Departure
             from
             Martinico
             .
          
           
             The
             Isle
             of
             St.
             Lucia
             ,
          
           
             An
             English
             Prize
             .
          
           
             January
             ,
             1697.
             
          
           
             They
             return
             to
             Martinico
             .
          
           
             Cocoe
             .
          
           
             February
             ,
             1697.
             
          
           
             St.
             Cross
             .
          
           
             St.
             Thomas
             .
          
           
             March
             ,
             1697.
             
          
           
             April
             ,
             1697.
             
          
           
             The
             Men
             brought
             to
             live
             upon
             Chocolate
             .